Omron 3g3mv

Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-series product.
Proper use
and handling of the product will ensure proper product performance, will
lengthen product life, and may prevent possible accidents.
Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product
with care.
NOTICE
1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other
products. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is
not possible.
2. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your
OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.
3. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt
to open the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death
and may damage the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.
4. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals
you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed.
S Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.
S Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been
turned off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)
5. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve
product performance.
Items to Check Before Unpacking

Check the following items before removing the product from the package:
S Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and specifications)?
S Has the product been damaged in shipping?
S Are any screws or bolts loose?
USERS MANUAL
SYSDRIVE 3G3MV
SERIES
Multi-function Compact Inverter
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified
operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.
Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in
injury to people or damage to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word Unit is also capitalized when
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name
of the product.
The abbreviation Ch, which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products,
often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation
for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
OMRON, 2001
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
General Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral
devices.
This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order
to describe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers
are on the product before use.
Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.
! WARNING
Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING
Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the

power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) are OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING
Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.
Doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING
Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may result in
injury.
! WARNING
Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.
! Caution
Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.
S Locations subject to direct sunlight.
S Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
S Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
S Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
S Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
S Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
S Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
S Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution
Do not touch the Inverter heatsink, regenerative resistor, or motor while the power is
being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing so may result in a skin
burn due to the hot surface.
! Caution
Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may
result in damage to the product or malfunction.
! Caution
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.
S Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
S Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
S Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
S Locations close to power supplies.
Transportation Precautions
! Caution
To avoid injury while transporting the product, do not hold it by the front cover or panel. Instead, hold by the bottom of the heat sink.
! Caution
Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.
! Caution
Use the eye-bolts only for transporting the Inverter. Using them for transporting the
machinery may result in injury or malfunction.
Installation Precautions
! WARNING
Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A

holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.
! WARNING
Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of

operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution
Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so
may result in fire or malfunction.
! Caution
Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.
! Caution
Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.
Wiring Precautions
! WARNING
Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been
turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING
Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in

electrical shock or fire.
! WARNING
Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing
so may result in injury.
! WARNING
Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.
! Caution
Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution
Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.
! Caution
Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution
Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.
! Caution
Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution
Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage

to the product or malfunction.
Operation and Adjustment Precautions

! WARNING
Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.
! WARNING
Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.
! WARNING
Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING
! WARNING
Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING
Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power
interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the
processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so
may result in injury.
! WARNING
Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator
is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING
Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so
while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.
! Caution
Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation

because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.
! Caution
Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution
Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.
! Caution
Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.
Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

! WARNING
Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.
! WARNING
Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF,
electrical shock.
! WARNING
Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized

personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.
! WARNING
Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock or injury.
! Caution
Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless

handling may result in malfunction.
! Caution
Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or

replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.
Warning Labels
Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration. Be sure to
follow the instructions given there.
H Warning Labels
Warning label
H Contents of Warning
Checking Before Unpacking

H Checking the Product
On delivery, always check that the delivered product is the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter that you
ordered.
Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales
representative.
D Checking the Nameplate

Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
D Checking the Model

3G3MV-A4007
Maximum applicable motor capacity

Voltage class
Installation type
Series name: 3G3MV Series
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity

001
002
004
007
015
022
037
055
075
0.1 (0.1) kW
0.25/0.37 (0.2) kW
0.55 (0.4) kW
1.1 (0.75) kW
1.5 (1.5) kW
2.2 (2.2) kW
3.7 (3.7) kW
5.5 (5.5) kW
7.5 (7.5) kW
Note The figures in parentheses indicate capacities for motors used in Japan.
Voltage Class
2
B
4
Three-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)

Single-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)
Three-phase 400-V AC input (400-V class)
Installation Type
A
C
Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models

Closed wall-mounting models
(NEMA 1 type for North America)
Note A-type models with 5.5-KW and 7.5-KW capacity also have NEMA 1 enclosure ratings.
D Checking for Damage

Check the overall appearance and check for damage or scratches resulting from transportation.
H Accessories
Set screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user.
About this Manual
This manual is divided into the chapters described in the following table. Information is organized by
application area to enable you to use the manual more efficiently.
Chapter
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 2 Design
Contents
Describes features and nomenclature.

Provides dimensions, installation methods, wiring methods, peripheral
device design information, and peripheral device selection information.
Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation Describes nomenclature and Digital Operator procedures for operating
and Monitoring
and monitoring Inverters. Data copying and other functions are
described.
Chapter 4 Test Run
Describes the method for controlling a motor through the frequency
adjuster on the front of the Inverter. This can be used for trial
operation of the system.
Chapter 5 Basic Operation
Describes basic Inverter control functions for users not familiar with
Inverters. The functions that must be understood to drive a motor with
an Inverter are described.
Chapter 6 Advanced Operation
Describes all of the functions provided by the Inverter. These functions
will enable more advanced applications, and includes functions that
will improve motor control through the Inverter, such as
responsiveness (torque characteristics), increasing speed accuracy,
PID control, overtorque detection, and other functions.
Chapter 7 Communications
Describes the general-purpose RS-422/RS-485 communications
functions provided by the Inverter, including connection methods and
sample programming for SYSMAC Programmable Controllers.
Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations Provides maintenance, inspection, and troubleshooting information.
Chapter 9 Specifications
Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and
dimensions of peripheral devices.
Chapter 10 List of Parameters
Lists basic information on Inverter parameters as a reference for users
already familiar with Inverter operation. Parameters are listed in order
with the page numbers of further information for easy reference.
Chapter 11 Using the Inverter for a Describes information on using the Inverter for a motor.
Motor
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-5
1-8
Chapter 2. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Input Fusing for Nema 4 X Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 Installation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-4 Removing and Mounting the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Standard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-12
2-13
2-20
2-21
2-35
2-37
Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-1 Names of Parts and their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-2 Outline of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-2-1 Parameter for Copying and Verifying Set Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-2-2 Parameter Copying Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-2-3 Parameter Read-prohibit Selection (Prohibiting Data Written to the EEPROM of the
Digital Operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-2-4 Parameter Copy or Verify Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Chapter 4. Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 Procedure for Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-5
Chapter 5. Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Setting the Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization (n001) . . . .
5-1-2 Setting the Control Mode (n002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Operation in Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Operation in V/f Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Setting the V/f Patterns (n011 to n017) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Selecting the Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-1 Selecting the Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-2 Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-3 Frequency Referencing by Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-4 Setting Frequency References through Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-18
Table of Contents
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Stopping Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-1 Multi-function Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10-2 Multi-function Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11-1 Setting the Multi-function Analog Output (n065 through n067) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11-2 Setting the Pulse Monitor Output (n065 and n150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5-25
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-35
5-37
5-37
5-38
Chapter 6. Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Precise Vector Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Adjusting Output Torque in Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Energy-saving Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Energy-saving Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Performing Energy-saving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 PID Control Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 PID Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3 Types of PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4 Block Diagram of PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-5 Input Selection of PID Control Target Value and Detection Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-6 PID Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-7 PID Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-8 PID Fine Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 DC Injection Braking Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Stall Prevention Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Overtorque Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-1 Undertorque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Torque Compensation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Slip Compensation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-1 Digital Operator Disconnection Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-2 Motor Protection Functions (n037 and n038) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-3 Cooling Fan Operation Function (n039) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-4 Momentary Power Interruption Compensation (n081) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-5 Fault Retry (n082) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-6 Frequency Jump Function (n083 to n086) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-7 Accumulated Operating Time (n087, n088) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-8 Frequency Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-9 UP/DOWN Command Frequency Memory (n100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-10 Frequency Reference Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-11 Input Open-phase Detection (n166, n167) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-12 Output Open-phase Detection (n168, n169) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10-13 Fault Log (n178) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-19
6-21
6-23
6-26
6-27
6-31
6-33
6-34
6-36
6-38
6-38
6-38
6-39
6-39
6-40
6-40
6-42
6-42
6-44
6-46
6-47
6-47
6-48
Table of Contents
Chapter 7. Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1 Inverter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 Setting the Communications Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 RUN Command Selection (n003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-3 Frequency Reference Input Selection (n004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs (n050 to n056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Message Communications Basic Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 DSR Message and Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Data Read (Function Code: 03 Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2 Data Write/Broadcast Data Write (Function Code: 10 Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3 Loop-back Test (Function Code: 08 Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Setting the Communications Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1 I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-2 Monitor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 Communications Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8 Self-diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 Communications with Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-1 Available Programmable Controller and Peripheral Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-2 Wiring the Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-3 Outline of Protocol Macro Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-4 Creating a Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-5 Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9-6 Communications Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-11
7-11
7-13
7-16
7-18
7-19
7-21
7-21
7-22
7-27
7-29
7-30
7-30
7-32
7-34
7-38
7-47
7-51
Chapter 8. Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-1 Fault Detection (Fatal Errors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Errors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-2-1 Parameters Fail Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-2-2 Motor Fails to Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-2-3 Motor Rotates in the Wrong Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-4 Motor Outputs No Torque or Acceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-5 Speed Accuracy of the Inverter Rotating at High Speed in Vector Control is Low . 8-16
8-2-6 Motor Deceleration Rate is Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-2-7 Vertical-axis Load Drops when Brakes are Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-2-8 Motor Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-2-9 Controller or AM Radio Receives Noise when Inverter is Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-2-10 Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated when Inverter is Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-2-11 Mechanical Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-2-12 Stable PID Control is Not Possible or Control Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-2-13 Inverter Vibration in Energy-saving Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-2-14 Motor Rotates after Output of Inverter is Turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-2-15 Detects OV (Over voltage) and Stalls when Motor Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-2-16 Output Frequency Does Not Reach Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-2-17 Inverter Does Not Run Because EF (Simultaneous Inputs of Forward and Reverse
Commands) is Detected, Or Motor Rotates Momentarily When Control Device Power is
Turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-3 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Table of Contents
Chapter 9. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-1 Inverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Option Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1 List of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2 CompoBus/D Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-3 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-4 Braking Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-5 Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-6 DC Reactor - Consult factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-7 DIN Track Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-8 AC Reactor - Consult factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-9 EMC-compatible Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
9-8
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-13
9-15
9-15
Chapter 10. List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Chapter 11. Using the Inverter for a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
1
Chapter 1
Overview
1-1
1-2
1-3
Functions
Nomenclature
New Features
Overview
1-1
Chapter 1
Functions
The multi-function compact SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-Series Inverter is the first compact
Inverter to feature open-loop vector control.
The 3G3MV Inverter meets EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.
Furthermore, the 3G3MV-Series Inverter incorporates a variety of convenient control,
network, and I/O functions that are versatile and easy-to-use.
H SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter Models

The following 200-V-class (three- and single-phase 200-V AC types) and 400-V-class (three-phase
400-V AC type) 3G3MV models are available.
Rated voltage
3-phase
p
200 V AC
Enclosure rating
Panel-mounting
g models (conform
(
to IP20,
IP
NEMA 1))
Closed wall-mounting
g models
(
(conform
f
to NEMA 1, IP20)
IP )
Single-phase
g p
200 V AC
Panel-mounting
g models (conform
(
to IP20,
IP
NEMA 1))
3-phase
p
400 V AC
Panel-mounting
g models (conform
(
to IP20,
IP
NEMA 1))
Closed wall-mounting
g models
(
(conform
f
to NEMA 1, IP20)
IP )
Maximum applied
motor capacity
0.1 (0.1) kW
0.25 (0.2) kW
0.55 (0.4) kW
1.1 (0.75) kW
1.5 (1.5) kW
2.2 (2.2) kW
3.7 (3.7) kW
5.5 (5.5) kW
7.5 (7.5) kW
0.1 (0.1) kW
0.25 (0.2) kW
0.55 (0.4) kW
1.1 (0.75) kW
1.5 (1.5) kW
2.2 (2.2) kW
3.7 (3.7) kW
0.37 (0.2) kW
0.55 (0.4) kW
1.1 (0.75) kW
1.5 (1.5) kW
2.2 (2.2) kW
3.7 (3.7) kW
5.5 (5.5) kW
7.5 (7.5) kW
Note The figures in parentheses indicate capacities for motors used in Japan.
1-2
Model
3G3MV-C2001
3G3MV-C2002
3G3MV-C2004
3G3MV-C2007
3G3MV-C2015
3G3MV-C2022
3G3MV-C2037
3G3MV-C2055
3G3MV-C2075
3G3MV-CB001
3G3MV-CB002
3G3MV-CB004
3G3MV-CB007
3G3MV-CB015
3G3MV-CB022
3G3MV-CB037
3G3MV-C4002
3G3MV-C4004
3G3MV-C4007
3G3MV-C4015
3G3MV-C4022
3G3MV-C4037
3G3MV-C4055
3G3MV-C4075
Overview
Chapter 1
H Powerful Torque Ideal for a Variety of Applications

The 3G3MV is OMRONs first compact Inverter incorporating an open-loop vector control function,
which ensures a torque output that is 150% of the rated motor torque at an output frequency of 1 Hz.
Ensures a more powerful revolution at low frequencies than any conventional inverter. Furthermore, the
3G3MV Inverter suppresses the revolution fluctuation caused by the load.
Incorporates a fully automatic torque boost function that drives the motor powerfully in V/f control.
Incorporates a high-speed current limit function, thus suppressing overcurrent caused by high torque
and ensuring smooth operation of the motor.
H Convenient Easy-to-use Functions

The FREQUENCY adjuster of the Digital Operator allows easy operation. The default setting is for
operation according to the FREQUENCY adjuster setting.
The Digital Operator has a parameter copy function ensuring easy parameter control.
Ease of maintenance is ensured. The cooling fan is easily replaceable. The life of the cooling fan can
be prolonged by turning ON the cooling fan only when the Inverter is in operation.
Incorporates a control transistor. Therefore, the Inverter will provide powerful control by just connecting a braking resistor.
Incorporates an inrush current preventive circuit that prevents contact weld at the input power supply
block.
H International Standards (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)

The 3G3MV Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.
EC Directives
UL/cUL
Classification
EMC directive
Low-voltage directive
Applicable standard
EN50081-2 and EN50082-2
prEN50178
UL508C
H Compatible with CompoBus/D and RS-422/485

Supports RS-422 and RS-485 communications conforming to the MODBUS Communications Protocol, thus making it possible to easily construct networks with the use of the Protocol Macro or ASCII
Unit mounted on an OMRON SYSMAC PC. The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark
of AEG Schneider Automation.
Connects to the 3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV CompoBus/D Communications Unit. A remote I/O function for
CompoBus/D communications is available to the 3G3MV Inverter, which ensures ease of communications just like standard I/O communications.
Furthermore, CompoBus/D communications conform to the DeviceNet communications protocol for
open networks, thus allowing construction of multi-vendor networks in which other companies
devices can coexist.
Note 1. MODBUS communications and CompoBus/D communications cannot be performed simultaneously. It is necessary to select the type of communications required.
Note 2. Only CompoBus/D Communications Units manufactured after January 1st, 2000 can be connected to 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters. Earlier products are not compatible with these Inverters.
1-3
Overview
Chapter 1
H Handles a Variety of I/O Signals

Handles a variety of I/O signals over a wide application range as described below.
Analog voltage input: 0 to 10 V
Analog current input: 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA
Pulse train input:
0.1 to 33.0 kHz set with parameter
Multi-function analog output or pulse train output is selectable as monitor output
H Suppression of Harmonics
Connects to DC reactors, thus suppressing harmonics more effectively than conventional AC reactors.
Further improvement in the suppression of harmonics is possible with the combined use of the DC and
AC reactors.
1-4
Overview
1-2
Chapter 1
Nomenclature
H Panel
Digital Operator
Front panel
mounting
screw
RUN indicator
ALARM display
Terminal
cover
Front cover
Four
mounting
holes
Bottom cover
Note None of the following 200-V models have a terminal cover or mounting holes. Instead, the front
cover is used as a terminal cover and two U-shaped cutouts are provided in place of the mounting
holes.
3G3MV-C2001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-C2002 (0.2 kW), 3G3MV-C2004 (0.4 kW), and 3G3MV-C2007
(0.75 kW)
3G3MV-CB001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-CB002 (0.2 kW), and 3G3MV-CB004 (0.4 kW)
1-5
Overview
Chapter 1
H Digital Operator
Data display
Simplified-LED
indicators
FREQUENCY
adjuster
Operation keys
Appearance
Name
Data display
Function
Displays relevant data items, such as frequency reference,
output frequency, and parameter set values.
FREQUENCY adjuster
Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz

and the maximum frequency.
FREF indicator
The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this

indicator is lit.
The output frequency of the Inverter can be monitored
while this indicator is lit.
The output current of the Inverter can be monitored while
this indicator is lit.
The values set in U01 through U18 are monitored while
The direction of rotation can be selected while this
indicator is lit when operating the Inverter with the RUN
Key.
The operation of the Inverter through the Digital Operator
or according to the set parameters is selectable while this
indicator is lit.
FOUT indicator
IOUT indicator
MNTR indicator
F/R indicator
LO/RE indicator
PRGM indicator
Mode Key
Increment Key
1-6
Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored

while the Inverter is in operation. Any RUN command
input is ignored while this indicator is lit.
The parameters in n001 through n179 can be set or
monitored while this indicator is lit.
Note While the Inverter is in operation, the parameters can
be only monitored and only some parameters can be
changed. Any RUN command input is ignored while
Switches the simplified-LED (setting and monitor) item
indicators in sequence.
Parameter being set will be canceled if this key is pressed
before entering the setting.
Increases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter
numbers, and parameter set values.
Overview
Appearance
Chapter 1
Name
Decrement Key
Function
Decreases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter
Enter Key
Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter

numbers, and internal data values after they are set or
changed.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation

with the Digital Operator.
STOP/RESET Key
Stops the Inverter unless parameter n007 is set to disable

the STOP Key. Functions as a Reset Key when an Inverter
error occurs. (See note.)
Note For safety reasons, the reset will not work while a RUN command (forward or reverse) is in effect.
Wait until the RUN command is OFF before resetting the Inverter.
1-7
Overview
1-3
Chapter 1
New Features
New features have been added to 3G3MV-Series models with 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW capacities (i.e., the 3G3MV-A2055/A2075/ A4055/A4075). These features are outlined
below and explained in detail in Chapter 6.
H New Features for All 3G3MV Models

D NEMA 4X Washdown Option
A NEMA 4X enclosure option is now available for 230 V and 460 V, three phase Units.
D Motor Rotation Selection (Parameter n040)

This function is used to determine the motor rotation direction.
D Accel and Decel Time 3 and 4 (Parameter n041, n042, n043, n044)
These times are used with multi-function inputs to add two sets of acceleration and deceleration rates.
These times are activated when multi-function input terminals programmed to settings 11 and 27 are
opened and closed in combination. Accel and decel times can be set independently.
D Multi-Function Analog Output Setting (Parameter n066)

A setting has been added (6) to monitor frequency reference with a 0-10 VDC analog output.
D Multi-Function Analog Output, Pulse Train Frequency Selection (Parameter n150)

Settings 40 through 45 have been added as new selections for the relationship between the monitor
output and the max frequency (40) or the frequency reference (41 through 45).
D Undertorque Detection (Parameter n117, n118, n119)

This function compares drive output current or torque with a preprogrammed level for a preprogrammed
time period. If the output is less than the predetermined level, an undertorque condition exists and can
be used to activate a multi-function output terminal.
1-8
2
Chapter 2
Design
2-1
2-2
Installation
Wiring
Design
2-1
Chapter 2
Installation
2-1-1 Dimensions
1.5 mm
(0.06 in)
H2
H4
1.5 mm
(0.06 in)
8.5 mm
(0.33 in)
8.5 mm
(0.33 in)
H 230 VAC 3-Phase

Voltage
Class
230 VAC
3-Phase
Model Number
C2002
C2004
C2007
C2015
C2022
C2037
C2055
C2075
Unit
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
W
68
(2.68)
68
(2.68)
68
(2.68)
108
(4.25)
108
(4.25)
140
(5.51)
180
(7.09)
180
(7.09)
H
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
260
(10.24)
260
(10.24)
Weight kg
(lbs.)
0.6
(1.5)
0.9
(2.2)
1.1
(2.6)
1.4
(3.5)
1.5
(3.7)
2.1
(5.3)
4.6
(10.1)
4.8
(10.6)
Weight kg
(lbs.)
0.7
(1.8)
1.0
(2.2)
1.5
(3.7)
1.5
(3.7)
2.2
(5.5)
2.9
(6.4)
76
(2.99)
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
131
(5.16)
140
(5.51)
143
(5.63)
170
(7.03)
170
(7.03)
H 230 VAC Single-Phase

Voltage
Class
230 VAC
Single-Phase
g
Model Number
CB002
CB004
CB007
CB015
CB022
CB037
2-2
Unit
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
W
68
(2.68)
68
(2.68)
108
(4.25)
108
(4.25)
140
(5.51)
170
(7.03)
H
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
76
(2.99)
131
(5.16)
140
(5.51)
156
(6.14)
163
(6.42)
180
(7.09)
Design
Chapter 2
H 460 VAC 3-Phase

Voltage
Class
460 VAC
3-Phase
Model Number
C4004
C4007
C4015
C4022
C4037
C4055
C4075
Unit
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
mm
(in)
W
108
(4.25)
108
(4.25)
108
(4.25)
108
(4.25)
140
(5.51)
180
(7.09)
180
(7.09)
H
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
148
(5.83)
260
(10.24)
260
(10.24)
D
110
(4.43)
140
(5.51)
156
(6.14)
156
(6.14)
143
(5.63)
170
(7.03)
170
(7.03)
Weight kg
(lbs.)
1.1
(2.6)
1.5
(3.7)
1.5
(3.7)
1.5
(3.7)
2.1
(5.3)
4.8
(10.6)
4.8
(10.6)
2-3
Design
Chapter 2
H Enclosed Wall Mounted Type (NEMA 4)

Voltage
Class
230V
3-Phase
460V
3-Phase
2-4
Model
Size
CIMR-V7CU-20P2
HP
0.25
20P4
0.5
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
40P2
.25
40P4
.5
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
Dimensions in inches (mm)

W
6.10
(155)
6.10
(155)
6.10
(155)
6.69
(170)
6.69
(170)
6.69
(170)
6.10
(155)
6.10
(155)
6.10
(155)
6.69
(170)
6.69
(170)
6.69
(170)
H
7.56
(192)
7.56
(192)
7.56
(192)
10.0
(254)
10.0
(254)
10.0
(254)
7.56
(192)
7.56
(192)
7.56
(192)
10.0
(254)
10.0
(254)
10.0
(254)
Weight Lbs.
(kg)
D
6.50
(165)
6.50
(165)
6.50
(165)
7.48
(190)
7.48
(190)
7.48
(190)
6.50
(165)
6.50
(165)
6.50
(165)
7.48
(190)
7.48
(190)
7.48
(190)
7.77
(3.52)
7.99
(3.62)
8.21
(3.72)
13.03
(5.90)
13.25
(6.00)
13.69
(6.20)
8.43
(3.82)
8.43
(3.82)
8.65
(3.92)
13.25
(6.00)
13.25
(6.00)
13.70
(6.20)
Design
Chapter 2
2-1-2 Input Fusing for NEMA 4X Inverters (Refer to the tables below.)
Input fuses are required for proper branch short circuit protection for all NEMA type 4X inverters. Use
the recommended fuses listed below. Failure to use the listed fuses may result in damage to the inverter
and/or personal injury. All other non-NEMA type 4 inverters can use either fuses or MCCBs for branch
circuit short circuit protection.
All models have UL evaluated motor overload protection built in. Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC. Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required.
H 230V 3-Phase
Model (NEMA 1) 3G3MV-C
(NEMA 4X) V7CU
Capacity (kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Rated input current (A)
Max. Time Delay Fuse
Rating (A)1
Max. Non-Time Delay Fuse
Rating (A)2
Max. MCCB Rating (A)
2002
20P2
0.6
1.6
1.8
3.20
2004
20P4
1.1
3.0
3.9
6.25
2007
20P7
1.9
5.0
6.4
10.00
2015
21P5
3.0
8.0
11.0
17.50
2022
22P2
4.2
11.0
15.1
20.00
2037
23P7
6.7
17.5
24.0
25.00
2055
25P5
9.5
25.0
33.0
45.00
2075
27P5
13.0
33.0
39.6
60.00
5.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
45.00
45.00
70.00
80.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
H 460V 3-Phase
(NEMA 1) 3G3MV-C
4002
4004
4007
4015
4022
4037
4055
40753
(NEMA 4X) V7CU
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P53
Capacity (kVA)
0.9
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.2
7.0
11.0
14.0
Rated output current (A)
1.2
1.8
3.4
4.8
5.5
9.2
14.8
18/21
Rated input current (A)
1.6
2.4
4.7
7.0
8.1
12.0
19.6
23.8 / 27.8
Max. Time Delay Fuse

Rating (A)1
2.80
4.00
8.00
12.00
12.00
20.00M
35.00
45.00
Max. Non--Time Delay Fuse

Rating (A)2
5.00
7.00
12.00
20.00
20.00
35.00
60.00
70.00
Max. MCCB Rating (A)
15.00 15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
Model
Note 1. Apply UL designated Class RK5 fuses.

Note 2. Apply UL designated Class CC or T non--time delay fuses.
Note 3. Model 47P5 rated 21A is only applicable to the NEMA 4X enclosed types.
Input fuse sizes are determined by NEC guidelines, and should not exceed the ratings shown in the
table.
Fuse Ratings are based upon 250 V fuses for 230 V inverters, and 600 V for 460 V inverters
Fuse Manufacturers Designators:
Class CC: KTK, FNQ or equivalent
Class RK5: FRN, FRS or equivalent
Class T: JJS, JJN or equivalent
2-5
Design
Chapter 2
2-1-3 Installation Conditions

H Installation Precautions
! WARNING
Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A

holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.
! WARNING
Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of

operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution
Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so
may result in fire or malfunction.
! Caution
Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.
! Caution
Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.
H Installation Direction and Dimensions

Install the Inverter under the following conditions.
Ambient operating temperature:
Panel-mounting models (conforming to IP20): --10 to 50C (0.1- to 3.7-kW Inverters)
Closed wall-mounting models (conforming to NEMA1 and IP20): --10 to 40C (5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverters)
Humidity: 95% max. (with no condensation)
Note 1. By removing the top and bottom covers from a 5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverter, it can be used as a
panel-mounting model (conforming to IP00) within an ambient temperature range of --10 to
50C.
Note 2. All C-type Inverters (closed wall-mounting models: NEMA1-type for North America) are
closed wall-mounting models, and can be used within an ambient temperature range of --10 to
40C. If the top and bottom covers are removed, the C-type Inverters can be used as panelmounting models (conforming to IP00) within an ambient temperature range of --10 to 50C.
Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. Alternatively, install it in a totally
enclosed panel that is completely protected from floating dust.
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or
other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
Do not install the Inverter on inflammable material such as wood.
If a 5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverter or a C-type Inverter is to be installed inside of a control panel, it must have
the top and bottom covers removed and be used as a panel-mounting model (conforming to IP00).
2-6
Design
Chapter 2
H Direction
Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so that the characters on the nameplate are oriented upward.
H Dimensions
When installing the Inverter, always provide the following clearances to allow normal heat dissipation
from the Inverter.
W=
30 mm min. (0.1 to 4.0 kW)

50 mm min. (5.5 to 7.5 kW)
Inverter
Inverter
100 mm min.
Inverter
Air
Side
100 mm min.
Air
H Ambient Temperature Control

To enhance operation reliability, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature changes.
If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner
to maintain the internal air temperature below 50C.
The life of the built-in electrolytic capacitors of the Inverter is prolonged by maintaining the internal air
temperature as low as possible.
The surface temperature of the Inverter may rise approximately 30C higher than the ambient temperature. Be sure to keep away equipment and wires from the Inverter as far as possible if the equipment
and wires are easily influenced by heat.
H Protecting Inverter from Foreign Matter during Installation

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Upon completion of installation, always remove the cover from the Inverter. Otherwise, ventilation will
be affected, causing the Inverter to overheat.
2-7
Design
Chapter 2
2-1-4 Removing and Mounting the Covers

To mount the Inverter, it is necessary to remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless
the Inverter is a 200-V model), and the Digital Operator. To wire the Inverter, it is necessary to remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless the Inverter is a 200-V model), and
bottom cover from the Inverter.
Follow the instructions below to remove the covers from the Inverter.
To mount the covers, take the opposite steps.
H Removing the Front Cover

Loosen the front cover mounting screws with a screwdriver.
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the bottom of the cover in
the arrow 2 direction to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
H Removing the Digital Operator

After removing the front cover, lift up the upper and lower right-hand sides (positions A) of the Digital
Operator in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
A
A
2-8
Design
Chapter 2
H Removing the Terminal Cover

D 0.2- to 3.7-kW Inverters
After the front cover is removed, press the left and right sides of the terminal cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the terminal cover in the arrow 2 direction as shown in the following illustration.
D 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters
Loosen the terminal cover screws in the direction of arrows 1.
Press the left and right sides of the terminal cover in the direction of arrows 2 and lift it in the direction of
arrow 3 as shown in the following illustration.
Note None of the other 200-V models have a terminal cover. Instead, the front cover is used as a terminal cover.
2-9
Design
Chapter 2
H Removing the Bottom Cover

D 0.2- to 3.7-kW Inverters
After removing the front cover and terminal cover, press the bottom cover in the arrow 1 direction
based on position A as a fulcrum.
A
A
D 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters
After removing the terminal cover, loosen the fastening screws.
2-10
Design
Chapter 2
H Removing the Front Cover of MV-4X - NEMA 4X/12 Models

IMPORTANT
Damage to the drive can occur if the front cover is removed too quickly
Remove the four mounting bolts and slowly take off the cover. Disconnect the cable between the face
cover and the control board located in the lower portion of the Drive. For mounting, reverse the direction.
H Removing the Bottom Cover of Water and Dust- tight type (NEMA 4)
Remove the four mounting bolts when installing cable glands, etc. Install wiring after inserting cables
through the cable glands and securing them to the bottom cover. See section 2-2-3 on recommended
cable gland sizes. Conduit plate gasket may be attached to the Drive and may not be removable in
some cases.
2-11
Design
2-2
Chapter 2
Wiring
! WARNING
Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been
turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING
Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in

electrical shock or fire.
! WARNING
Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing
so may result in injury.
! WARNING
Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.
! Caution
Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution
Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.
! Caution
Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.
! Caution
Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.
! Caution
Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution
Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage

to the product or malfunction.
2-12
Design
Chapter 2
2-2-1 Terminal Block

To wire the terminal block of the Inverter, remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless
the Inverter is a low-capacity 200-V model), and bottom cover from the Inverter.
There is a label under the front cover indicating the arrangement of main circuit terminals. Be sure to remove the label after wiring the terminals. The output terminal of the
motor has a label as well. Remove the label before wiring the motor terminal.
H Arrangement of Control Circuit Terminals

Control circuit terminals
H Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals

D 3G3MV-j2001 through 3G3MV-j2007 (0.1 through 0.75 kW):
3-phase 200-V AC Input
3G3MV-jB001 through 3G3MV-jB004 (0.1 through 0.4 kW):
Single-phase 200-V AC Input
Power supply input
Motor output
Braking Resistor
Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.
2-13
Design
Chapter 2
D 3G3MV-j2015 to 3G3MV-j2022 (1.5 to 2.2 kW): 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-jB007 to 3G3MV-jB015 (0.75 to 1.5 kW): Single-phase 200-VAC Input
3G3MV-j4002 to 3G3MV-j4022 (0.2 to 2.2 kW): 3-phase 400-VAC Input
Power supply input
Braking
Resistor
Motor output
D 3G3MV-j2037 to -j2075 (3.7 to 7.5 kW): 3-phase 200-VAC Input

3G3MV-jB022 to 3G3MV-jB037 (2.2 to 3.7 kW): Single-phase 200-VAC Input
3G3MV-A4037 to -j4075 (3.7 to 7.5 kW): 3-phase 400-VAC Input
Power supply input
2-14
Braking
Resistor
Motor output
Design
Chapter 2
H Main Circuit Terminals

Symbol
R/L1
S/L2
Name
Power supply
pp y input
p
t
terminals
i l
T/L3
U/T1
Motor output terminals
--
3G3MV-j4j: 3-phase 380 to 460 V AC

3-phase power supply output for driving motors. (See note 2.)
3G3MV-jBj: 3-phase 200 to 240 V AC
W/T3
+2
3G3MV-jBj: Single-phase
g p
200 to 240 V AC (See
(
note 1.))
3G3MV-j2j:
3G3MV
3-phase
h
200 to
t 230 V AC
j2j 3
V/T2
B1
B2
+1
Description
3G3MV-j2j: 3-phase
p
200 to 230 V AC
Braking
g Resistor
connection
i terminals
i l
Connection terminals +1
and +2:
DC reactor connection
terminals
+1 and --:
DC power supply input
terminals
Ground terminal

Terminals for attaching
g an external Braking
g Resistor or a Braking
g
R i
Resistor
Unit.
U i (Connect
(C
to detect
d
overvoltage
l
during
d i braking.)
b ki )
Connect the DC reactor for suppressing harmonics to terminals +1
and +2.
When driving the Inverter with DC power, input the DC power to
terminals +1 and --.
(Terminal +1 is a positive terminal.)
terminal )
Be sure to ground the terminal under the following conditions.

3G3MV-j2j: Ground at a resistance of 100 or less.
3G3MV-jBj: Ground at a resistance of 100 or less.
3G3MV-j4j: Ground at a resistance of 10 or less. To conform
to EC Directives, connect to the neutral point of the power supply.
Note
Be sure to connect the ground terminal directly to the

motor frame ground.
Note 1. Connect single-phase input to both the R/L1 terminal and the S/L2 terminal.
Note 2. The maximum voltage at the output side corresponds to the power supply voltage for Inverter
input.
2-15
Design
Chapter 2
H Control Circuit Terminals

Symbol
Input S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
SC
FS
FR
FC
RP
CN2
1
2
3
2-16
Name
Multi-function input 1 (Forward/Stop)
Multi-function input 2
(Reverse/Stop)
(External fault: Normally
open)
Multi-function input 4 (Fault
reset)
Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed reference 1)
Multi-function input 6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)
Multi-function input 7 (Inching frequency command)
Sequence input common
Frequency reference
power supply output
Frequency reference input
Frequency reference common
Pulse train input
Multi-function analog voltage input

Multi-function analog current input
Multi-function analog input
common
Specification
Photocoupler
8 mA at 24 V DC (See
notes 2 and 3.))
(
20 mA at 12 V DC
0 to 10 V DC (Input
( p impedance:
p
20 k))
Response frequency: 0 to 33 kHz (30% to 70% ED)

H: 3.5 to 13.2 V
L: 0.8 V max.
(Input impedance: 2.24 k)
Voltage input (between terminals 1 and 3): 0 to 10 V DC
20 k))
((Input
p impedance:
p
Current input (between terminals 2 and 3): 4 to 20 mA
(Input impedance: 250 )
Design
Symbol
OutMA
put
MB
MC
P1
P2
PC
AM
Chapter 2
Name
Multi-function contact output (Normally open:
During operation)
Multi-function contact output (Normally closed:
During operation)
Multi-function contact output common
Multi-function photocoupler
output 1 (Fault)
output 2 (Fault)
output common
Multi-function analog output
Specification
Relay output
1 A max. at 30 V DC
1 A max. at 250 V AC
Open collector output 50 mA max.

at 48 V DC
Analog output: 2 mA max. at 0 to 10 V DC

Pulse train output (max. output voltage: 12 V DC)
(See note 4.)
When Used as Voltage Output
AC
Multi-function analog output common
Output voltage (insulation type)
Load impedance
+5 V
1.5 k min.
+10 V
10 k min.
When External Power Supply is Used

External power supply (V)
Input current (mA)

from external power
supply
12 V DC (5%)
16 mA max.
Load
impedance
External
power
supply
12 V DC
Load
impedance
Input
current
16 mA
max.
External power
supply ground
Note Do not use a 5-V DC or 24-V DC external power supply. Doing so can cause internal circuit damage or
malfunctioning.
Communica
nications
R+
R-S+
S--
Receiver side
Conforming
g to RS-422/485
/
Sender side
Note 1. Parameter settings can be used to select various functions for multi-function inputs 1 to 7,
multi-function contact outputs, and multi-function photocoupler outputs. The functions in
parentheses are the default settings.
Note 2. NPN is the default setting for these terminals. Wire them by providing a common ground. No
external power supply is required.
Note 3. To provide an external power supply and wire the terminals through a common positive line,
set SW1 to PNP and use a 24 V DC 10% power supply.
2-17
Design
Chapter 2
Note 4. When multi-function analog outputs are used for pulse train outputs, they can be directly connected to the pulse train inputs at other 3G3MV-series Inverters for simple synchronization or
other applications.
H Selecting Input Method

Switches SW1 and SW2, both of which are located above the control circuit terminals, are used for
input method selection.
Remove the front cover and optional cover to use these switches.
Selector
Control circuit
terminal block
D Selecting Sequence Input Method

By using SW1, NPN or PNP input can be selected as shown below.
SW1
(Default setting)
S1 to 7
SW1
S1 to 7
24 V DC
(10%)
2-18
Design
Chapter 2
D Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance

Termination resistance can be selected by setting pin 1 of the SW2 to ON. The default setting for the
pin is OFF.
Selects RS-422/485 termination resistance
Selects frequency reference input method
Communications method
Pin 1 setting
RS-422
RS-485
Set to ON
Set to ON only if the Unit is the end Slave.
Pin 1
120- termination resistance (1/2 W)
D Selecting Frequency Reference Input Method

By using pin 2 of SW2, voltage input or current input can be selected as the input method for frequency
reference. The default setting is for voltage input.
Parameter settings are required together with the selection of the frequency reference input method.
method
Voltage input (default setting)
Current input
Pin 2 setting
V (OFF)
I (ON)
Frequency reference selection

(parameter n004)
Set value 2
Set value 3 or 4
Note Do not set pin 2 to ON for current input while voltage is being input, otherwise the resistor in the
input circuit may burn out.
2-19
Design
Chapter 2
2-2-2 Standard Connections

DC reactor
(optional)
Braking Resistor
(optional)
Noise Filter
3-phase 200/400 V AC
Single-phase 200 V AC (See note.)
Multi-function contact output

NO
NC
Common
Multi-function
photocoupler output 1
Multi-function
Frequency reference power

supply 20 mA at +12 V
External
frequency
adjuster (2 k,
1/4 W min.)
Pulse
generator
Multi-function
photocoupler output
common

Frequency reference
common
Multi-function analog
output/Pulse monitor
output
Pulse train input
RS-422
communications
(RS-485 selection)
Multi-function analog output

common
Connector
Multi-function analog voltage input
Digital Operator
Multi-function analog current input

Analog input common
Note
Connector on CN2 wiring side:

3G3MVPCN-CN2
Note Connect single-phase 200 V AC to terminals R/L1 and S/L2 of the 3G3MV-jBj.
2-20
Design
Chapter 2
D Example of 3-wire Sequence Connections

Stop
switch
(NC)
RUN
switch
(NO)
RUN input (Operates with the RUN switch and Stop switch closed)
Direction switch
Stop input (Stops with the Stop switch opened)

Forward/Reverse rotation command input. (Forward with the
Direction switch opened. Reverse with the Direction switch closed)
Note Set parameter 052 to forward/reverse rotation command 0 for 3-wire sequence input.
2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit

IMPORTANT
When a cable gland is used for water and dust tight type (NEMA 4X/12) models, observe the following:
Use multi-core cable for cable gland. (If more than two cables are inserted into one cable gland, a gap
is created and may cause leakage.)
Seal the cable gland with a gasket without fail. (A gasket is attached to the recommended cable gland.)
H Cable Gland Mounting Hole

V7CU
Model CIMR-V7CU
20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
Dimensions in inches (mm)

Qty-Dia
3-0.89
3
0.89 DIA
(3 22.6)
(3-
3 1 06 DIA
3-1.06
26.8)
(3-
(3
26 8)
Under
development
3 0 89 DIA
3-0.89
22.6)
(3-
(3
22 6)
3 1 06 DIA
3-1.06
26.8)
(3-
(3
26 8)
Under
development
2-21
Design
Chapter 2
H Wire Size, Terminal Screw, Screw Tightening Torque, and Molded-case

Circuit Breaker Capacities
For the main circuit and ground, always use 600-V polyvinyl chloride (PVC) cables.
If any cable is long and may cause voltage drops, increase the wire size according to the cable length.
D 3-phase 200-V AC Model

Model
3G3MV-
Terminal symbol
Terminal
screw
Screw
tightening
torque
(NSm)
Wire size
(mm2)
Recommended
wire size
(mm2)
j2001
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
Moldedcase circuit
breaker
capacity
(A)
5
j2002
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
j2004
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
j2007
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
10
j2015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
20
3.5
j2022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
3.5
20
j2037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
5.5
30
j2055
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
2.5
5.5 to 8
50
j2075
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
2.5
5.5 to 8
60
2-22
Design
Chapter 2
D Single-phase 200-V AC Model

Model
3G3MV-
Terminal symbol
Terminal
screw
Terminal
torque
(NSm)
Wire size
(mm2)
Recommended
wire size
(mm2)
jB001
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
Moldedcase circuit
breaker
capacity
(A)
5
jB002
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
jB004
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.75 to 2
10
jB007
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
3.5
20
jB015
R/L1, S/L2, B1, B2, --, +1, +2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
5.5
20
3.5
jB022
R/L1, S/L2, B1, B2, --, +1, +2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
5.5
40
jB037
R/L1, S/L2, B1, B2, --, +1, +2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
3.0
5.5 to 8
50
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 8
5.5
Screw
tightening
torque
(NSm)
Wire size
(mm2)
D 3-phase 400-V AC Model

Model
3G3MV-
Terminal symbol
Terminal
screw
Recommended
wire size
(mm2)
j4002
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
Moldedcase circuit
breaker
capacity
(A)
5
j4004
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
j4007
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
j4015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
10
2-23
Design
Model
3G3MV-
Chapter 2
Terminal symbol
Terminal
screw
Recommended
wire size
(mm2)
j4022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
Moldedcase circuit
breaker
capacity
(A)
10
j4037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
20
Screw
tightening
torque
(NSm)
Wire size
(mm2)
3.5
j4055
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.8
3.5 to 5.5
5.5
30
j4075
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, --,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
2.5
5.5 to 8
5.5
30
2-24
Design
Chapter 2
H Wiring on the Input Side of the Main Circuit

D Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded case
circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable to the Inverter.
Install one wiring circuit breaker per Inverter.
Choose an MCCB with the capacity indicated in the previous tables (Wire Size, Terminal Screw, Tightening Torque, and Molded-case Circuit Breaker Capacities).
For the MCCBs time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverters overload protection (one minute at 150% of the rated output current).
If the MCCB is to be used in common among multiple Inverters, or other devices, set up a sequence
such that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in the following diagram.
Inverter
Power
supply
3-phase/
Single-phase 200-230 V AC
3-phase 380-460 V AC
(See note.)
Fault output (NC)
Note Use a 400/200 V transformer for a 400-V model.
D Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated.
In general, a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will occur for each Inverter (when the power
cable is 1 m) and approximately 5 mA for each additional meter of power cable.
Therefore, at the power supply input area, use a special-purpose breaker for Inverters, which detects
only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high-frequency leakage current.
For the special-purpose breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity
amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.
When using a general leakage breaker, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage
of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
2-25
Design
Chapter 2
D Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply of the main circuit is to be shut off because of the sequence, a magnetic contactor
can be used instead of a molded-case circuit breaker.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to stop a load forcibly,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop.
A load can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break
down. To maintain the service life of the Inverters internal relays and electrolytic capacitors, it is recommended that this operation be performed no more than once every 30 minutes.
When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed
after recovery from a power interruption.
When using the Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to arrange a sequence in which the thermal relay of the
Unit turns the magnetic contactor OFF.
D Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal on the terminal block because the phase
sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).
D Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (660 kW or more) or the phase
advance capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit,
causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
D Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for the inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads
include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoid, and magnetic brakes.
2-26
Design
Chapter 2
D Installing a Noise Filter on the Power Supply Side

The Inverters outputs utilize high-speed switching, so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the
power line and adversely affect other devices in the vicinity. It is recommended that a Noise Filter be
installed at the Power Supply to minimize this noise transmission. Conversely, noise can also be reduced from the power line to the Inverter.
Wiring Example 1
Input Noise Filters
EMC-conforming Input Noise Filter: 3G3MV-PRSj
Power
supply
3G3MV
Noise
Filter
SYSDRIVE
SYSMAC or
other control
device
Note Use a noise filter designed for Inverters. A general-purpose noise filter will be less effective and
may not reduce noise.
H Wiring on the Output Side of the Main Circuit

D Connecting the Terminal Block to the Load
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to motor lead wires U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward command.
D Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3.
If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged.
D Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the
Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous.
Also, be careful not to short the output wires.
D Do not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC Noise Filter to the output circuit.
Doing so will result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
D Do not Use an Electromagnetic Switch of Magnetic Contactor

Do not connect an electromagnetic switch of magnetic contactor to the output circuit.
If a load is connected to the Inverter during running, an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in the Inverter.
2-27
Design
Chapter 2
D Installing a Thermal Relay

The Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a
thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set n037 to 2 (no thermal protection).
In this case, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor on the input side of the main circuit is
turned OFF by the contact of the thermal relay.
D Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side

Connect a Noise Filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and induction noise.
Power
supply
3G3MV
Noise
Filter
SYSDRIVE
Induction noise
Signal line
Radio noise
AM radio
Controller
Induction Noise:
Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise:
Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting
radio receiver to make noise.
D Countermeasures against Induction Noise

As described previously, a Noise Filter can be used to prevent induction noise from being generated on
the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent induction
noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces induction
noise.
Power supply
3G3MV
Metal pipe
SYSDRIVE
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
2-28
Design
Chapter 2
D Countermeasures against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install Noise Filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel
box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box
Metal pipe
3G3MV
Power supply
Noise
Filter
SYSDRIVE
Noise
Filter
D Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

As the cable length between the Inverter and the motor is increased, the floating capacity between the
Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally. The increase in floating capacity at the Inverter outputs causes the high-frequency leakage current to increase, and this may adversely affect
peripheral devices and the current detector in the Inverters output section. To prevent this from occurring, use a cable of no more than 100 meters between the Inverter and the motor. If the cable must be
longer than 100 meters, take measures to reduce the floating capacity by not wiring in metallic ducts, by
using a separate cable for each phase, and so on.
Also adjust the carrier frequency (set in n80) according to the cable length between the Inverter and the
motor, as shown in the table below.
Cable length
Carrier frequency
50 m or less
10 kHz max.
100 m or less
5 kHz max.
More than 100 m

2.5 kHz max.
D Single-phase Motors Cannot Be Used

The Inverter is not suited for the variable speed control of single-phase motors.
Single-phase motors are either capacitor start motors or split-phase start motors. (The method for determining rotation direction at startup is different.) If a capacitor start motor is used, the capacitor may be
damaged by a sudden electric discharge caused by Inverter output. If a split-phase start motor is used,
the starting coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate.
2-29
Design
Chapter 2
H Ground Wiring
Always use the ground terminal of the 200-V Inverter with a ground resistance of 100 or less. Similarly, always use the ground terminal of the 400-V Inverter with a ground resistance of 10 or less.
Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools.
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode
and the ground terminal is too long, the potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become
unstable.
When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
H Countermeasures against Harmonics

With the continuing development of electronics, the generation of harmonics from industrial machines has been causing problems recently.
Refer to the following information for the definition of harmonics (i.e., harmonic currents
with voltages) and countermeasures against the generation of harmonics from the
Inverter.
D Harmonics
Definition
Harmonics consist of electric power produced from AC power and alternating at frequencies that are
integral multiples of the frequency of the AC power.
2-30
Design
Chapter 2
The following frequencies are harmonics of a 60- or 50-Hz commercial power supply.
Second harmonic: 120 (100) Hz
Third harmonic:
180 (150) Hz
Second harmonic (120 Hz)
Basic frequency (60 Hz)
Third harmonic (180 Hz)
Problems Caused by Harmonics Generation

The waveform of the commercial power supply will be distorted if the commercial power supply contains
excessive harmonics. Machines with such a commercial power supply will malfunction or generate
excessive heat.
Basic frequency (60 Hz)
Third harmonic (180 Hz)
Distorted current wave

form
D Causes of Harmonics Generation

Usually, electric machines have built-in circuitry that converts commercial AC power supply into DC
power.
Such AC power, however, contains harmonics due to the difference in current flow between DC and
AC.
Obtaining DC from AC Using Rectifiers and Capacitors

DC voltage is obtained by converting AC voltage into a pulsating one-side voltage with rectifiers and
smoothing the pulsating one-side voltage with capacitors. Such AC current, however, contains harmonics.
2-31
Design
Chapter 2
Inverter
The Inverter as well as normal electric machines has an input current containing harmonics because
the Inverter converts AC into DC. The output current of the Inverter is comparatively high. Therefore, the
ratio of harmonics in the output current of the Inverter is higher than that of any other electric machine.
Voltage
Time
Rectified
Voltage
Time
Smoothed
Voltage
Current
A current flows into the
capacitors. The current
is different from the
voltage in waveform.
2-32
Time
Time
Design
Chapter 2
D Countermeasures with Reactors against Harmonics Generation

DC/AC Reactors
The DC reactor and AC reactor suppress harmonics and currents that change suddenly and greatly.
The DC reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC reactor. The DC reactor used with the AC
reactor suppresses harmonics more effectively.
The input power factor of the Inverter is improved by suppressing the harmonics of the input current of
the Inverter.
Connection
Connect the DC reactor to the internal DC power supply of the Inverter after shutting OFF the power
supply to the Inverter and making sure that the charge indicator of the Inverter turns OFF.
Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Inverter in operation, otherwise an electric shock or burn injury
may occur.
Wiring Method
[With DC Reactor]
DC reactor
(optional)
Power supply
3-phase 200 V AC,
single-phase 200 V AC,
or 3-phase 400 V AC
SYSDRIVE
3G3MV
[With DC and AC Reactors]

DC reactor
(optional)
Power supply
3-phase 200 V AC,

single-phase 200 V AC, or
3-phase 400 V AC
AC reactor
(optional)
SYSDRIVE
3G3MV
2-33
Design
Chapter 2
Reactor Effects
Harmonics are effectively suppressed when the DC reactor is used with the AC reactor as shown in the
following table.
Harmonics
suppression
i
method
No reactor
AC reactor
DC reactor
DC and AC
reactors
Harmonic generation rate (%)

5th harmonic
7th harmonic
11th har- 13th har- 17th har- 19th harmonic

monic
monic
monic
65
38
30
28
41
14.5
13
9.1
8.5
7.4
8.4
7.2
7.7
3.4
5
4.1
4.3
3.2
4.7
3.2
3.1
1.9
3.2
2.4
23rd
harmonic
2.6
1.7
3.0
1.6
25th
harmonic
1.8
1.3
2.2
1.4
H Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit

When running a load with a large inertia or a vertical axis, regeneration energy will return to the Inverter.
If OV (overvoltage) is generated during deceleration, this indicates that the regeneration energy is
exceeding the capacity of the Inverter. In this case, use a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit.
Connect the Braking Resistor as shown in the following diagram.
Note 1. When using a Braking Resistor, install a thermal relay to monitor the temperature of the resistor.
Note 2. When using a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to include a sequence
whereby the power supply for the Inverter will be turned OFF in the case of abnormal overheating. Not doing so may result in burning.
S Braking Resistor: Use the output of the thermal relay used to monitor the temperature of the thermometer.
S Braking Resistor Unit: Use the error contact output of the Braking Resistor Unit.
When using a Braking Resistor, and Braking Resistor Unit be sure to set n092 (deceleration stall prevention selection) to 1 (without deceleration stall prevention).
Inverter
Power
supply
3-phase, 400 V AC (single-phase

200 V AC/3-phase 200 V AC)
Braking
Resistor/Braking
Resistor Unit
Contact points for thermal trip of Braking Resistor

Unit or external thermal relay
2-34
Design
Chapter 2
D Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for 200-V-class Inverters

Inverter
3G3MVC2001/CB001
C2002/CB002
C2004/CB004
C2007/CB007
C2015/CB015
C2022/CB022
C2037/CB037
C2055
C2075
Braking Resistor
(3% usage rate ED)
3G3IVPERF150WJ401 (400
(
))
Braking Resistor Unit

(10% usage rate ED)
DBS-2001-MV-TS-N1
PERF150WJ201 (200
(
))
DBS-2001-MV-TS-N1
PERF150WJ101 (100 )
PERF150WJ700 (70 )
PERF150WJ620 (62 )
-----
DBS-2003-MV-TS-N1
DBS-2003-MV-TS-N1
DBS-2005-MV-TS-N1
DBS-2010-MV-TS-N1
DBS-2010-MV-TS-N1
Minimum
connection
resistance
300
200
120
60
32
9.6
9.6
Note 1. Do not use resistances less than than the minimum connection resistance value. Doing so
may damage the Inverter.
Note 2. The usage rate is shown as a percentage of the braking time in one cycle. If one cycle is 10
seconds, for example, one second of braking is possible using a Braking Resistor Unit (10%
usage rate ED). If the usage rate is to be exceeded, a detailed regeneration energy calculation will be required.
D Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for 400-V-class Inverters

Inverter
3G3MVC4002
C4004
C4007
C4015
C4022
C4037
C4055
C4075
Braking Resistor
(3% usage rate ED)
3G3IVPERF150WJ751 (750 )
PERF150WJ401 (400 )
PERF150WJ301 (300 )
PERF150WJ401 (400 ) x 2
-----
Braking Resistor Unit

(10% usage rate ED)
DBS-4001-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4001-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4002-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4003-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4003-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4005-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4005-MV-TS-N1
DBS-4005-MV-TS-N1
Minimum
connection
resistance
750
510
240
200
100
32
32
Note 1. Do not use resistances less than than the minimum connection resistance value. Doing so
may damage the Inverter.
Note 2. The usage rate shows the braking time as a percentage of one cycle. If a cycle is 10 seconds,
for example, one second of braking is possible using a Braking Resistor Unit (10% usage rate
ED). If the usage rate is to be exceeded, a detailed regeneration energy calculation will be
required.
2-2-4 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

A control signal line must be 50 m maximum and separated from power lines.
The frequency reference must be input into the Inverter through shielded, twisted-pair
wires.
H Wiring Control I/O Terminals

Wire each control I/O terminal under the following conditions.
2-35
Design
Chapter 2
D Wires and Tightening Torque

Multi-function Contact Output (MA, MB, and MC)
Terminal
screw size
M3
Tightening
torque
NSm
0.5 to 0.6
Wire
Wire size mm2

(AWG)
Single wire
Recommended
wire size mm2
(AWG)
0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16) 0.75 (18)
Stranded wire
0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16)
Cable
Cable with
polyethylene
sheath
Sequential Input (S1 through S7 and SC), Multi-function Photocoupler Output (P1,
P2, PC), RS-422/485 Communications (R+, R-- , S+, S-- ) and Multi-function Analog
Output (AM or AC), and Pulse Train Input (RP)
Terminal
screw size
M2
Tightening
torque
NSm
0.22 to 0.25
Wire
Wire size mm2

(AWG)
Single wire
Recommended
wire size mm2
(AWG)
0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16) 0.75 (18)
Stranded wire
0.5 to 0.75 (20 to 18)
Cable
Cable with
polyethylene
sheath
Frequency Reference Input (FR, FS, and FC)

Terminal
screw size
M2
Tightening
Wire
torque
NSm
0.22 to 0.25 Single wire
Wire size
mm2 (AWG)
Stranded wire
0.5 to 1.25 (20

to 16)
0.5 to 0.75 (20
to 18)
Recommended
Cable
wire size mm2
(AWG)
0.75 (18)
Special cable with
polyethylene
sheath and
p
y y
shield for measurement
use
D Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals

The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless
terminals are easy to connect securely.
Note When using the following solderless terminal, make sure that the wire size is 0.5 mm2.
1.0 dia.
Model: Phoenix Contacts A1 0.5-8 WH
2.6 dia.
(Size: mm)
D Wiring Method
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slotted screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly to a torque of 0.5 NSm.
2-36
Design
Chapter 2
Note 1. Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables.
Note 2. Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals. The wires may not contact well with the
control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered.
Note 3. The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approximately 5.5 mm.
Note 4. Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the Inverter. Do not ground the shield on control
side.
Note 5. Cover the shield with tape so that the shield will not come into contact with other signal wires
or machines.
Thin-slotted screwdriver
Control circuit terminal

block
Strip the end for 5.5 mm if no

solderless terminal is used.
Wires
Note
Solderless terminal or
wire without soldering
Applying a torque of greater than 0.5 NSm

may damage the terminal block. If the
tightening torque is insufficient, however,
wires may be disconnected.
2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directives

The following description provides the wiring method of the Inverter to meet EC Directive
requirements. If the following requirements are not satisfied, the whole equipment incorporating the Inverter will need further confirmation.
H Standard Connection
D Main Circuit Terminals
Braking Resistor
(optional)
Clamp core
Line breakers
Noise Filter
Clamp core
3-phase 200 V AC, single-phase

200 V AC, or 3-phase 400 V AC
2-37
Design
Chapter 2
D Control Circuit Terminals

Multi-function contact output

NO
NC
Common
Multi-function

Frequency reference power
supply 20 mA at +12 V
External
frequency
adjuster (2 k,
1/4 W min.)
output common

Frequency reference common
Pulse
generator
output/Pulse monitor
output
Pulse train input
RS-422
communications
(RS-485 selection)
Note I/O signals can be connected to a single shielded cable.
2-38
Multi-function
output common
Design
Chapter 2
H Conforming to EC Directives
D Wiring the Power Supply
Make sure that the Inverter and Noise Filter are grounded together.
Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a dedicated
Noise Filter.
Reduce the length of the ground wire as much as possible.
Locate the Noise Filter as close as possible to the Inverter. Make sure that the cable length between
the Noise Filter and the Inverter does not exceed 40 cm.
The following Noise Filters are available.
3-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter
Model 3G3MVC2001/C2002/C2004/C2007
C2015/C2022
C2037
C2055/C2075
3-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter (Rasmi Electronics Ltd.)

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)
PFI-2010E
10
PFI-2020E
16
PFI-2030E
26
PFI-2030E
50
Single-phase 200-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter
Model 3G3MVCB001/CB002/CB004
CB007/CB015
CB022
CB037
Single-phase 200-V Noise Filter (Rasmi Electronics Ltd.)

PFI-1010E
10
PFI-1020E
20
PFI-1030E
30
PFI-1040E
40
3-phase 400-VAC Noise Filter

Inverter
Model 3G3MVC4002/C4004
C4007/C4015/C4022
C4037
C4055/C4075
3-phase 400-VAC Noise Filter (Rasmi Electronics Ltd.)

PFI-3005E
5
PFI-3010E
10
PFI-3020E
15
PFI-3030E
30
D Connecting a Motor to the Inverter

When connecting a motor to the Inverter, be sure to use a cable with a braided shield.
Reduce the length of the cable as short as possible and ground the shield on the Inverter side as well
as the motor side. Make sure that the cable length between the Inverter and the motor does not exceed
20 m.
2-39
Design
Chapter 2
D Wiring a Control Cable

Be sure to connect a cable with a braided shield to the control circuit terminals.
Ground the shield on the Inverter side only.
D Grounding the Shield

In order to ground the shield securely, it is recommended that a cable clamp be directly connected to the
ground plate as shown below.
Ground plate
Cable clamp
Cable
Shield
H Conforming to LVD
Always connect the Inverter and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable to the Inverter for protecting the Inverter from damage that may result from short-circuiting.
Use one MCCB per Inverter.
Select a suitable MCCB from the following table.
With a 400-V-class Inverter, be sure to ground to a neutral point of the power supply.
200-V Models
Inverter
Model 3G3MVj2001
j2002
j2004
j2007
j2015
j2022
j2037
j2055
j2075
jB001
jB002
jB004
jB007
jB015
jB022
jB037
2-40
MCCB
Rated current (A)
5
5
5
10
20
20
30
50
60
5
5
10
20
20
40
50
Type
NF30 (Mitsubishi
(
Electric))
NF30 (Mitsubishi
(
Electric))
Design
Chapter 2
400-V Models
Inverter
Model 3G3MVj4002
j4004
j4007
j4015
j4022
j4037
j4055
j4075
MCCB
Rated current (A)
5
5
5
10
10
20
30
30
Type
NF30 (Mitsubishi
(
Electric))
Note To satisfy LVD requirements, the Inverter must be protected with a line breaker in case a short-circuiting accident occurs. When using a single line breaker to be shared with other Inverters or
devices, make sure that the Inverters and devices will be fully protected if there is a one-point
short-circuit, otherwise the Inverters and devices may be damaged.
The frequency reference power supply (FS) of the Inverter is of basic insulation construction. When
connecting the Inverter to peripheral devices, be sure to increase the degree of insulation.
2-41
3
Chapter 3
Preparing for
Operation and
Monitoring
3-1
3-2
Nomenclature
Parameter Copy and Verify Function
Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

3-1
Chapter 3
Nomenclature
3-1-1 Names of Parts and their Functions
Data display
Simplified-LED
indicators
FREQUENCY
adjuster
Operation keys
Appearance
Name
Data display
Function
Displays relevant data items, such as frequency reference,
output frequency, and parameter set values.
FREQ adjuster
Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz

and the maximum frequency.
FREF indicator
The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this

indicator is lit.
The output frequency of the Inverter can be monitored
while this indicator is lit.
The output current of the Inverter can be monitored while
The values set in U-01 through U-18 are monitored while
The direction of rotation can be selected while this
indicator is lit, when operating the Inverter with the RUN
Key.
The operation of the Inverter through the Digital Operator
or according to the parameters set is selectable while this
indicator is lit.
FOUT indicator
IOUT indicator
MNTR indicator
F/R indicator
LO/RE indicator
PRGM indicator
Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored

while the Inverter is in operation. Any RUN command
input is ignored while this indicator is lit.
The parameters in n001 through n179 can be set or
monitored while this indicator is lit.
Note While the Inverter is in operation, the parameters can
be only monitored and only some parameters can be
changed. The RUN command input is ignored while
3-2

Appearance
Name
Mode Key
Increment Key
Chapter 3
Function
Switches the simplified-LED (setting and monitor) item
indicators in sequence.
Parameter setting being made is canceled if this key is
pressed before entering the setting.
Increases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter
Decrement Key
Decreases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter

Enter Key
Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter

numbers, and internal data values after they are set or
changed.
Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation
RUN Key
STOP/RESET Key
Stops the Inverter unless n007 is not set to disable the

STOP Key. Functions as a Reset Key when an Inverter
error occurs. (See note.)
Note For safety reasons, the reset will not work while a RUN command (forward or reverse) is in effect.
Wait until the RUN command is OFF before resetting the Inverter.
3-3
Chapter 3
3-1-2 Outline of Operation

H Selecting Indicators
Whenever the Mode Key is pressed, an indicator is lit in sequence beginning with the
FREF indicator. The data display indicates the item corresponding to the indicator
selected.
The FOUT or IOUT indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is
turned OFF while the FOUT or IOUT indicator is lit. The FREF indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while an indicator other than the
FOUR or IOUT indicator is lit.
Power On
FREF (Frequency Reference)
Monitors and sets the frequency reference.
FOUT (Output Frequency)

Monitors the output frequency.
Note This indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if

the Inverter is turned OFF while this indicator is lit.
IOUT (Output Current)
Monitors the output current.
Note This indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if

the Inverter is turned OFF while this indicator is lit.
MNTR (Multi-function Monitor)
Monitors the values set in U-01 through U-18.
F/R (Forward/Reverse Rotation)

Selects the direction of rotation.
LO/RE (Local/Remote)
Selects the operation of the Inverter through the Digital Operator or
according to the parameters.
PRGM (Parameter Setting)

Monitors or sets the values in n001 through n179.
The FREF indicator is lit again.
Note The setting unit of the frequency reference and output frequency is determined by the set value in
n035. The default unit is Hz.
3-4
Chapter 3
H Example of Frequency Reference Settings
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power On
Note If the FREF indicator has not been lit, press the
Mode Key repeatedly until the FREF indicator is lit.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the
frequency reference.
The data display will flash while the frequency
reference is set. (see note 1)
Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be
entered and the data display will be lit. (see note 1)
Note 1. The Enter Key need not be pressed when performing the setting for n009. The frequency reference will change when the set value is changed with the Increment or Decrement Key while
the data display is continuously lit.
Note 2. The frequency reference can be set in either of the following cases.
S Parameter n004 for frequency reference selection is set to 1 (i.e., frequency reference 1 is
enabled) and the Inverter is in remote mode.
S Parameter n008 for frequency selection in local mode is set to 1 (i.e., the Digital Operator is
enabled) and the Inverter is in local mode.
S Frequency references 2 through 16 are input for multi-step speed operation.
Note 3. The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation.
H Example of Multi-function Display
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
Explanation
Power On
Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the MNTR
indicator is lit.
U01 will be displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to select the
monitor item to be displayed.
Press the Enter Key so that the data of the selected
monitor item will be displayed.
The monitor item will appear again by pressing the
Mode Key.
3-5
Chapter 3
D Status Monitor
Item
U-03
U-04
Display
unit
Frequency reference Hz (see
note 1)
Output frequency
Hz (see
note 1)
Output current
A
Output voltage
V
U-05
DC bus voltage
U-06
Input
p terminal status
---
U-01
U-02
Display
Function
Monitors the frequency reference. (Same as FREF)
Monitors the output frequency. (Same as FOUT)
Monitors the output current. (Same as IOUT)
Monitors the internal output voltage reference value of the
Inverter.
Monitors the DC voltage of the internal main circuit of the
Inverter.
Shows the ON/OFF status of inputs.
: ON
Not
used
U-07
Output
p terminal
status
---
Terminal S1: Multi-function input 1

Shows the ON/OFF status of outputs.

: ON
Not
used
U-08
Torque monitor
U-09
Error log
g (most
(
recent one))
---
3-6
Software No.
Output power
Accumulated
operating time
--W
x10H
: OFF
Terminal MA: Multi-function contact output

Terminal P1: Multi-function photo-coupler
output 1
Terminal P2: Multi-function photo-coupler
output 2
Displays the torque being currently output as a percentage of

the rated motor torque. This display can only be made in
vector control mode.
The four most recent errors can be checked.
Error
generation
item
U-10
U-11
U-13
: OFF
Error
Note 1 means that the latest error is displayed. Press the

Increment Key to display the second latest error. A maximum of four errors can be displayed.
Displays the software revision.
Monitors the output power of the Inverter. (See note 2.)
Monitor the accumulated operating time in 10-second units.
(See note 3.)

Item
U-15
Display
Communications
error
Display
unit
---
Chapter 3
Function
Displays communications errors that occur during serial

communications (RS-422/RS-485). The errors that are
displayed have the same content as the serial
communications error at register number 003D Hex.
: Error
(Not used.)
U-16
U-17
U-18
PID feedback
PID input
PID output
%
%
%
: Normal
operation
CRC error
Data length error
(Not used.)
Parity error
Overrun error
Framing error
Communications time-over
Monitors the PID control feedback (Max. frequency: 100%)

Monitors the PID control input (Max. frequency: 100%)
Monitors the PID output (Max. frequency: 100%)
Note 1. The setting unit of the frequency reference and output frequency is determined by the set
value in n035. The default unit is Hz.
Note 2. The output power monitor is not displayed in vector control mode. -------- is displayed instead.
Note 3. This function is provided for 200- and 400-V (5.5-/7.5-kW) Inverters only.
H Example of Forward/Reverse Selection Settings
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the F/R indicator
is lit.
The present setting will be displayed.
For: Forward; rEv: Reverse
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to change the
direction of motor rotation. The direction of motor
rotation selected will be enabled when the display
changes after the key is pressed.
Note The direction of motor rotation can be changed, even during operation.
3-7
Chapter 3
H Example of Local/Remote Selection Settings
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the LO/RE
indicator is lit.
The present setting will be displayed.
rE: Remote; Lo: Local
Inverter to local or remote mode. The selection will be
enabled when the display changes after the key is
pressed.
Note 1. Local or remote selection is possible only when the Inverter is not in operation. The present
setting can be monitored when the Inverter is in operation.
Note 2. Local or remote settings in multi-function input terminals can be changed through the multifunction input terminals only.
Note 3. Any RUN command input will be ignored while the LO/RE indicator is lit. To enable a RUN
command, first turn OFF the RUN command and then press the Mode Key to display an item
with a green indicator (FREF to MNTR). Finally, input the RUN command again.
H Example of Parameter Settings
Cancels set data.
In approximately 1 s.
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power On
In approximately
1 s.
3-8
Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM

indicator is lit.
parameter number.
Press the Enter Key.
The data of the selected parameter number will be
displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the data.
At that time the display will flash.
entered and the data display will be lit. (see note 1)
The parameter number will be displayed.
Chapter 3
Note 1. To cancel the set value, press the Mode Key instead. The parameter number will be displayed.
Note 2. There are parameters that cannot be changed while the Inverter is in operation. Refer to the
list of parameters. When attempting to change such parameters, the data display will not
change by pressing the Increment or Decrement Key.
Note 3. Any RUN command input will be ignored while the Parameter Setting (PRGM) indicator is lit.
To enable a RUN command, first turn the RUN command OFF and then press the Mode Key
to display an item with a green indicator (FREF to MNTR). Finally, input the RUN command
again.
3-9

3-2
Chapter 3
Parameter Copy and Verify Function

The Digital Operator of the 3G3MV Inverter has an EEPROM in which the set values in
all the parameters and data on the capacity and software version of the Inverter can be
stored.
By using the EEPROM, most parameter set values in the Inverter can be copied to
another Inverter.
Note In the above case, however, the Inverters must have the same power supply specification and
control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control mode). Some types of parameter set values cannot be
copied.
3-2-1 Parameter for Copying and Verifying Set Values

Use the following parameter to read, copy, and verify the set values.
Parame- Register
ter
n176
01B0
Name
Parameter copy
and
verify
function
selection
Description
The following items are

selectable.
rdy: Ready to accept the
next command
rEd: Reads the parameter
CPy: Copies the parameter
vFy: Verifies the parameter
vA: Displays the capacity of
the Inverter
Sno: Displays the software
version.
3-10
Setting
range
rdy to
Sno
Unit of
setting
---
Default
setting
rdy
Changes during
operation
No
Chapter 3
H Sequence of Display
Reading
Completed
reading
or
Writing
Completed
writing
or
Verifying
Completed
verifying
or
Inverter
capacity
or
Software
version
or
Note The following display is an example of the capacity displayed. The values in parentheses indicate
the capacities for European motors.
Voltage class
2: 3-phase 200 V
b: Single-phase 200 V
4: 3-phase 400 V
Note
Max. applicable motor capacity

0.1: 0.1kW (0.1 kW)
0.2: 0.25 kW/0.37 kW (0.2 kW)
0.4: 0.55 kW (0.4 kW)
0.7: 1.1 kW (0.75 kW)
1.5: 1.5 kW (1.5 kW)
2.2: 2.2 kW (2.2 kW)
3.7: 3.7 kW (3.7 kW)
5.5: 5.5 kW (5.5 kW)
5: 7.5 kW (7.5 kW)
The values in parentheses indicate Japanese
motor capacities.
3-2-2 Parameter Copying Procedure

To copy parameter values to another Inverter, take the following steps.
1. Set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.
2. Set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 1 so that the parameters can be read.
3. Read the parameter set value with the EEPROM of the Digital Operator with the item rED selected.
4. Turn OFF the Inverter and remove the Digital Operator.
5. Mount the Digital Operator to the Inverter to which the parameters are to be copied. Then turn ON
the Inverter.
6. Copy the data in the EEPROM to the Inverter with the item CPy selected.
3-11
Chapter 3
7. Check that the data is written correctly with the item vFy selected.
The above procedure is possible provided that the Inverters have the same power supply specification
and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control). It is not possible to copy parameters from a 200-V model
to a 400-V model or from an Inverter that is in V/f control mode to another that is in vector control mode,
for example.
Note 1. The following parameter set values or output frequency on hold cannot be copied.
n176: Parameter copy function selection
n177: Parameter read-prohibit selection
n178: Error log
n179: Software version
Note 2. The following parameter set values cannot be copied if the Inverters are different to each
other in capacity.
n011 to n017: V/f setting
n036: Rated motor current
n080: Carrier frequency
n105: Torque compensation core loss
n106: Rated motor slip
n107: Motor wire-to-wire resistance
n108: Motor leakage inductance
n109: Torque compensation limit
n110: Motor no-load current
n140: Energy-saving control coefficient K2
n158: Motor code
Note 3. Functions for 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters cannot be copied to Inverters with different capacities.
H Setting n001 for Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter

Initialization
No data can be written to n176 for parameter copy function selection unless the default setting is
changed. To write data to this parameter, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter
initialization to 4.
3-12

Parame- Register
ter
n001
0101
Name
Description
Parameter writeprohibit
selection/parameter
initialization
Used to prohibit parameters

to be written, sets parameters, or change the monitor
range of parameters.
Chapter 3
Setting
range
0 to 11
Unit of
setting
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
No
Used to initialize parameters

to default settings.
0: Sets or monitor parameter
n001. The parameters within
a range from n002 to n179
can be monitored only.
1: Sets or monitor the
parameters within a range
from n001 to n49 (i.e., function group 1 settings).
from n001 to n79 (i.e., function groups 1 and 2 settings).
from n001 to n119 (i.e., function groups 1 through 3 settings).
from n001 to n179 (i.e., function groups 1 through 4 settings).
6: Clears the error log.
8: Initializes parameters to
default settings in 2-wire
sequence.
9: Initializes parameters in
3-wire sequence.
10: For the USA, initializes
parameter in 2-wire sequence.
11: For the USA, initializes
parameter in 3-wire sequence.
3-13
Chapter 3
D Parameter Settings in n001

Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power ON
indicator is lit.
Check that n001 is displayed.
Press the Enter Key.
The data of the specified parameter number is
displayed.
Press the Increment Key repeatedly to display the
figure 4. At that time the display flashes.
entered and the data display will be lit.
The parameter number will be displayed again in
approximately 1 s.
In approximately
1 s.
H Reading the Parameter Set Value (rEd)

To read the parameter set values in the Inverter with the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for
parameter copy function selection to rEd.
D Procedure to Read the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Check that the PRGM indicator is lit. If the PRGM is
not lit, press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM
indicator is lit.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display n176.
Press the Enter Key. Then rdy will be displayed.
Use the Increment Key to display rEd.
Completes
or
Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values

in the Inverter will be read by the EEPROM of the
Digital Operator, during which the display flashes.
When the set values have been all read, End will be
displayed.
Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number
(n176) will be displayed again.
Note Be sure to set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 1 so that the parameters can be read.
3-14
Chapter 3
H Copying the Data in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator to another

Inverter (CPy)
To copy the parameter set values to another Inverter from the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set
n176 for parameter copy function selection to CPy.
When the parameter set values have been read, turn OFF the Inverter and remove the Digital Operator. Refer to 2-1-4 Removing and Mounting the Covers for details.
Mount the Digital Operator to the Inverter to which the parameters are copied. Then turn ON the
Inverter.
Check that n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization is set to 4 in the Inverter
(i.e., values can be set in n001 through n179). If n001 is not set to 4, take the steps described above
and set n001 to 4.
Note The above procedure is possible provided that the Inverters are the same in power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control).
D Procedure to Read the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power ON
indicator is lit.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display
n176.
Use the Increment Key to display CPy.
Completes
or

in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator will be copied
to the Inverter, during which the display flashes.
When the set values have been all copied, End will
be displayed.
Note 1. Check and verify the set ranges and set values of the parameters written to the Inverter. If any
error is found as a result, all the parameter set values will be prohibited and the previous values will be reset.
If a set range error results, the corresponding parameter number will flash. In the case of a
verification error, oPj (j is a number) will flash.
Note 2. The following parameter set values or output frequency on hold cannot be copied.
n176: Parameter copy function selection
n177: Parameter read-prohibit selection
n178: Error log

n179: Software version
3-15
Chapter 3
Note 3. The following parameter set values cannot be copied if the Inverters are different to each
other in capacity.
n011 to n017: V/f setting
n036: Rated motor current
n080: Carrier frequency
n105: Torque compensation core loss
n106: Rated motor slip
n107: Motor wire-to-wire resistance
n108: Motor leakage inductance

n109: Torque compensation limit
n110: Motor no-load current
n140: Energy-saving control coefficient K2
n158: Motor code
Note 4. Functions for 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters cannot be copied to Inverters with different capacities.
H Verifying the Parameter Set Values (vFy)

In order to verify that the copied parameter set values in the Inverter coincide with those in the
EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to vFy.
Note The parameter set values can be verified provided that they are copied between the Inverters that
are the same in power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control).
D Procedure to Verify the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power ON
indicator is lit.
n176.
Use the Increment Key to display vFy.
are verified, during which the display flashes.
If there is a parameter set value that does not coincide,
the parameter number will flash.
Press the Enter Key so that the corresponding set
value in the Inverter will flash.
Press the Enter Key again so that the corresponding
set value in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator will
flash.
Press the Increment Key so that verification will
resume.
Completes
or
When the set values have been all checked, End will
be displayed.
Note 1. The above operation is interrupted when the STOP/RESET Key is pressed while the parameter number or parameter set value is flashing because the parameter set value does not coincide. End will be displayed. By pressing the Mode or Enter Key, the parameter number
(n176) is displayed again.
3-16
Chapter 3
Note 2. By attempting to verify the parameter set values in Inverters that are different in capacity,
vAE flashes for a capacity error. Press the Enter Key to continue verifying the parameter set
values. To cancel the operation, press the STOP/RESET Key.
3-2-3 Parameter Read-prohibit Selection (Prohibiting Data

Written to the EEPROM of the Digital Operator)
To store the parameter set values in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n177 for parameter readprohibit selection to 0. A protection error (PrE) will be detected by attempting to read the parameter set
values in the Inverter with rEd set. This protects the parameter set values in the EEPROM from
change. The PrE display is turned OFF by pressing the Mode Key.
Parame- Register
ter
n177
01B1
Name
Description
Parameter readprohibit
selection
Used to keep the data in the

EEPROM of the Digital
Operator on hold.
Setting
range
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
No
0: Parameter read-prohibit
(No data can be written to
the EEPROM)
1: Parameter read possible
(Data can be written to the
EEPROM)
Note 1. No data can be written to n177 unless the default setting is changed. To write data to this
parameter, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.
Note 2. The parameter setting has an effect on the Digital Operator. If the Digital Operator with the
data in the EEPROM protected is mounted to another Inverter, n117 will be set to 0 regardless
of the n117 setting in the Inverter.
D Steps to Set Parameter Read-prohibit

Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power ON
indicator is lit.
n176.
Press the Enter Key. The present set data will be
displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display to set
the data, during which the display flashes.
0: Parameter read-prohibit (No data can be written to
the EEPROM)
1: Parameter read possible (Data can be written to the
EEPROM)
3-17

Key sequence
Indicator
In approximately
1 s.
Display
example
Chapter 3
Explanation

entered and the data display will be lit.
approximately 1 s.
3-2-4 Parameter Copy or Verify Errors

The following description provides information on errors that may result while the parameter set values are read, copied, or verified, and the remedies to be taken. The display flashes while displaying
these errors.
Display
pre
Name
Protection error
rde
Read error
cse
Checksum error
nde
No data error
cpe
Copy error
cye
uae
ife
3-18
Probable cause
An attempt was made to read the
parameter set values while n177
for parameter read-prohibit
selection was set to 0.
The parameter set values were
not read correctly or a main-circuit
low voltage was detected while
the parameter set values were
read.
A checksum error resulted in the
parameter set values in the
EEPROM of the Digital Operator.
There are no parameter set values
stored in the EEPROM of the
Digital Operator.
An attempt was made to copy or
verify the parameter set values
while the Inverters are different to
each other in voltage or control
mode.
Remedy
Set n177 to 1 and retry after
rechecking the necessity of
reading the parameter set values.
Retry after checking that the
voltage of the main circuit is
normal.
Read the parameter set values
again and store them in the
EEPROM.
Read the parameter set values
and store them in the EEPROM.
Check that the Inverters are the

same in voltage and control mode.
If either of them is different, no
parameter set values can be
either copied or verified.
If the Inverters are different only in
control mode, retry after changing
the mode of the Inverter to which
the parameter set values are to be
written.
Copy voltage error
Main-circuit low voltage is
Retry after checking that the
detected while the Inverter was
voltage of the main circuit is
copying the parameter set values. normal.
Capacity error
An attempt was made to verify the To continue verifying the
parameter set values while the
parameter set values, press the
Inverters were different to each
Enter Key.
other in capacity.
To cancel the operation, press the
STOP/RESET Key.
Communications error A communications error resulted
Retry after checking the
between the Inverter and Digital
connection between the Inverter
Operator.
and Digital Operator.
4
Chapter 4
Test Run
4-1
4-2
Procedure for Test Run

Operation Example
Test Run
Chapter 4
! WARNING
Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.
! WARNING
Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.
! WARNING
Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING
! WARNING
Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING
Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power
interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the
processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so
may result in injury.
! WARNING
Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator
is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING
Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so
while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.
! Caution
Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation

because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.
! Caution
Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.
! Caution
Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.
! Caution
Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.
4-2
Test Run
4-1
Chapter 4
Procedure for Test Run
1. Installation and Mounting

Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions. Refer to page 2-2. Ensure that the installation conditions are met.
2. Wiring and Connection
Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices. Refer to page 2-12. Select peripheral devices
which meet the specifications and wire correctly.
3. Power Connection
Carry out the following pre-connection checks before turning ON the power supply.
S Always ensure that a power supply to the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminals
(R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly.
3G3MV-jBj: Single-phase 200 to 240 V AC (Wire R/L1 and S/L2)
S Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor
correctly.
S Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that
all control terminals are turned OFF.
S Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).
S Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.
4. Check the Display Status
Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.
S If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
RUN indicator: Flashes
ALARM indicator: OFF
Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.
Data display: Displays the corresponding data of the indicator that is lit.
S When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Chapter 8
Maintenance Operations and take necessary remedies.
5. Initializing Parameters
Initialize the parameters.
S Set n001 to 8 for initialization in 2-wire sequence.
6. Setting Parameters
Set the parameters required for a test run.
S Perform the test run in V/f control mode. The control mode needs to be set to V/f control since it will
not be initialized. Set the rated motor current in order to prevent the motor from burning due to
overloading.
7. No-load Operation
Start the no-load motor using the Digital Operator.
S Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences.
4-3
Test Run
Chapter 4
8. Actual Load Operation

Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator.
S When there are no difficulties using the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the
motor and operate using the Digital Operator.
9. Operation
Basic Operation:
Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter. Refer to page 5-1.
Advanced Operation:
Operation that uses PID control or other functions. Refer to page 6-1.
S For operation within standard parameters, refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation.
S Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation and Chapter 6 Advanced Operation for the various advanced
functions, such as energy-saving control, PID control, stall prevention, carrier frequency setting,
overtorque detection, torque compensation, and slip compensation.
4-4
Chapter 4
Test Run
4-2
Operation Example
Power Connection
H Checkpoints before Connecting the Power Supply

Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage and that the motor output terminals (R/L1, S/L2,
and T/L3) are connected to the motor correctly.
3G3MV-j2j: Three-phase 200 to 230 V AC
3G3MV-jBj: Single-phase 200 to 240 V AC (Wire R/L1 and S/L2)
3G3MV-j4j: Three-phase 380 to 460 V AC
Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly.
Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that all
control terminals are turned OFF.
Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).
H Connecting the Power Supply

After conducting the above checks, connect the power supply.
Check the Display Status
If the display is normal when the power is connected, it will read as follows:
Normal
ALARM indicator: Off
Data display: Displays the corresponding data for the indicator that is lit.
When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Chapter 8
Maintenance Operations and take necessary action.
Fault
ALARM indicator: Lit (fault detection) or flashes (alarm detection)
Data display: The fault code, such as UV1, is displayed. The display will differ depending on the type
of fault.
4-5
Chapter 4
Test Run
3
Initializing Parameters
Initialize the parameters using the following procedure.

To initialize the parameters, set n01 to 8.
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power On
Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator
is lit.
Press the Enter Key. The data of n001 will be displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set n01 to 8.
The display will flash.
Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered
and the data display will be lit.
Parameter n001 will be initialized and reset to 1 from 8.
--In approximately
1 s.
The parameter number will be displayed.
Setting the Motor Current Parameter
Run the Inverter in V/f control mode for trial operation. The control mode is not initialized. Therefore,
set n002 to 0 for V/f control. Set the motor current parameter in n036 in order to prevent the motor from
burning due to overloading.
H Control Mode Setting

Parame- Register
ter
n002
0102
Name
Control
mode
selection
Description
Sets the control mode for the 0, 1

Inverter.
0: V/f control mode
1: Vector control mode
4-6
Setting
range
Note
1. The control mode

is not initialized
with n001 settings.
Note
2. There are parameters that are

changed according to the set
value in n002. For
details, refer to
5-1-2 Setting the
Control Mode
(n002).
Unit of
setting
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
No
Chapter 4
Test Run
Key sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
The parameter number is displayed.
Press the Enter Key to display the set value in n002.
Use the Increment or Decrement key to set n002 to 0
unless the value is already set to 0, during which the
display flashes.
approximately 1 s.
In approximately
1 s.
H Setting the Rated Motor Current

Parame- Register
ter
n036
0124
Key sequence
Name
Rated
motor
current
Indicator
Description
Used to set the rated motor

current (A) used for the reference current of motor
overload detection (OL1).
Note
1. The default setting for the rated

motor current is
the standard rated
current of the
maximum applicable motor.
Note
2. Motor overload
detection (OL1) is
disabled by setting the parameter
to 0.0.
Display
example
Setting
range
0.0% to
150%
(A) of
rated
output
current
of the
Inverter
Unit of
setting
0.1 A
Default
setting
Changes during
operation
See note No
1 under
Description.)
Explanation
The parameter number is displayed.
Press the Enter Key to display the set value in n036.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set n036 to the
rated motor current, during which the display flashes.
In approximately
1 s.
approximately 1 s.
4-7
Chapter 4
Test Run
5
No-load Operation
Start the no-load motor (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system) using the Digital Operator.
Note Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to MIN.
H Forward/Reverse Rotation with the Digital Operator

Key
sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Monitors the frequency reference.
Press the RUN Key. The RUN Indicator will be lit.
Turn the FREQ adjuster clockwise slowly.
The monitored frequency reference will be displayed.
The motor will start rotating in the forward direction according
to the frequency reference.
Press the MODE Key to turn ON the F/R indicator.
For will be displayed.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to change the direction of
motor rotation. The direction of motor rotation selected will be
enabled when the display is changed after the Key is pressed.
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or
abnormal sound from the motor.
Check that no faults have occurred in the Inverter during operation.
H Stopping the Motor

On completion of operating the motor in the no-load state in the forward or reverse direction, press the
STOP/RESET Key. The motor will stop. (The RUN indicator will flash until the motor stops.)
Actual Load Operation
After checking the operation with the motor in no-load status, connect the mechanical system and
operate with an actual load.
Note Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to MIN.
H Connecting the System

After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis in the mechanical system.
H Operation Using the Digital Operator

In case a fault occurs during operation, make sure the Stop Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
Use the Digital Operator in the same way as no-load operation.
First set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
4-8
Test Run
Chapter 4
H Checking the Operating Status

Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at
slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or
abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display (IOUT or multi-function monitor U-03) to
ensure that the output current is not becoming excessive.
4-9
5
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
Initial Settings
Operation in Vector Control
Operation in V/f Control
Setting the Local/Remote Mode
Selecting the Operation Command
Setting the Frequency Reference
Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit
Selecting the Stopping Method
Multi-function I/O
Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse
Monitor Output
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
This section explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the Inverter.
The settings of parameters described here will be sufficient for simple Inverter operations.
First make these basic settings and then skip to the explanations of those special functions, even when your application requires special functions, such as energy-saving
control, PID control, stall prevention, carrier frequency setting, overtorque detection,
torque compensation, slip compensation. Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced Operation.
5-1
Initial Settings
The following initial settings are required.

Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization (n001): Set n001 to 4 so that n001
through n179 can be set or displayed.
Control Mode Selection (n002): Set to V/f or vector control mode according to the application.
5-1-1 Setting the Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter

Initialization (n001)
Set n001 to 4 so that n001 through n179 can be set or displayed.
n001
Setting
range
Parameter Write-prohibit
Selection/Parameter Initialization
0 to 11
Register
0101 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
1
Note This parameter makes it possible to write-prohibit parameters, change the parameter set or displayed range, or initialize all parameters to default values.
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
9
10
11
Description
Displays and sets n001. Parameters from n002 to n179 can be displayed only.
Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n049 (i.e., function group 1 settings).
Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n079 (i.e., function groups 1 and 2 settings).
Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n119 (i.e., function groups 1 through 3 settings).
Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n179 (i.e., function groups 1 through 4 settings).
Clears the error log.
Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence. (See note.)
Initializes parameters in 3-wire sequence. (See note.)
For the USA, initializes parameter in 2-wire sequence (See note.)
For the USA, initializes parameter in 3-wire sequence (See note.)
Note The set value in n002 is not initialized with n001 set to 8, 9, 10, or 11.
Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the preset control mode. The default
value varies with the control mode. For details, refer to page 5-3.
n014 (middle output frequency), n015 (middle output frequency voltage), n016 (minimum output
frequency), n017 (minimum output frequency voltage), n104 (torque compensation primarydelay time constant), n111 (slip compensation gain), n112 (slip compensation primary-delay time
constant)
5-2
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-1-2 Setting the Control Mode (n002)
The 3G3MV Inverter operates in vector or V/f control mode to be selected according to the application.
These two modes have the following characteristics.
Vector Control Mode

The Inverter in vector control mode calculates the vector of the operating condition of the motor. Then
the 150% rated output torque of the motor is provided at an output frequency of 1 Hz. Vector control
provides more powerful motor control than V/f control and makes it possible to suppress speed fluctuation regardless of changes in loads. Normally set the Inverter to this mode.
V/f Control Mode

This mode, which is used by conventional general-purpose inverters, is convenient when replacing a
conventional model with the 3G3MV Inverter because the Inverter in this mode can be operated without
considering the constants of the motor. Furthermore, set the Inverter to this mode if the Inverter is connected to more than one motor or special motors such as high-speed motors.
n002
Setting
range
Control Mode Selection
Register
0102 Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Note This parameter is used for selecting the control mode of the Inverter.
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
V/f control mode
Vector control mode (open loop)
Note 1. This parameter is not initialized by setting n001 (parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization) to 8, 9, 10, or 11 for parameter initialization. Be sure to change the
parameter n002 before changing the control mode.
Note 2. Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the control mode set in this
parameter. The default value varies with the control mode. Therefore, be sure to set the
following parameters after setting the control mode in n002.
5-3
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Parameter
Name
n014
n015
Middle output frequency

Middle output frequency voltage
n016
n017
Minimum output frequency

Minimum output frequency voltage
n104
Torque compensation primary-delay

time constant
Slip compensation gain
Slip compensation primary-delay
time constant
n111
n112
Default value
V/f control
Vector control
(Set value: 0)
(Set value: 1)
1.5 Hz
3.0 Hz
12.0 V (24.0 V)
11.0 V (22.0 V)
(See note 2.)
1.5 Hz
1.0 Hz
12.0 V (24.0 V)
4.3 V (8.6 V)
(See note 2.)
0.3 s
0.2 s
0.0
2.0 s
1.0
0.2 s
Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V models.

Note 2. For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, this value is set to 10.0 V for 200-V-class models and to
20.0 V for 400-V-class models.
5-2
Operation in Vector Control

The Inverter in vector control mode calculates the vector of the operating condition of the
motor. Then the 150% rated output torque of the motor is provided at an output frequency of 1 Hz. Vector control provides more powerful motor control than V/f control and
makes it possible to suppress speed fluctuation with changes in loads.
To operate the Inverter in vector control mode, be sure to set the following parameters.
n036 (rated motor current), n106 (rated motor slip), n107 (motor wire-to-wire resistance), n110 (motor no-load current)
H Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036)

Check the motor nameplate and set this parameter to the rated current.
This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set
value is also used for determining the electronic thermal characteristics to protect the motor from overheating. The correct set value protects the motor from burning that may result from overloading.
n036
Setting
range
Rated Motor Current
Register
0124 Hex
0.0% to 150% (A) of rated output

current of the Inverter
Unit of
setting
0.1 A
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note.
Note 1. The default setting for this parameter is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.
Note 2. Setting n036 to 0.0 disables the motor overload protection function, regardless of the
setting of n037 or n038.
5-4
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
H Setting the Rated Motor Slip (n106)
Set the rated motor slip in n106.
value is used for slip compensation as well.
Calculate the rated motor slip value from the rated frequency (Hz) and rpm on the motor nameplate by
using the following formula.
Rated slit value (Hz) = Rated frequency (Hz) -- Rated rpm x Number of poles/120
n106
Setting
range
Rated Motor Slip
Register
016A Hex
0.0 to 20.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
See note.
Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard motor slip of the maximum applicable motor.
H Setting the Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance (n107)

Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance or phase-to-neutral resistance of the
motor.
Contact the manufacturer of the motor for the above resistance.
This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly.
n107
Setting
range
Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance Register
016B Hex
0.000 to 65.50 ()
See note
1.
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note
2.
Note 1. The value will be set in 0.001- increments if the resistance is less than 10 and 0.01-
increments if the resistance is 10 or over.
Note 2. The default setting for this parameter is the standard phase-to-neutral resistance of the
maximum applicable motor.
H Setting the Motor No-load Current (n110)

Set the motor no-load current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.
Contact the manufacturer of the motor for the motor no-load current.
value is used for slip compensation as well.
n110
Setting
range
Motor No-load Current
Register
016E Hex
0 to 99 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note.
Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard no-load current of the maximum applicable
motor.
5-5
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-3
Operation in V/f Control

This mode, which is used by conventional general-purpose inverters, is convenient
when replacing a conventional model with the 3G3MV Inverter because the Inverter in
this mode can be operated without considering the constants of the motor. Furthermore,
set the Inverter to this mode if the Inverter is connected to two or more motors or special
motors, such as high-speed motors.
To operate the Inverter in V/f control mode, be sure to set n036 for the rated motor current and n011 through n017 for the V/f pattern.
5-3-1 Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036)

Check the motor nameplate and set this parameter to the rated current.
This set value is used for determining the electronic thermal characteristics to protect the motor from
overheating. The correct set value protects the motor from burning that may result from overloading.
n036
Setting
range
Rated Motor Current
Register
0124 Hex
0.0% to 150% (A) of rated output

current of the Inverter
Unit of
setting
0.1 A
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note
1.
Note 1. The default setting for this parameter is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.
Note 2. Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.
5-3-2 Setting the V/f Patterns (n011 to n017)

Set the V/f pattern so that the motor output torque is adjusted to the required load torque.
The 3G3MV incorporates an automatic torque boost function. Therefore, a maximum of 150% torque
can be output at 3 Hz without changing the default settings. Check the system in trial operation and
leave the default settings as they are if no torque characteristic changes are required.
n011
Setting
range
n012
Setting
range
n013
Setting
range
n014
Setting
range
5-6
Maximum Frequency (FMAX)
Register
010B Hex
50.0 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Maximum Voltage (VMAX)
Register
010C Hex
0.1 to 255.0 [0.1 to 510.0] (V)
Unit of
setting
0.1 V
Maximum Voltage Frequency (FA)
Register
010D Hex
0.2 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Middle Output Frequency (FB)
Register
010E Hex
0.1 to 399.9 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
60.0
200.0
[400.0]
60.0
1.5
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
n015
Setting
range
n016
Setting
range
n017
Setting
range
Middle Output Frequency Voltage

(VC)
0.1 to 255.0 [0.1 to 510.0] (V)
Register
010F Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 V
Minimum Output Frequency

(FMIN)
0.1 to 10.0 (Hz)
Register
0110 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz

Voltage (VMIN)
0.1 to 50.0 [0.1 to 100.0] (V)
Register
0111 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 V
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
12.0
[24.0]
(See
note 2.)
1.5
12.0
[24.0]
(See
note 2.)
Note 1. [ ] values indicate those for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, this value is set to 10.0 V for 200-V-class models and to
20.0 V for 400-V-class models.
Output voltage
(V)
Note 1. Set the parameters so that

the following condition will
be satisfied.
n016 n014 < n013
n011
n012 (VMAX)
n015 (VC)
Note 2. The value set in n015 will be

ignored if parameters n016
and n014 are the same in
value.
n017 (VMIN)
n016
(FMIN)
n014
(FB)
n013
(FA)
n011
(FMAX)
Frequency (Hz)
Set the rated motor frequency as the maximum voltage frequency, and set the rated motor voltage as
the maximum voltage.
The vertical-axis load or the load with high viscous friction may require high torque at low speed. If the
torque is insufficient at low speed, increase the voltage in the low-speed range by 1 V, provided that no
overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or consider the
use of an Inverter model with a higher capacity.
The required torque of fan or pump control increases in proportion to the square of the speed. By setting a quadratic V/f pattern to increase the voltage in the low-speed range, the power consumption of
the system will increase.
5-7
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-4
Setting the Local/Remote Mode

The 3G3MV operates in local or remote mode. The following description provides
information on these modes and how to select them.
H Basic Concept
Operation mode
Remote
Basic concept
The Inverter in a system
operates according to the
control signal of the host
controller.
Description
Operation Command
Selectable from four types and set in n003.
Frequency Reference
Selectable from ten types and set in n004.
Local
The Inverter in a system

operates independently in this
mode so that the Inverter can
be checked independently.
Operation Command
Starts with the RUN Key of the Digital Operator
and stops with the STOP/RESET Key.
Frequency Reference
Set with the Digital Operator or the FREQ
adjuster.
Set with frequency reference selection in local
mode in n07.
H Local/Remote Selection Methods

The following two selection methods are available to set the Inverter to local or remote mode. However, it is not possible to switch between local and remote modes during operation command input.
S Select the mode with the LO/RE Key of the Digital Operator.
S Set any one of multi-function inputs 1 through 7 (n050 through n056) to 17 to set the Inverter to
local mode with control input turned ON.
Note If the above setting is made, mode selection will be possible only with multi-function input, and not
The Inverter always goes into remote mode when the power is turned ON. To operate immediately
after powerup, preset the RUN command and frequency reference settings in remote mode.
5-8
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-5
Selecting the Operation Command

The following description provides information on how to input operation commands to
start or stop the Inverter or change the direction of rotation of the Inverter.
Two types of command input methods are available. Select either one of them according
to the application.
H Selecting the Operation Mode (n003)

Select the method of operation mode input to start or stop the Inverter.
The following method is enabled in remote mode only. The command can be input through key
sequences on the Digital Operator.
n003
Setting
range
Operation Command Selection
Register
0103 Hex
0 to 3
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
The RUN and STOP/RESET Keys of the Digital Operator are enabled.
Multi-function input in 2- or 3-wire sequence through the control circuit terminals is enabled.
RS-422/485 communications are enabled.
Input from option (CompoBus/D Communications Unit) is enabled.
0
1
2
3
H Selecting the STOP/RESET Key Function (n007)

When parameter n003 is not set to 0, set whether or not to use the STOP/RESET Key of the Digital
Operator to stop the Inverter in remote mode. The STOP/RESET Key is always enabled in local mode
regardless of the setting in n007.
n007
Setting
range
STOP Key Function Selection
Register
0107 Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
The STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator is enabled.
The STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator is disabled.
5-9
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-6
Setting the Frequency Reference
5-6-1 Selecting the Frequency Reference

The following description provides information on how to set the frequency reference in
the Inverter. Select the method according to the operation mode.
Remote mode: Select and set one out of ten frequency references in n004.
Local mode:
Select and set one out of two frequency references in n008.
H Selecting the Frequency Reference (n004) in Remote Mode

Select the input method of frequency references in remote mode.
Five frequency references are available in remote mode. Select one of them according to the application.
n004
Setting
range
Frequency Reference Selection
Register
0104 Hex
0 to 9
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
The settings of the FREQUENCY adjuster in the Digital Operator are enabled. (See note 1.)
Frequency reference 1 (n024) is enabled.
The frequency reference control terminal (for 0- to 10-V input) is enabled. (See note 2.)
The frequency reference control terminal (for 4- to 20-mA current input) is enabled. (See note
3.)
The frequency reference control terminal (for 0- to 20-mA current input) is enabled. (See note
3.)
The pulse train command control input is enabled.
Frequency reference (0002 Hex) through RS-422/485 communications is enabled.
Multi-function analog voltage input (0 to 10 V) is enabled. This setting is not required unless
two analog inputs are required in PID control.
Multi-function analog current input (4 to 20 mA) is enabled. This setting is not required unless
two analog inputs are required in PID control.
Frequency reference input from option (CompoBus/D Communications Unit) is enabled.
Note 1. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set when the FREQ adjuster is set to MAX.
Note 2. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set with 10 V input.
Note 3. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set with 20 mA input, provided that SW2 on the control PCB is switched from V to I.
Note 4. Set n149 for the pulse train input scale to the pulse train frequency that is equivalent to
the maximum frequency (FMAX).
5-10
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
The frequency reference set in n004 functions as frequency reference 1 when the Inverter is in multistep speed operation. The set values in n025 through n031 and n120 through n127 for frequency references 2 through 16 are enabled.
H Selecting the Frequency Reference (n008) in Local Mode

Select the input method of frequency references in local mode.
Two frequency references are available in local mode. Select one of them according to the application.
n008
Setting
range
Frequency Reference Selection in

Local Mode
0, 1
Register
0108 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
The settings of the FREQ adjuster in the Digital Operator are enabled. (See note 1.)
Key sequences on the Digital Operator are enabled. (See note 2.)
Note 1. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set when the FREQ adjuster is set to MAX.
Note 2. The frequency reference can be set with key sequences while the FREF indicator is lit or
with the set value in n024 for frequency reference 1. In either case, the value is set in
n024.
5-6-2 Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits

Regardless of the methods of operation mode and frequency reference input, the upper
and lower frequency reference limits can be set.
H Setting the Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits (n033 and
n034)
Set the upper and lower frequency reference limits as percentage based on the maximum frequency
as 100%.
n033
Setting
range
n034
Setting
range
Upper Frequency Reference Limit
Register
0121 Hex
0% to 110%
(Max. frequency = 100%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Lower Frequency Reference Limit
Register
0122 Hex
0% to 110%
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
100
Note If n034 is set to a value less than the minimum output frequency (FMIN), the Inverter will have no
output when a frequency reference less than the minimum output frequency input is ON.
5-11
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-6-3 Frequency Referencing by Analog Input
This section explains the methods for referencing frequencies by analog input, adjusting
input characteristics, and detecting input command errors. Either the frequency reference control terminal (voltage/current) or multi-function analog voltage/current input
can be used for analog inputs. The gain, bias, and filter time parameters can be used for
adjustments, or, alternatively, the adjustments can be made by external analog voltage
(current), using the multi-function analog inputs.
H Setting Frequency References by Analog Input

Analog inputs can be set only in remote mode. Set parameter n004 (frequency reference selection) to
any of the following: 2 to 4 (frequency reference control terminal), 7 (multi-function analog voltage input), or 8 (multi-function analog current input).
Note If the frequency reference control terminal is to be used for current inputs, the SW2 setting must
be changed from V to I.
H FR Terminal Adjustments for Frequency Reference Input

D Gain and Bias Settings (n060 and n061)
Set the input characteristics of analog frequency references in n060 (for the frequency reference gain)
and n061 (for the frequency reference bias).
Set the frequency of maximum analog input (10 V or 20 mA) in n060 as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.
Example: In order to obtain the maximum frequency at 5 V, set the value to 200% because 10-V
input is 200% maximum frequency.
Set the frequency of minimum analog input (0 V, 0 mA, or 4 mA) in n061 as percentage based on the
maximum frequency as 100%.
Example: In order to obtain 50% maximum frequency output with 0 V input, set the value to 50%.
n060
Setting
range
n061
Setting
range
Frequency Reference Gain
Register
013C Hex
0% to 255%
Unit of
setting
1%
Frequency Reference Bias
Register
013D Hex
--99% to 99%
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
100
D Filter Time Constant Settings (n062)

A primary-delay digital filter can be set for analog frequency references to be input.
This setting is ideal if the analog input signal changes rapidly or the signal is subject to noise interference.
The larger the set value is, the slower the response speed will be.
n062
Setting
range
5-12
Analog Frequency Reference

Filter Time Constant
0.00 to 2.00 (s)
Register
013E Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.10
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
H Multi-function Analog Input
Various auxiliary analog inputs can be set for the Digital Operators multi-function analog voltage/current input. Select from the following functions.
n077
Setting
range
n078
Setting
range
n079
Setting
range
Multi-function Analog Input

Terminal Function Selection
0 to 4
Register
014D Hex
Unit of
setting

Terminal Selection
0, 1
Register
014E Hex
Unit of
setting

Frequency Bias
0 to 50
Register
014F Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
10
For n077, select from the following five functions allocated to the multi-function analog input terminal.
n077 Set Values

Value
0
Name
Multi-function
Analog Input
Function Disable
Description
Disables multi-function analog inputs.
Set 0 when setting multi-function inputs with n004 (Frequency
Reference Selection) or n164 (PID Feedback Input Block Selection). If
this function is allocated for both, an error (err or oP6) will be generated.
Sets the terminal to be used as a second analog frequence reference
terminal. The analog input from the multi-function analog input becomes
the frequency reference in place of Frequency Reference 2. Toggle the
two analog inputs with the multi-function inputs multi-step speed
references.
Auxiliary Frequency
Reference
Frequency Gain
(See note 1.)
When this function is set, Frequency Reference 2 (n025) is ignored.

Adjusts the gain for frequency references that are input to the frequency
reference input (analog) terminal.
Frequency Bias
(See note 1.)
0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): 0x to 2x (See note 2.)

Adjusts the bias for frequency references that are input to the frequency
reference input (analog) terminal.
Output Voltage Bias
0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): --n079 SV to +n079 SV (See note 2.)

Adjusts the Inverters output voltage bias. The bias value that is input is
added to the output voltage value for the normal V/f setting.
0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): 0 V to +100 V
(See note 2.)
Note 1. The frequency reference gain (n060) and frequency reference bias (n061) parameter settings are enabled. If frequency gain is set for the multi-function analog input, it is multiplied by n060; if frequency bias is set, it is added to n061.
Note 2. The relationship between the multi-function analog inputs input voltage and control variable is shown for when the frequency reference and multi-function analog input gain are
100%, and when the bias setting is 0%.
5-13
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
For n078, select whether select whether voltage inputs or current inputs are to be used.
Value
0
1
Description
Enable multi-function analog voltage inputs. (Disable current inputs.)
Enable multi-function analog current inputs. (Disable voltage inputs.)
When setting 3 (frequency bias) for the multi-function analog input terminal function selection
(n077), set the standard value for the bias in n079. Make the setting as a percentage, with the maximum frequency (n011) as100%.
H Adjusting Multi-function Analog Input

D Setting the Gain and Bias of Multi-function Analog Voltage/Current Input (n068 to
n072)
Set the multi-function analog voltage input characteristics in n068 (multi-function analog voltage input
gain) and n069 (multi-function analog voltage input bias). Set the multi-function analog current input
characteristics in n071 (multi-function analog current input gain) and n072 (multi-function analog current input bias).
For the gain, set the maximum analog input (10 V or 20 mA) frequency as a percentage with the maximum frequency as 100%.
For the bias, set the minimum analog input (0 V or 20 mA) frequency as a percentage with the maximum frequency as 100%.
n068
Setting
range
n069
Setting
range
n071
Setting
range
n072
Setting
range
5-14
Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Gain
--255(%) to 255(%)
(Max. frequency: 100%)
Register
0144 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%

Input Bias
--100(%) to 100(%)
Register
0145 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Multi-function Analog Current

Input Gain
--255(%) to 255(%)
Register
0147 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%

Input Bias
--100(%) to 100(%)
Register
0148 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
100
100
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
D Setting the Filter Time Constant for Multi-function Analog Voltage/Current Input
(n070 and n073)
These parameters can be used to set a primary-delay digital filter for multi-function analog voltage
input. For voltage inputs, set the multi-function analog voltage input filter time constant (n070). For
current inputs, set the multi-function analog current input filter time constant (n073).
These parameter settings are effective for smooth operation of the Inverter if the analog input signal
changes too rapidly or the signal is interfered with by noise.
The larger the set value is, the lower the response will be.
n070
Setting
range
n073
Setting
range

Input Filter Time Constant
0.00 to 2.00 (s)
Register
0146 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 s

Input Filter Time Constant
0.00 to 2.00 (s)
Register
0149 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0.10
0.10
H Multi-function Analog Input Selection

D Multi-function Input Selection (n077)
n077
Multi-function Analog Input Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Range: 0 to 4
The 2CN input terminal on the digital operator can be used as an auxiliary analog input (0 --10V or 4 -- 20
mA). The Analog input Connector/Cable Assembly option (DS082) is required for interface with 2CN on
the digital operator.
D n077 Setting
Setting
Function
0
1
Disabled
Auxiliary frequence reference (FREF2)
Frequency reference gain (FGAIN)
Description
The multi-function input is disabled

When frequency reference 2 is selected in
multi-step speed reference, the input analog
signal for the CN2 terminal becomes the frequence reference. The n025 setting becomes invalid.
Note: Set frequency reference gain to
n068 or n071, and frequency reference bias
to n069 or n072.
Set the FGAIN to constant n060 or n074 and
the FBIAS to constant n061 or n075 for the
main speed frequency reference. Then,
multiply the resulting frequency reference
by the FGAIN.
5-15
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Setting
Function
Frequency reference (FBIAS)
Output voltage bias (VBIAS)
1) Auxiliary Frequency Reference (n077=1)
Description
Set the FGAIN to constant n060 or n074 and

the FBIAS to constant n061 or n075 for the
main speed frequency reference. Then, add
the FBIAS to the resulting frequency reference. The amount of the FBIAS to be added
is set to n079.
Add the VBIAS to the output voltage after V/f
conversion.
2) Frequency Reference Gain (n077=2)
FGAIN
FREF2
100%
2.00
1.00
0%
0V
(4mA)
10V
(20mA)
When multi-function analog input (n004 = 7 or

8) is selected, 2CN on the digital operator becomes the speed reference input. If n004 is
set to any other data value, the 2CN auxiliary
analog input is determined by the selection of
Command A.
3) Frequency Reference Bias (n077=3)
5V
10V
(20mA)
Frequency reference is multiplied by FGAIN,

after frequency reference gain (n060 (terminal
FR) or n074 (terminal RP)) and frequency
reference bias (n061 (terminal FR) or n074 (terminal RP)) are used to calculate a master
speed reference input at terminals FR or RP.
4) Output Voltage Bias (n077=4)

VBIAS
FBIAS
100%
n079
0%
0V
(4mA)
0V
(4mA)
5V
10V
(20mA)
0%
-n079
FBIAS is added to the frequency reference,

after frequency reference gain (n060 (terminal FR) or n074 (terminal RP)) and frequency
reference bias (n061 (terminal FR) or n075
(terminal RP)) are used to calculate master
speed reference input at terminals FR or RP
5-16
0V
(4mA)
10V
(20mA)
Values are for 230V drive
VBIAS is added to output voltage after V/F pattern is established.
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
D Multi-function Analog Input Selection (n078)
n078
Multi-function Analog Input Signal Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Range: 0 or 1
Setting
0
1
Description
2CN input terminal (0-10V input)

2CN input terminal (4-20mA input)
Constant Name
No.
n078
Unit
Setting Range
Multi-function analog input signal 1

selection
Initial
Setting
0= Digital operator terminal 0

(voltage: 0 to 10V)
1= Digital operator terminal
(current 4 to 20mA)
D Frequency Reference Bias Setting (n079)

n079
Frequency Reference Bias Setting
Factory Setting: 10%

Range: 0 to 50%
The bias is used only for the auxiliary analog input.
Constant Name
No.
n079
Frequency reference bias setting
Unit
Setting Range
Initial
Setting
100% / Max. output frequency 10

(n011)
H Frequency Reference Loss Detection (n064)

This function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only. If the frequency reference from the control
circuit drops by more than 90% within 400 ms, this function detects it and determines that the reference
has been lost (e.g., from some cause such as disconnected wiring).
When operating in remote mode, the setting for the frequency reference loss detection function is enabled when either an analog reference or a pulse train reference is selected for n004 (frequency reference selection).
Note 1. If frequence reference agree (set value: 2) is preset for multi-function outputs 1 to 3
(n057 to n059), the frequency reference loss status can be checked. When using this output, implement external error processing.
Note 2. When the frequency reference loss detection is enabled and a loss is detected, operation
will continue at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the loss.
Note 3. If the frequency reference is restored during a frequency reference loss, and the frequency returned to at least the level of the continuing operation, the frequency reference loss
detection will be cleared and the Inverter will return to normal operation.
Note 4. Frequency reference loss detection does not operate for multi-function analog inputs.
n064
Setting
range
Frequency Reference Loss

Detection
0, 1
Register
0140 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
5-17
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Value
Description
Loss detection disabled. (Operation according to frequency reference; frequency reference
loss detection disabled.)
Loss detection enabled. (After loss detection, operation continues at 80% of the frequency
reference prior to the loss; frequency reference loss detection enabled.)
0
1
5-6-4 Setting Frequency References through Key Sequences

The following description provides information on parameters related to frequency reference settings through key sequences on the Digital Operator
H Frequency Reference Setting/Display Unit Selection (n035)

Set the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored in n035
through the Digital Operator.
The frequency reference value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz
and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.
n035
Setting
range
Frequency Reference
Setting/Display Unit Selection
0 to 3,999
Register
0123 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2 to 39
40 to 3,999
Description
Less than 100 Hz: 0.01-Hz increments
100 Hz or over: 0.1-Hz increments
0.1% increments (Max. frequency: 100%)
1-rpm increments (number of motor poles)
Unit setting
The value to be set or monitored at max. frequency
jjjj
Three digits
Decimal place
Note To display 50.0 for example, set the value to 1500. (See note.)
Note The unit of setting of each parameter and monitor item below varies with the decimal place.
Parameters
n024 to n032: Frequency references 1 through 8 and inching frequency command
n120 through n127: Frequency references 9 through 16
Monitor Items
U-01: Frequency reference monitor
U-02: Output frequency monitor
5-18
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
H Setting Frequency References 1 through 16 and the Inching Frequency

Command (n024 through n031, n120 through n127)
Frequency references 1 through 16 and an inching frequency command can be set together in the
Inverter (using registers n024 through n31, n120 through n127).
D Setting Frequency References 1 through 16 (n024 through n31, n120 through n127)
n024
Setting
range
n025
Setting
range
n026
Setting
range
n027
Setting
range
n028
Setting
range
n029
Setting
range
n030
Setting
range
n031
Setting
range
Frequency Reference 1
Register
0118 Hex
0.00 to max. frequency
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
0119 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
011A Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
011B Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
011C Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
011D Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
011E Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
011F Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
6.0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5-19
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
n120
Setting
range
n121
Setting
range
n122
Setting
range
n123
Setting
range
n124
Setting
range
n125
Setting
range
n126
Setting
range
n127
Setting
range
Register
0178 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
0179 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
017A Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
017B Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
017C Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
017D Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
017E Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Register
017F Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Note 1. The setting unit of frequency references 1 through 16 is changed with the set value in
n035 for frequency reference setting and decimal place selection. Values will be set in
0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.
Note 2. Frequency reference 1 is enabled with n004 for frequency reference selection set to 1.
Note 3. Frequency references 2 through 16 are enabled by setting multi-step speed references 1
through 4 in n050 through n056 for multi-function input. Refer to the following table for the
relationship between multi-step speed references 1 through 4 and frequency references 1
through 16.
5-20
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Frequency reference
Frequency reference 1
Multi-step speed
reference 1
(Set value: 6)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Multi-step speed
reference 2
(Set value: 7)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Multi-step speed
reference 3
(Set value: 8)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Multi-step speed
reference 4
(Set value: 9)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
To change the frequency of frequency reference 2, for example, turn ON only the multi-function input
terminal where multi-step speed reference 2 is set, and turn OFF any other multi-function input terminal.
For example, no settings for multi-step speed reference 3 or 4 will be required if only frequency references 1 through 4 are used. Any multi-step speed reference not set is regarded as turned-OFF input.
D Setting the Inching Frequency Command (n032)

The inching frequency command must be set as multi-function input in order to use the inching frequency command.
n032
Setting
range
Inching Frequency Command
Register
0120 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
(See note
1.)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
6.0
Note 1. The setting unit of the inching frequency command is changed with the set value in n035
for frequency reference setting and decimal place selection. The value will be set in
0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.
Note 2. In order to use the inching frequency command, one of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input must be set to 10 as an inching frequency command. Parameter n032 is selectable by turning ON the multi-function input set with the inching frequency
command. The inching frequency command takes precedence over the multi-step speed
reference (i.e., when the inching frequency command is ON, all multi-step speed reference input will be ignored).
H Setting the Frequency Reference with the FREF Indicator Lit

The frequency reference can be set while the FREF indicator of the Digital Operator is lit in the following cases.
S Parameter n004 for frequency reference selection is set to 1, which enables frequency reference
1, and the Inverter is in remote mode.
5-21
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
S Parameter n008 for frequency selection in local mode is set to 1, which enables key sequences on
the Digital Operator, and the Inverter is in local mode.
S Frequency references 2 through 16 are set with multi-step speed reference input.
The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation.
When the frequency reference is changed while the FREF indicator is lit, the corresponding parameter
is changed simultaneously. For example, if frequency reference 2 has been selected with multi-function input (a multi-step speed reference), the set value in n025 (for frequency reference 2) will be
changed simultaneously when the frequency reference is changed while the FREF indicator is lit.
Take the following default steps, for example, to change the frequency reference with the FREF indicator lit.
Key
sequence
Indicator
Display
example
Explanation
Power On
Note If the FREF indicator has not been lit, press the Mode Key
repeatedly until the FREF indicator is lit.
Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the frequency
reference.
The data display will flash while the frequency reference is set.
Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and
the data display will be lit.
D Setting the Operator Frequency Setting Method (n009)

The Enter Key need not be pressed when changing the setting in n009. In that case, the frequency
reference will change when the set value is changed with the Increment or Decrement Key while the
data display is continuously lit.
n009
Setting
range
Operator Frequency Setting

Method
0, 1
Register
0109 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Set Values
Value
0
1
5-22
Description
Enter Key enabled (The set value is entered with the Enter Key pressed.)
Enter Key disabled (The set value set is entered immediately.)
No
0
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train Input

By setting n004 for frequency reference selection to 5 for enabling the pulse train reference control terminal, frequency references can be executed by pulse train input
through the PR terminal.
The following description provides information on the n149 parameter (pulse train input
scale), which is used to execute frequency references by pulse train input.
H Setting the Pulse Train Input Scale (n149)

Set this parameter to the pulse train input scale so that frequency references can be executed by pulse
train input.
Set the maximum pulse train frequency in 10-Hz increments based on 10 Hz as 1. A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency.
n149
Setting
range
Pulse Train Input Scale
Register
0195 Hex
100 to 3,300
Unit of
setting
1 (10 Hz)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
2,500
Note 1. For example, to set the maximum frequency reference with pulse train frequency input at
10 kHz, set the parameter to 1,000 from the following formula.
10,000 (Hz)/10 (Hz) = 1,000
Note 2. Input the pulse train into the frequency reference common (FC) and pulse train input (RP)
terminals under the following conditions.
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
Low level: 0.8 V max.
The response frequency is within a range from 0 to 33 kHz (30% to 70% ED).
H Setting the Pulse Train Frequency Reference Gain/Bias (n074/n075)

Set the input characteristics of pulse train input.
Gain: Set the gain in percentage based on the maximum frequency of the pulse train input scale in
n149 as 100%.
Bias: Set the bias in percentage for frequency reference input at 0-Hz pulse train input based oh the
n074
Setting
range
Pulse Train Frequency Reference

Gain
0 to 255
Register
014A Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
100
5-23
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
n075
Setting
range

Bias
--100 to 100
Register
014B Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0
Frequency
reference (Hz)
Pulse train input frequency (Hz)

n011: Maximum frequency
H Pulse Train Frequency Reference Input Filter Constant (n076)

This parameter can be used to set a primary-delay digital filter for pulse train frequency reference input.
This parameter setting is effective for smooth operation of the Inverter if the pulse train input signal
changes too rapidly or the signal is interfered with by noise.
The larger the set value is, the slower the response will be.
n076
Setting
range
5-24

Input Filter Constant
0.00 to 2.00
Register
014C Hex
Unit of
setting
0.01 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.10
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-7
Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

The following description provides information on parameters related to acceleration
and deceleration time settings.
Trapezoidal and S-shape acceleration and deceleration are available. Using the
S-shape characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to
the machinery when stopping or starting.
H Acceleration/Deceleration Time Unit (n018)

The acceleration and deceleration time of the Inverter can be set within a range from 0.0 to 6,000 s
without changing the default setting. If a more precise unit of setting is required, this parameter can be
set for 0.01-s increments. In this case, the setting range will be from 0.00 to 600.0 s.
n018
Setting
range
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Setting Unit
0, 1
Register
0112 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Less than 1,000 s: 0.1-s increments
1,000 s or over: 1-s increments
Less than 100 s: 0.01-s increments
100 s or over: 0.1-s increments
H Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

(n019 through n022 and n041 to n044)
Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set.
The acceleration time is the time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency and the
deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency. The actual
acceleration or deceleration time is obtained from the following formula.
Acceleration/Deceleration time = (Acceleration/Deceleration time set value)
(Frequency reference value) (Max. frequency)
Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are enabled by setting 11 for acceleration/deceleration time
selection in any of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input.
Deceleration time 2 is also enabled by emergency-stop settings 19, 20, 21, and 22 in any of the parameters for parameters n050 through n056 for multi-function input with n005 for interruption mode selection set to 0 (i.e., deceleration stop).
The drive incorporates four sets of individually programmable acceleration and deceleration times.
Four acceleration and deceleration times can be selected if two Multi-function Input Terminals
(n050 to n056) are set to 11 (accel/decel time 1) and 27 (accel/decel time 2).
5-25
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
n019
Setting
range
n020
Setting
range
n021
Setting
range
n022
Setting
range
n041
Setting
range
n042
Setting
range
n043
Setting
range
n044
Setting
range
Acceleration Time 1
Register
0113 Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Deceleration Time 1
Register
0114 Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Acceleration Time 2
Register
0115 Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
2.1 s
(See note 1.)
Deceleration Time 2
Register
0116 Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Acceleration Time 3
Register
0129 Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Deceleration Time 3
Register
012A Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Acceleration Time 4
Register
012B Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Deceleration Time 4
Register
012C Hex
0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
(See note 1.)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
10.0
(See
note 2.)
Note
1. The setting unit of acceleration or deceleration time is determined by the set value in n018 (acceleration/deceleration time unit).
n018 set to 0: Setting range from 0.0 to 6,000 (0.0 through 999.9 s or 1,000 through 6,000 s)
n018 set to 1: Setting range from 0.00 to 600.0 (0.0 through 99.99 s or 100.0 through 600.0 s)
Note
2. When n018 is set to 1, the default value of acceleration or deceleration time will be set to 10.00.
5-26
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
H S-shape Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristic (n023)
Trapezoidal and S-shape acceleration and deceleration are available. Using the S-shape characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping or
starting.
Any one of three S-shape acceleration/deceleration times (0.2, 0.5, and 1.0 s) is selectable.
S-shape Acceleration/Deceleration Register
Characteristic
0 to 3
Unit of
setting
n023
Setting
range
0117 Hex
1
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
No S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic (Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration)
S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 0.2 s
0
1
2
3
Note When the S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is set, the acceleration and
deceleration times will be lengthened according to the S-shape at the beginning and end of acceleration/deceleration.
5-8
Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

This parameter is used to specify whether to enable or disable the reverse rotation command sent to the Inverter from the control circuit terminals or Digital Operator.
The parameter should be set to not accept when the Inverter is applied to systems that
prohibit the reverse rotation of the Inverter.
H Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit (n006)

n006
Setting
range
Reverse Rotation-prohibit
Selection
0, 1
Register
0106 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Accept
Not accept
5-27
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-9
Selecting the Stopping Method

This parameter is used to specify the stopping method when the STOP command is
input.
The Inverter either decelerates or coasts to a stop according to the stopping method
selection.
H Selecting the Stopping Method (n005)

n005
Setting
range
Stopping Method Selection
Register
0105 Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Frequency deceleration stop (See notes 1 and 2.)
Free running (coasts to stop) (See note 3.)
Note 1. The Inverter will decelerate to stop according to the setting in n020 for deceleration time 1
if any of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input is not set to 11 for
acceleration/deceleration time selection. If any one of the n050 through n056 multi-function input parameters is set to acceleration/deceleration time selection, the Inverter will
decelerate to stop according to the selected setting of deceleration time when the STOP
command is input.
Note 2. If the RUN signal is input again during a deceleration stop, deceleration will be stopped at
the point of the input and operation will accelerate to the frequency reference.
Note 3. Do not input a RUN signal for a free-running stop if the motors rotation speed is not sufficient slowed. If a RUN signal is input under these conditions, a main circuit overvoltage
(OV) or overcurrent (OC) will be detected. To restart a free running motor, set a speed
search command in one of the multi-function inputs 1 to 7 (n50 to n56) and use the speed
search to detect the speed of the free running motor, and then accelerate smoothly.
5-28
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-10 Multi-function I/O
5-10-1 Multi-function Input
The 3G3MV incorporates seven multi-function input terminals (S1 through S7). Inputs
into these terminals have a variety of functions according to the application.
H Multi-function Input (n050 through n056)

n050
Setting
range
n051
Setting
range
n052
Setting
range
n053
Setting
range
n054
Setting
range
n055
Setting
range
n056
Setting
range
Multi-function Input 1 (S1)
Register
0132 Hex
1 to 27 (For 26, see note.)
Unit of
setting
Register
0133 Hex
Unit of
setting
Register
0134 Hex
Unit of
setting
Register
0135 Hex
Unit of
setting
Register
0136 Hex
Unit of
setting
Register
0137 Hex
Unit of
setting
Register
0138 Hex
1 to 27, 34, and 35

(For 26, see note.)
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
10
Note Set value 26 is available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
5-29
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Set Values
Value
0
Function
Description
Forward/Reverse rotation 3-wire sequence (to be set in n052 only)
command
By setting n052 to 0, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored
and the following settings are forcibly made.
S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)
S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5-30
Forward/Stop
Reverse/Stop
External fault (NO)
External fault (NC)
Fault reset
Multi-step speed
reference 1
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Multi-step speed
reference 4
Inching frequency
command
Acceleration/Deceleration
time selection
External base block
command (NO)
External base block
command (NC)
Search command
(Searching starts from
maximum frequency)
Search command
preset frequency)
Acceleration/Deceleration-prohibit command
Local or remote selection
S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command

(OFF: Forward; ON: Reverse)
Forward rotation command in 2-wire sequence
Reverse rotation command (2-wire sequence)
ON: External fault (EFj detection: j is a terminal number)
OFF: External fault (EFj detection: j is a terminal number)
ON: Fault reset (disabled while RUN command is input)
Signals to select frequency references 2 through 16.
Note Refer to 5-6-4
5 6 4 Setting the Frequency References through Key
Sequences for the relationship between multi-step speed references 1 through 4 and frequency references 1 through 16.
Note Any multi-step speed reference not set is regarded as turnedOFF input.
ON: Inching frequency command (taking precedence over the
multi-step speed reference)
ON: Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are selected.
ON: Output turned OFF (while motor coasting to a stop and bb
flashing)
OFF: Output turned OFF (with motor free running and bb
flashing)
ON: Speed search (Searching starts from n011)
ON: Speed search
ON: Acceleration/Deceleration is on hold (running at parameter

frequency)
ON: Local mode (operated with the Digital Operator)
Note After this setting is made, mode selection with the Digital Operator is not possible.
Communications/Remote ON: RS-422/485 communications input is enabled.
selection
Communications RUN command (0001 Hex) is enabled together
with frequency reference (0002 Hex).
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Value
19
Function
Emergency stop fault
(NO)
20
Emergency stop warning

(NO)
21
Emergency stop fault

(NC)
22
Emergency stop warning

(NC)
23
PID control cancel
24
PID control integral reset
25
PID control integral hold
26 (See
note.)
Inverter overheating
warning oH3
Over-heat pre-alarm oH3
27
Accel/decel time select 2
Description
The Inverter stops according to the setting in n005 for interruption
mode selection with the emergency stop input turned ON.
n005 set to 0: Decelerates to stop at deceleration time 2 set in
n022. n005 set to 1: Coasts to a stop.
Note NO: Emergency stop with the contact closed.
NC: Emergency stop with the contact opened.
Note Fault: Fault output is ON and reset with RESET input.
Warning: Warning output is ON and automatically restored
when emergency stop input is cleared (no reset required).
required)
Note STP is displayed (lit with fault input ON and flashes with alarm
input ON)
ON: PID control is disabled.
PID control set is disabled and the Inverter is in normal operation
according to the n003 and n004 settings.
ON: Integral value is reset (cleared).
The integral value as a result of PID operation is cleared when the
Inverter is in PID control. The input status of the Inverter continues
with the integral function disabled.
ON: Integral value is kept on hold (fixed).
The integral value as a result of PID operation is kept on hold with
only the integral operation function disabled when the Inverter is in
PID control.
ON: oH3 display (at the Operator); Inverter overheating warning
output ON (multi-function output).
Operation continues during input. When the input turns OFF, the
Operator display and multi-function output are cleared.
Use for functions such as displaying the status of external thermal
relays.
See Section 5-7
Note Set value 26 is available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
5-31
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Value
34
Function
Up or down command
Description
Up or down command (set in n056 only)
By setting n056 to 0, the set value in n055 is ignored and the
following settings are forcibly made.
S6: Up command
35
Self-diagnostic test
S7: Down command

Acceleration
Deceleration
Hold
Hold
S6 terminal
(Up command)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
S7 terminal
(Down command)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Note It is impossible to set the up or down command and multi-step

speed references 1 through 4 together.
Note To keep the frequency reference that has been adjusted with
the Up or Down command after the Inverter is turned OFF, set
n100 (Up/Down frequency memory) to 1.
ON: RS-422/485 communications self-diagnostic test (set in n056
only)
The communications function is tested by connecting the
transmission and reception terminals together and checking that
the data received is the same as the transmission data.
H Operation in 2-wire Sequence (Set Value: 1, 2)

The Inverter operates in 2-wire sequence by setting a multi-function input selection to 1 (forward/reverse) or 2 (reverse/stop).
The following diagram shows a wiring example of the terminals in 2-wire sequence.
Forward-rotation
switch
Reverse-rotation
switch
Forward/Stop
(Forward rotation with the forward-rotation switch closed)
Reverse/Stop
(Reverse rotation with the reverse-rotation switch closed)
j: 1 to 7
H Operation in 3-wire Sequence (n052 = 0)

The Inverter operates in 3-wire sequence by setting n052 for multi-function input 3 to 0.
Only n052 can be set to 0 (3-wire sequence). By making this setting, the set values in n050 and n051
are ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.
S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)
S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)
S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command (OFF: Forward; ON: Reverse)
5-32
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
The following diagram shows a wiring example of the terminals in 3-wire sequence.
Stop
switch
(NC)
RUN
switch
(NO)
RUN input (Operates with the RUN switch closed)
Direction switch
Stop input (Stops with the stop switch opened)

Forward/Reverse rotation command (Forward with the Direction
switch opened, Reverse with the Direction switch closed)
H External Base Block Command (Set Value: 12, 13)

When an SPST-NO (set value: 12) or SPST-NC (set value: 13) input is received, Inverter outputs are
shut OFF. Use these inputs in the following cases to stop Inverter outputs.
For switching the motor to free running status when applying an external brake.
For stopping Inverter outputs before disconnecting motor wiring when changing the motor from an
Inverter to a commercial power supply.
Note The external base block only shuts Off the Inverters output frequency, and the Inverters internal
frequency continues to be calculated as usual. Therefore, if the external base block is cleared
when the frequency is not zero, the frequency calculated at that point will be output. Because of
this, if the baseblock is cleared during deceleration while the motor is free running, a large discrepancy between the motor speed at that moment and the Inverter output frequency may result
in a main circuit overvoltage (OV) or overcurrent (OC).
5-33
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
H Speed Search (Set Value: 14, 15)
The speed search function is provided for smooth restarting without stopping a free running motor.
Use it when switching the motor from a commercial power supply operation to Inverter operation,
when starting with the Inverter a motor turned by external force, and so on.
The speed search function searches for the present motor frequency, from high frequency to low.
When the motors rotation speed is detected, it is accelerated from that frequency to the frequency
reference according to the acceleration/deceleration time setting.
ON
Forward (reverse) RUN command
Speed search command
ON
0.5 s min.
High-speed frequency or
set frequency (frequency
reference)
n101: Deceleration time
n102: Speed search operating level
Minimum base block time (0.5 s)
Speed search operation
Note For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only, the speed search function can be adjusted by setting parameters n101 (speed search deceleration time) and n102 (speed search operating level). If the speed
search cannot be executed properly using the default setting, lengthen the deceleration time or
lower the operating level. To reduce the speed search time, check with the application while either
shortening the deceleration time or raising the operating level.
n101
Setting
range
n102
Setting
range
5-34
Speed Search Deceleration Time
Register
0165 Hex
0.0 to 10.0
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Speed Search Operating Level
Register
0166 Hex
0 to 200
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
2.0
150
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
For n101, set the origin search deceleration time to the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the
maximum frequency.
If 0 is set for the origin search deceleration time, operation will be carried out at the default setting of 2.0
seconds.
For n102, set the operating level as a percentage, with the Inverters rated input taken as 100%. If the
Inverters output current drops below the level of the Inverters output current, the speed search will be
completed and acceleration will be resumed.
5-10-2 Multi-function Output

The 3G3MV incorporates four multi-function output terminals: two multi-function contact
outputs (MA and MB) and two multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1 and P2).
Output from these terminals has a variety of functions according to the application.
H Selecting the Multi-function Output (n050 through n056)

n057
Setting
range
n058
Setting
range
n059
Setting
range
Multi-function Output 1 (MA/MB

and MC)
0 to 7, 10 to 21 (See note.)
Register
0139 Hex
Unit of
setting
Multi-function Output 2 (P1 and

PC)
0 to 7, 10 to 21 (see note.)
Register
013A Hex
Unit of
setting
Multi-function Output 3 (P2 and

PC)
0 to 7, 10 to 21 (See note.)
Register
013B Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Note Set values 20 and 21 are available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
Function
Fault output
Operation in progress
Frequency agree
3
4
Idling
Frequency detection 1
Overtorque being
monitored (NO-contact
output)
Overtorque being
monitored (NC-contact
output)
Description
ON: Fault output (with protective function working)
ON: During RUN (with RUN command input or inverter output)
ON: Frequency agree (output frequency agrees with frequency
reference)
ON: Zero speed (at less than min. output frequency)
ON: Output frequency frequency detection level (n095)
ON: Output frequency frequency detection level (n095)
Output if any of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.
Overtorque detection function selection 1 (n096)
Overtorque detection function selection 2 (n097)
O
Overtorque
detection
t
d t ti level
l
l (n098)
( 098)
Overtorque detection time (n099)
Note NO contact: ON with overtorque being detected; NC contact:
OFF with overtorque being detected
5-35
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Value
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Function
Not used.
Warning output
Base block in progress
RUN mode
Inverter ready
Fault retry
UV in progress
17
18
Rotating in reverse
direction
Speed search in progress
Communications output
19
PID feedback loss
20 (See
note 2.)
Frequency reference loss
21 (See
note 2.)
pre-alarm oH3
Description
--ON: Warning being detected (Nonfatal error being detected)
ON: Base block in progress (in operation with output turned OFF)
ON: Local mode (with the Digital Operator)
ON: Inverter ready to operate (with no fault detected)
ON: Fault retry (Inverter resetting with fault retry (n082) not set to 0)
ON: Undervoltage being monitored (main circuit undervoltage UV1
detected)
ON: Rotating in reverse direction
ON: Speed search in progress
ON: Communications output (turns ON/OFF according to 0009 Hex
set from communications. Communications setting = ON)
ON: PID feedback being lost (set detection method in n136, n137,
n138)
ON: Frequency reference lost. (When the frequency reference loss
detection (n064) is enabled, and the frequency reference selection
(n004) is set for analog input or pulse train input.)
ON: Inverter overheating warning
ON while the Inverter overheating warning signal is being input
(while oH3 is flashing).
Note 1. Use during RUN (set value: 1) or zero speed (set value: 3) for the timing for stopping
the motor using a brake. To specify a precise stop timing, set frequency detection 1 (set
value: 4) or frequency detection 2 (set value: 5), and set the frequency detection level
(n095).
Note 2. Set values 20 (frequency reference loss) and 21 (Inverter overheating warning oH3) are
available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
5-36
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse Monitor Output

The 3G3MV Inverter incorporates multi-function analog output terminals (AM and AC).
A parameter setting makes it possible to output pulse monitor signals from these terminals. Make the necessary settings in these terminals according to the application.
5-11-1 Setting the Multi-function Analog Output (n065 through

n067)
By setting n065 for multi-function analog output type selection to 0 for analog voltage output, analog
monitoring is possible through the multi-function analog output terminals.
A monitoring item is set in n066 (multi-function analog output selection). Six items including the output
frequency and current are available.
Set the analog output characteristics in n067 (multi-function analog output gain).
n065
Setting
range
Multi-function Analog Output Type Register

Selection
0, 1
Unit of
setting
0141 Hex
1
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
n066
Setting
range
Description
Analog voltage output (with monitoring item set in n066)
Pulse train output (according to output frequency set in n150)
Multi-function Analog Output
Register
0142 Hex
0 to 6
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
5-37
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Output frequency (Reference: 10-V output at max. frequency)
Output current (Reference: 10-V output at rated output current)
Main circuit DC voltage (Reference: 10-V output at 400 V DC for 200-V models and 800 V
DC for 400-V models)
Vector operation torque monitor (Reference: 10-V output at rated motor torque)
Output power (Reference: 10-V output at power equivalent to max. applicable motor capacity
and 0-V output during regenerative operation).
Output voltage (Reference: 10-V output at 200 V AC for 200-V models and 400 V AC for
400-V models)
0-10 VDC proportional to frequency reference.
Note Output power cannot be monitored in vector control mode.

n067
Setting
range
Multi-function Analog Output Gain Register
0143 Hex
0.00 to 2.00
0.01
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
1.00
Note 1. Refer to the above information on the set values in n066 and set the multiplication rate
based on the reference value. For example, if 5-V output is desired at maximum output
frequency (with n066 set to 0), set n067 to 0.50.
Note 2. The multi-function analog output terminals (AM and AC) have a maximum output of 10 V.
5-11-2 Setting the Pulse Monitor Output (n065 and n150)

By setting n065 for multi-function analog output type selection to 1 for pulse train output, monitoring
pulse output frequency signals is possible through the multi-function analog output terminals.
The relationship between the output frequency and pulse train output frequency is set in n150 for multi-function analog output, pulse train frequency selection.
n065
Setting
range
5-38
Multi-function Analog Output Type Register

Selection
0, 1
Unit of
setting
0141 Hex
1
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Chapter 5
Basic Operation
Set Values
Value
Description
Analog voltage output (with monitoring item set in n066)
Pulse train output (according to output frequency set in n150)
0
1
n150
Setting
range
Multi-function Analog Output,

Pulse Train Frequency Selection
0, 1, 6, 12, 24, 36, and 40-45
Register
0197 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Note n150: Pulse Monitor Output Frequency Output/Reference.
Set Values
Value
0
1
6
12
24
36
40
41
42
43
44
45
Description
1,440 Hz at max. frequency (A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than
the maximum frequency)
1x output frequency
6x output frequency
12x output frequency
1140 Hz/Max. frequency (n011)
1F: Frequency reference x1
Note The pulse train voltage is 10 V at high level and 0 V at low level at a duty rate of 50%.
5-39
6
Chapter 6
Advanced Operation
6-1
Precise Vector Control Settings and

Adjustments
6-2 Energy-saving Control
6-3 PID Control
6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency
6-5 DC Injection Braking Function
6-6 Stall Prevention Function
6-7 Overtorque Detection Function
6-8 Torque Compensation Function
6-9 Slip Compensation Function
6-10 Other Functions
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
This chapter provides information on the use of advanced functions of the Inverter for
operation.
Refer to this chapter to use the various advanced functions, such as precise vector control setting, energy-saving control, PID control, carrier frequency setting, DC injection
braking, stall prevention, overtorque detection, torque compensation, and slip compensation.
6-1
Precise Vector Control Settings and Adjustments
6-1-1 Precise Vector Control Settings

In addition to the settings described in 5-2 Operation in Vector Control, check the motor test report and
precise motor constants and make the following settings in order to make full use of the Inverter in
vector control.
H Setting the Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance (n107)

Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance or phase-to-neutral resistance of the motor
at 50C.
Obtain from the manufacturer of each motor the test report of the motor or equivalent datasheet
including precise specifications of the motor. Use the the applicable formula from those listed in the
following and calculate the phase-to-neutral resistance at 50C from the insulation class and phaseto-phase resistance of the motor described in the test report.
Insulation class E: Phase-to-phase resistance at 75C () x 0.92 x 1/2
Insulation class B: Phase-to-phase resistance at 75C () x 0.92 x 1/2
Insulation class F: Phase-to-phase resistance at 115C () x 0.87 x 1/2
n107
Setting
range
Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance Register

0.000 to 65.50 ()
Unit of
setting
016B Hex
Changes during
operation
See note 1 Default setting
No
See note
2
Note 1. The value will be set in 0.001- increments if the resistance is less than 10 and 0.01-
increments if the resistance is 10 or over.
Note 2. The default setting for this parameter is the standard phase-to-neutral resistance of the maximum applicable motor.
H Setting the Motor Leakage Inductance (n108)

Set the motor leakage inductance in 1-mH increments.
Motor leakage inductance is a magnetic field that is leaking externally or consumed as core loss, and
is not used for torque generation.
To insert an AC reactor for surge suppression into the output side of the Inverter, set this parameter to
the motor leakage inductance added with the inductance of the AC reactor.
The Inverter fully functions in vector control with the default setting for motor leakage inductance.
Therefore, set this parameter only if the motor leakage inductance is known.
n108
Setting
range
6-2
Motor Leakage Inductance
Register
0.000 to 655.0 (mH)
Unit of
setting
016C Hex
Changes during
operation
See note 1 Default setting
No
See note
2
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Note 1. The value will be set in 0.01-mH increments if the resistance is less than 100 mH and 0.1-mH
increments if the resistance is 100 mH or over.
Note 2. The default setting for this parameter is the standard leakage inductance of the maximum
applicable motor.
6-1-2 Adjusting Output Torque in Vector Control

The Inverter controls the output torque of the motor according to the required load torque in vector
control. Normally, no special adjustments are required. Adjust the output torque if the maximum
torque of the motor is unavailable or improvements are required in the output torque and response in a
low-speed range.
H Adjusting the Torque Compensation Limit (n109)

Adjust the set value in n109 (torque compensation limit) if the maximum torque of the motor is insufficient or to limit the output torque to a certain degree while the motor is driven by the Inverter in vector
control.
Set the torque compensation limit in percentage based on the rated output current of the Inverter as
100%.
Compensating Torque Insufficiency

Set n109 to a larger value if the maximum torque of the motor is insufficient.
Set the value in 5% increments while checking the operation of the Inverter and motor.
Check that no overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or
consider the use of an Inverter model or motor with a higher capacity.
Limiting Output Torque

Set n109 to a smaller value if the fluctuation of the output torque is large and heavy shock is imposed
on the load, or excessive output torque is not required.
Set the value according to the condition of the load.
n109
Setting
range
Torque Compensation Limit
Register
016D Hex
0 to 250 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
150
Note 1. The Inverter in torque compensation control limits the torque at a current 1.5 times larger than
the set value.
Note 2. This parameter is enabled only when the Inverter is in vector control.
H Adjusting the Torque and Response through the V/f Pattern (n011
through n017)
The Inverter in vector control uses the V/f pattern as the reference value of the output voltage. Therefore, by adjusting the V/f pattern the output torque and response are adjusted.
If the application requires high torque, adjust the V/f pattern so that the output voltage at the required
frequency will be high. Furthermore, energy-saving effects can be expected by decreasing the output
voltage values in the frequency ranges where high torque is not required.
n011
Setting
range
Maximum Frequency (FMAX)
Register
010B Hex
50.0 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
60.0
6-3
Advanced Operation
n012
Setting
range
n013
Setting
range
n014
Setting
range
n015
Setting
range
n016
Setting
range
n017
Setting
range
Chapter 6
Maximum Voltage (VMAX)
Register
010C Hex
0.1 to 255.0 (0.1 to 510.0) (V)
Unit of
setting
0.1 V
Maximum Voltage Frequency (FA)
Register
010D Hex
0.2 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Middle Output Frequency (FB)
Register
010E Hex
0.1 to 399.9 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Middle Output Frequency Voltage

(VC)
0.1 to 255.0 (0.1 to 510.0) (V)
Register
010F Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 V

(FMIN)
0.1 to 10.0 (Hz)
Register
0110 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz

Voltage (VMIN)
0.1 to 50.0 (0.1 to 100.0) (V)
Register
0111 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 V
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
200.0
(400.0)
60.0
1.5
11.0
(22.0)
1.5
4.3 (8.6)
Note Figures in brackets are for 400-V Inverter models.

Output voltage (V)
Note
1. Set the parameters so that the following condition will be satisfied.

n016 n014 < n013 n011
Note
2. The value set in n015 will be

ignored if parameters n016 and
n014 are the same in value.
Frequency (Hz)
The vertical-axis load or the load with high viscous friction may require high torque at low speed. If the
torque is insufficient at low speed, increase the voltage in the low-speed range by 1 V, provided that no
overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or consider the
use of an Inverter model or motor with a higher capacity.
The required torque of fan or pump control increases in proportion to the square of the speed. By setting a quadratic V/f pattern to increase the voltage in the low-speed range, the power consumption of
the system will increase.
6-4
Advanced Operation
6-2
Chapter 6
Energy-saving Control
The energy-saving control function automatically saves unnecessary power that is uselessly consumed while the load is light.
The Inverter in energy-saving control estimates the capacity of the load from the motor
current and controls the output voltage of the Inverter when the load is light so that only
the power required is provided to the motor.
Energy-saving control is suitable for loads with little fluctuation. It is not suitable for control where responses of less than 50 ms are required.
The longer the operation time of the Inverter in energy-saving control of a light load is,
the more energy is saved. If the load exceeds 70% of the rated motor torque, only some
energy may be saved.
This control is available to general-purpose motor and Inverter-dedicated motors but not
applicable to special motors such as spindle motors or underwater motors.
Energy-saving control is possible in V/f control mode only and does not operate in vector
control mode.
The following description provides details of the operation and adjustment of the Inverter
in energy-saving control.
6-2-1 Energy-saving Control Operation

The Inverter operates in energy-saving control as described below.
Acceleration
The Inverter accelerates normally and is not in energy-saving control.
Constant Speed
1. When the Inverter reaches the reference frequency, the Inverter operates in energy-saving control.
2. An ideal output voltage is calculated from the internal status of the Inverter and energy-saving control coefficient K2 in n140.
3. The Inverter changes the output voltage to the calculated voltage.
4. The Inverter goes into probe operation to find the point where output power is at the minimum.
Probe operation: A control method to find the point where the power is at the minimum while changing the voltage according to the probe operation control voltage step set in n145 and n146.
6-5
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Deceleration
The Inverter decelerates normally and is not in energy-saving control.
Power
consumption
As shown in the graph, the voltage to
operate the motor most efficiently varies with
the motor load condition. The Inverter in
energy-saving control adjusts the output
voltage by using the ideal calculated value
so that the actual output power will be
minimum.
Load rate: 100%
Load rate: 50%

Motor voltage
6-2-2 Performing Energy-saving Settings

n139
Setting
range
Energy-saving Control Selection
Register
018B Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
0
1
Energy-saving control disabled

Energy-saving control enabled
Note 1. Set n139 to 1 to enable energy-saving control.

Note 2. Energy-saving control is enabled within a frequency range from 15 to 120 Hz and disabled if
the frequency exceeds 120 Hz.
n158
Setting
range
Motor Code
Register
019E Hex
0 to 70
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note
Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.
Set Values
The motor code is used for automatically setting the energy-saving constant in n140.
By setting the motor code, the value in n140 (energy-saving control coefficient K2) will change automatically. To adjust energy-saving control coefficient K2, set the motor code in advance.
Select the motor code from the following table based on the power supply voltage of the Inverter and
the capacity of the motor.
6-6
Advanced Operation
Motor code
Power supply voltage

200 V AC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
400 V AC
n140
Setting
range
Chapter 6
Motor capacity
0.1 kW
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
3.7 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
0.1 kW
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
3.7 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
Energy-saving Control Coefficient Register

K2
0.0 to 6,550
Unit of
setting
018C Hex
0.1
Energy-saving control
coefficient K2 (n140)
481.7
356.9
288.2
223.7
169.4
156.8
156.8
122.9
122.9
94.8
72.7
963.5
713.8
576.4
447.4
338.8
313.6
245.8
245.8
245.8
189.5
145.4
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note
1
Note 1. The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.
Note 2. The constant automatically changes according to the motor code in n158. For the fine-tuning
of this parameter, set the motor code in advance.
Set Values
When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter is set to the primary level of energy-saving control by this parameter.
Motor constants vary with the motor manufacturer. Therefore, the fine-tuning of the parameter is
required to find the ideal value. Fine-tune the parameter while the Inverter is operating at constant
frequency so that the output power will be minimum.
n143
Setting
range
Power Averaging Time
Register
018F Hex
1 to 200
Unit of
setting
1 (24 ms)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
1
6-7
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
Set n143 to the time required to calculate the average of power used in energy-saving control.
Power averaging time (ms) = Set value in n143 x 24 (ms)
Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.
The Inverter averages the power for the set time for energy-saving control.
The value set in n143 is used for probe operation. The Inverter in probe operation changes the voltage
at intervals set in this parameter.
Increase the set value if the power fluctuates frequently and the Inverter cannot perform stable energy
control.
n141
Setting
range
n142
Setting
range
Energy-saving Voltage Lower

Limit at 60-Hz Output
0 to 120 (%)
Register
018D Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Energy-saving Voltage Lower

0 to 25 (%)
Register
018E Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
50
12
Set Values
When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter is set to the primary level of energy-saving control by n140. Parameter n141
and parameter n142 prevent the output voltage of the Inverter from dropping excessively so that the
motor will not stall or stop at that time.
Set the lower limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage
as 100%.
Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed. If the motor stalls or stops because the internal constants of the motor are special, increase the set values by approximately 5% to 10%.
Output voltage
lower limit (%)
Output frequency (Hz)
n159
Setting
range
n160
Setting
range
6-8
Energy-saving Voltage Upper

0 to 120 (%)
Register
019F Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Energy-saving Upper Limit

Voltage at 6-Hz Output
0 to 25 (%)
Register
01A0 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
120
16
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
These parameters prevent the motor from over excitation due to voltage changes during energy-saving control.
Set the upper limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage
as 100%.
Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.
Output voltage
upper limit (%)
Output frequency (Hz)
n144
Setting
range
Probe Operation Voltage Limit
Register
0190 Hex
0 to 100 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter will be set to the primary level of energy-saving control by n140 (energy-saving
constant K2). Then the Inverter will be set to the secondary level (i.e., probe operation) for more efficient, energy-saving control. Set the control voltage range of the Inverter in probe operation in parameter n144.
Set the upper limit of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as
100%. Normally set the value to approximately 10%.
No probe operation will be available if the value is set to 0.
n145
Setting
range
n146
Setting
range
Probe Operation Control Voltage

Step at 100%
0.1 to 10.0 (%)
Register
0191 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1%
Probe Operation Control Voltage

Step at 5%
0.1 to 10.0 (%)
Register
0192 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.5
0.2
6-9
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
Set the range of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.
If the fluctuation of speed in probe operation is large, decrease the set value. If the response of the
Inverter in probe operation is slow, increase the set value.
Control voltage step (%)
Inverter output voltage (%)
n161
Setting
range
Power Detection Width for Probe

Operation Switching
0 to 100 (%)
Register
01A1 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
10
Set Values
Set this parameter to the detection width of power that sets the Inverter to probe operation. When the
fluctuation of power is within the detection width, the Inverter will be in probe operation.
Set the width in percentage based on the power to be detected as 100%.
The Inverter will operate with a power detection width of 10% if the value is set to 0.
n162
Setting
range
Power Detection Filter Constant
Register
01A2 Hex
0 to 255
Unit of
setting
1 (4 ms)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
5
Set Values
Set this parameter to the filter time constant of the power detection block of the Inverter operating in
probe operation.
Filter time constant (ms) = Set value in n162 x 4 (ms)
The Inverter will operate with a time constant of 20 ms if the value is set to 0.
6-10
Advanced Operation
6-3
Chapter 6
PID Control
The PID control function is a control system that matches a feedback value (i.e., a detected value) to the set target value.
Proportional control, integral control, and derivative control in combination are available
to machinery systems involving redundancy time in control operation. The PID control
function of the 3G3MV Inverter is not suitable to the control of systems that require a
response of 50 ms or quicker, however.
The following description provides the applications and operation of PID control
together with required parameter settings and adjustments.
6-3-1 PID Control Applications

The following table provides application examples of the Inverter in PID control.
Application
Speed control
Pressure control
Flow rate control
Temperature control
Control
Sensor used (example)
The speed data of the machinery system is fed back Tachogenerator
so that the operating speed of the machinery
system will coincide with the target value.
The speed data of another machinery system is
input as a target value and the actual operating
speed of the machinery is fed back for synchronous
control.
Data on pressure is fed back for constant pressure
control.
Data on the flow rate of liquid is fed back for precise
flow control.
Data on temperature is fed back for temperature
control using fan operation.
Pressure sensor
Flow sensor
Thermocouple
Thermistor
6-11
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-3-2 PID Control Operation

To simply explain the operation of proportional control, integral control, and derivative control, the following graph is used to show that the output frequency changes while the deviation (i.e., the difference
between the target value and feedback value) is constant.
Deviation
Time
Control
value
PID control
Derivative
(D) control
Integral
(I) control
Proportional (P)
control
Time
Proportional (P) Control: The output is in proportion to the deviation. The deviation cannot be set to 0
with proportional control only.
Integral (I) Control: The output is the integral value of the deviation. This control method makes the
feedback value coincide with the target value effectively but cannot catch up with a rapid change in
deviation.
Derivative (D) Control: The output is the derivative value of the deviation. This control method quickly
responds to a rapid change in deviation.
PID Control: By combining the merits of the above control functions, ideal control is possible.
6-3-3 Types of PID Control

Two types of PID control are available to the 3G3MV Inverter. Normally, measured-value derivative
PID control is used.
Measured-value Derivative PID Control
In this control, the feedback derivative value is used. The Inverter normally uses this control method.
The response will be comparatively slow if the target value changes because the feedback derivative
value is used. The stable control of the target is, however, possible.
Target of
control
Target value
Detected value (Feedback value)
6-12
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Basic PID Control

This is the basic control method. The response will be quick if the target value changes because the
deviation derivative value is used. If the target value changes rapidly, however, the control value of the
derivative control block will be large. As a result, overshooting or undershooting may result.
Target of
control
Target value
Detected value (Feedback value)
Furthermore, 3G3MV Inverter can add the frequency reference to the operation result of the PID control block.
If the target of control is motor speed, by adding the frequency reference, motor speed control with
high-speed response will be possible.
Do not add the frequency reference if the target of control is temperature or pressure.
6-13
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-3-4 Block Diagram of PID Control

The following diagram shows the PID control block of the 3G3MV Inverter.
Limit
Max. frequency: 100%
Proportional (P) gain
Target
value
Integral time (I)
Integral (I) upper limit
Multi-function input
Integral hold input
0 (zero)
PID primary
delay time
Integral
hold value
Multi-function input
Integral reset input
Derivative time (D)
0 (zero)
PID offset
adjustment
Feedback value Limit

adjustment gain
Feedback
value
PID output gain
Limit
Max. frequency: 100%
Derivative time (D)
Limit
Limit
PID control selection
Inverter output
frequency
6-14
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-3-5 Input Selection of PID Control Target Value and Detection

Value
The target value and detected value (feedback value) of PID control are set according to n004 for frequency reference selection, n008 for local mode frequency reference selection, and n164 PID feedback input block selection as shown in the following diagram.
Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other. Setting
details are provided from the next page onward.
H Input Selection of PID Control Target Value

Multi-step speed
reference
Local/Remote
FREQUENCY adjuster of the
Digital Operator
Target value
Frequency reference 1 (n024)

External terminal (0 to 10 V)
External terminal (4 to 20 mA)
Pulse train input
Communications frequency reference

Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)
Multi-function analog input (4 to 20 mA)
Inching frequency (n032)

FREQUENCY adjuster of the
Digital Operator
H Input Selection of PID Control Detection Value
External terminal (0 to 10 V)
Feedback value

Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)
Multi-function analog input (4 to 20 mA)
Pulse train input
6-15
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-3-6 PID Control Settings

n128
Setting
range
PID Control Selection
Register
0180 Hex
0 to 8
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
PID control
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Description
Derivative control
Addition of
method
frequency reference
----Deviation integrated
No
Feedback value integrated No
Deviation integrated
Yes
Feedback value integrated Yes
No
Feedback value integrated No
Yes
Feedback value integrated Yes
Positive or negative
characteristics
--Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Note 1. Normally select feedback-value integral PID control as the derivative control method.
Note 2. Add the frequency reference if the target of control is motor speed and do not add the frequency reference if the target of control is temperature or pressure.
Note 3. Set positive or negative characteristics according to the characteristics of the detector. If the
feedback value is decreased with the output frequency increased, set negative characteristics.
n129
Setting
range
Feedback Value Adjustment Gain
Register
0181 Hex
0.00 to 10.00
Unit of
setting
0.01
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
1.00
Set Values
Set the multiplication rate of the feedback value.
This parameter adjusts the feedback value so that the input level of the input device, such as a sensor,
will coincide with the input level of the target value.
For example, if the target value of 1,000 rpm is input as 10 V and the feedback value at 1,000 rpm is
5 V, the feedback value will be doubled.
n130
Setting
range
n131
Setting
range
6-16
Proportional (P) Gain
Register
0182 Hex
0.0 to 25.0
Unit of
setting
0.1
Integral (I) Time
Register
0182 Hex
0.0 to 360.0 (s)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
1.0
1.0
Advanced Operation
n132
Setting
range
Chapter 6
Derivative (D) Time
Register
0182 Hex
0.0 to 2.50 (s)
Unit of
setting
0.01 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0.00
Set Values
While the mechanical load is in actual operation, adjust the values so that the best response will be
returned from the load. Refer to 6-3-7 PID Adjustments.
If n130 (proportional gain) is set to 0.0, PID control will be disabled. Not only proportional control but
also all PID control will be disabled.
If n131 (integral time) is set to 0.0, integral control will be disabled.
If n132 (derivative time) is set to 0.0, derivative control will be disabled.
n133
Setting
range
PID Offset Adjustment
Register
0185 Hex
--100 to 100 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0
Set Values
This parameter is for the offset adjustment of all PID control.
Adjust the parameter so that the output frequency of the Inverter will be 0 when the target value and
feedback value are both set to 0.
n134
Setting
range
Integral (I) Upper Limit
Register
0186 Hex
0 to 100 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
100
Set Values
Set this parameter to the upper limit of integral control output.
Set the value in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.
The integral upper limit is set so that the output frequency will not be excessively high when the deviation is large.
n135
Setting
range
PID Primary Delay Time
Register
0187 Hex
0.0 to 10.0 (s)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0.0
Set Values
Set this parameter to the primary delay time constant for the frequency reference after PID control.
If load is a mechanical one with high viscous friction or low rigidity, the load may resonate. If that happens, set a value larger than the resonant frequency of the load so that the load will not resonate, even
though the response will be slower.
n136
Setting
range
Feedback Loss Detection

Selection
0 to 2
Register
0188 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
6-17
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
Value
Description
Feedback loss detection disabled
Feedback loss detection enabled (Nonfatal error: FbL warning)
Feedback loss detection enabled (Fatal error: FbL error)
0
1
2
Note 1. Set the method of detecting loss of the feedback as a detected value for PID control.
Note 2. If the detection level set in n137 or lower is detected for the set time in n138, the result will be
determined as feedback loss.
n137
Setting
range
n138
Setting
range
Feedback Loss Detection Level
Register
0189 Hex
0 to 100 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Feedback Loss Detection Time
Register
018A Hex
0.0 to 25.5 (s)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
1.0
Set Values
These parameters are reference values for detecting loss of feedback for PID control.
Set n137 to the feedback level in percentage based on the feedback level at maximum frequency as
100%.
Set n138 in 0.1-s increments for the permissible continuous period of the feedback signal level that is
the same as or less than the feedback level set in n137.
n163
Setting
range
PID Output Gain
Register
01A3 Hex
0.0 to 25.0
Unit of
setting
0.1
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
1.0
Set Values
Set this parameter to a rate by which PID control value is multiplied for PID control.
This parameter is used for the adjustment of the PID control value to be added with the frequency
reference.
n164
Setting
range
PID Feedback Input Block

Selection
0 to 5
Register
01A4 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6-18
Description
Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 10-V voltage input is enabled. (See note 1.)
Frequency reference control terminal for 4- to 20-mA current input is enabled. (See note 2.)
Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 20-mA current input is enabled. (See note 2.)
Multi-function analog voltage (0- to 10-V) input is enabled.
Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.
Multi-function analog current (4- to 20-mA) input is enabled.
Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled. (See note 3.)
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Note 1. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is reached with 10-V input.

Note 2. The maximum frequency (FMAX) is reached with 20-mA input. The SW2 on the control PCB
must be switches from V to I.
Note 3. Set n149 for the pulse train input scale to the pulse train frequency that is equivalent to the
maximum frequency (FMAX).
Note 4. Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other.
6-3-7 PID Adjustments

H PID Adjustments with Step Response Method
The following describes how to adjust each parameter of PID control by monitoring the step response
of the target of control.
1. Measurement of Step Response Waveform
Take the following steps to measure the step response waveform of the target of control.
a) Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal operation.
b) Set n128 to 0 so that the Inverter will not perform PID control.
c) Minimize the acceleration time and input the step frequency reference.
d) Measure the response waveform of the feedback.
Note Measure the response waveform so that the timing of the step input will be known.
2. Calculation of PID Parameters
S Draw a tangent line that comes into contact with the steepest inclination point of the response
waveform.
S Measurement of R
Measure the gradient of the tangent line provided that the set point is 1.
S Measurement of L
Measure the required time (seconds) between the origin and the point of intersection of the tangent line and time axis.
6-19
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
S Measurement of T
Measure the required time (seconds) between the point of intersection of the tangent line and time
axis and the point of intersection of the tangent line and set point line.
Response
Target value
Time
S PID Parameter
The following PID parameters are calculated from the R, L, and T of intersection of the tangent line
and set point line as general rules.
Control
P control
PI control
PID control
Proportional (P) gain

(n130)
0.3/RL
0.35/RL
0.6/RL
Integral (I) time (n131)

--1.2T
T
Derivative (D) time (n132)

----0.5L
Note 1. Obtain PID parameter values from the above method, set the PID parameters, and tune in the
PID parameter values precisely.
Note 2. PID parameter values obtained from the above method may not be optimum if the friction factor of the mechanical system is large or the rigidity of the mechanical system is low.
H Manual PID Adjustments

Perform the following procedure to adjust the PID parameter values of the Inverter performing PID
control by monitoring the response waveform.
1. Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal operation.
2. Set n128 so that the Inverter will perform PID control.
3. Increase the proportional (P) gain in n130 within a range causing no vibration.
4. Increase the integral (I) time in n131 within a range causing no vibration.
5. Increase the derivative (D) time in n132 within a range causing no vibration.
6-20
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-3-8 PID Fine Tuning

Refer to the following to tune in PID parameters exactly.
Suppression of Overshooting
Set the derivative (D) time to a smaller value and the integral (I) time to a larger value if overshooting
results.
Response
Before fine tuning
After fine tuning

Time
Prompt Stability
Set the integral (I) time to a smaller value and the derivative (D) time to a large value for prompt stability
control, even though overshooting results.
Response
After fine tuning
Before fine tuning

Time
Suppression of Long-cycle Vibration

Vibration with a wavelength longer than the integral (I) time results from excessive integral control.
The vibration can be suppressed by setting the integral (I) time to a larger value.
Response
Before fine tuning
After fine tuning
Time
6-21
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Suppression of Short-cycle Vibration

Vibration with a wavelength almost as long as the differential time results from excessive derivative
(D) control. The vibration can be suppressed by setting the derivative (D) time to a smaller value.
If the vibration cannot be suppressed after the differential time is set to 0.00, set the proportional gain
to a smaller value or the PID primary delay time constant to a larger value.
Response
Before fine tuning
After fine tuning
Time
6-22
Advanced Operation
6-4
Chapter 6
Setting the Carrier Frequency

The carrier frequency of the 3G3MV can be fixed or varied in proportion to the output
frequency.
n080
Setting
range
Carrier Frequency Selection
Register
0150 Hex
1 to 4, 7 to 9
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
(See
note.)
Set Values
Value
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
Description
2.5 kHz
5.0 kHz
7.5 kHz
10.0 kHz
2.5 kHz (12): 12 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)
The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.
Change the default setting in the following cases.
The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long:
Set the Inverter to a lower carrier frequency.
Reference carrier frequency:
Wiring distance 50 m:
50 m < Wiring distance 100 m:
Wiring distance > 100 m:
10 kHz
5 kHz
2.5 kHz
Note The carrier frequency changes as shown in the following graph with 7 through 9 set in n46.
Carrier Frequency (n080: 7 through 9)
Carrier
Frequency
Output frequency
83.3 Hz (Set value: 7)
6-23
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
The Inverter cannot maintain rated output current with the carrier frequency set to a value higher than
the default one.
The following table shows the default settings and the reduced rated output currents resulting from a
higher setting for the carrier frequency for each Inverter model.
When the carrier frequency is set to a higher value than the default setting, use the Inverter at a current
less than the reduced rated output current.
Voltage
3-phase
p
200 V
Single-phase
g p
200 V
3-phase
p
400 V
Model 3G3MV-
Default setting
Rated output
current (A)
j2001
j2002
j2004
j2007
j2015
j2022
j2037
j2055
j2075
jB001
jB002
jB004
jB007
jB015
jB022
jB037
j4002
j4004
j4007
j4015
j4022
j4030
j4037
j4055
j4075
4 (10 kHz)
0.8
Set to 3
Set to 4
Reduced rated Reduced rated
output current output current
(A)
(A)
4 (10 kHz)
1.6
4 (10 kHz)
3.0
4 (10 kHz)
5.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
8.0
7.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
11.0
10.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
17.5
16.5
3 (7.5 kHz)
25.0
23.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
33.0
30.0
4 (10 kHz)
0.8
4 (10 kHz)
1.6
4 (10 kHz)
3.0
4 (10 kHz)
5.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
8.0
7.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
11.0
10.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
17.5
16.5
3 (7.5 kHz)
1.2
1.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
1.8
1.6
3 (7.5 kHz)
3.4
3.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
4.8
4.0
3 (7.5 kHz)
5.5
4.8
3 (7.5 kHz)
7.2
6.3
3 (7.5 kHz)
8.6
8.1
3 (7.5 kHz)
14.8
14.8 (See note.)
3 (7.5 kHz)
18.0
17.0
Note The rated output current can be output without reduction.

n175
Setting
range
Low Carrier Frequency at Low

Speed
0, 1
Register
01AF Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Note For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, the default setting is 1 (enable).
6-24
No
0
(See
note.)
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Low carrier frequency at low speed disabled.
Low carrier frequency at low speed enabled.
Normally set n175 to 0 (except for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters).

When the output frequency is 5 Hz or less and the output current rate is 110% or more, the carrier
frequency will be automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz with n175 set to 1. If the load is heavy at low speed,
the Inverter will withstand higher overcurrent by suppressing the heat radiation of the Inverter caused
by the carrier frequency.
This function is enabled with 2, 3, or 4 set in n080 for carrier frequency.
6-25
Advanced Operation
6-5
Chapter 6
DC Injection Braking Function

The DC injection braking function applies DC on the induction motor for braking control.
Startup DC Injection Braking:
This braking is used for stopping and starting the motor rotating by inertia with no regenerative processing.
DC Injection Braking to Stop:
Adjust the stop DC injection braking time if the motor rotating does not decelerate to a
stop in normal operation due to inertia from a heavy load. By increasing the DC injection
braking time or DC injection braking current, the time required for stopping the motor is
reduced.
n089
Setting
range
n090
Setting
range
n091
Setting
range
DC Injection Braking Current
Register
0159 Hex
0 to 100 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
DC Injection Braking-to-stop Time Register
015A Hex
0.0 to 25.5 (s)
0.1 s
Unit of
setting
Startup DC Injection Braking Time Register
015B Hex
0.0 to 25.5 (s)
0.1 s
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
50
0.5
0.0
Set the DC injection braking current as percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.
After the startup DC injection braking time is set, the Inverter starts up at minimum frequency on completion of the startup DC injection braking control of the Inverter.
After the speed is reduced, the Inverter is switched to DC injection braking at minimum output frequency.
DC Injection Braking Control
Output
frequency
Minimum
output
frequency
(n016)
6-26
n091
Startup DC injection
braking time
Time
n090
DC injection
braking-to-stop time
Advanced Operation
6-6
Chapter 6
Stall Prevention Function

A stall will occur if the motor cannot keep up with the rotating magnetic field on the motor
stator side when a large load is applied to the motor or a sudden acceleration/deceleration is performed.
In the 3G3MV, stall prevention functions can be set independently for accelerating, running, and decelerating conditions.
n092
Setting
range
Stall Prevention during

Deceleration
0, 1
Register
015C Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Stall prevention during deceleration
No stall prevention during deceleration
If 1 is set, the motor will be decelerated according to the set deceleration time. If the deceleration time
is too short, the main circuit may result in overvoltage.
If 0 is set, the deceleration time will be automatically lengthened to prevent overvoltage.
Be sure to set n092 to 1 to disable stall prevention during acceleration if the braking resistor or Braking
Resistor Unit is in use. If n092 is set to 0, no deceleration time reduction will be possible because the
braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit connected is not used.
Stall Prevention during Deceleration with n092 Set to 0
Output
frequency
Deceleration time is controlled
to prevent overvoltage.
Time
Deceleration time (Set value)
6-27
Advanced Operation
n093
Setting
range
Stall Prevention Level during

Acceleration
30 to 200 (%)
Chapter 6
Register
015D Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Set Values
No
170
Set Values
This function is used to stop accelerating the load if the output current exceeds the set current value so
that the Inverter will continue operating without stalling. The Inverter accelerates the load while the
output current is the same as or less than the set value.
Set the parameter as percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.
Decrease the set value if the capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the Inverter or the motor stalls
with the default value.
The set value is normally 2 or 3 times higher than the rated current of the motor. Set this current as
percentage based on the rated inverter current as 100%.
Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Output
current
n093 (stall prevention level

during acceleration)
Time
Output
frequency
The output frequency is controlled
so that the Inverter will not stall.
Time
6-28
Advanced Operation
Stall Prevention Level during
Operation
30 to 200 (%)
n094
Setting
range
Chapter 6
Register
015E Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
160
Set Values
This function will decrease the output frequency if the output current exceeds the set current value by a
minimum of approximately 100 ms so that the Inverter will continue operating without stalling. The
Inverter will increase the output frequency to return to the set frequency reference level when the output current is less than the set value.
The Inverter accelerates or decelerates the output frequency according to the preset acceleration or
deceleration time set in n116 (stall prevention acceleration/deceleration time setting).
Set the parameter as percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.
Decrease the set value if the capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the Inverter or the motor stalls
with the default value.
The set value is normally 2 or 3 times higher than the rated current of the motor. Set this current in
percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.
Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Output
current
n094 (Stall prevention

level during acceleration)
Time
Output
frequency
The output frequency is controlled
so that the Inverter will not stall.
Time
n115
Setting
range
Stall Prevention Level Automatic

Suppression Selection
0, 1
Register
0173 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Set Values
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Disabled. The set value in n094 for stall prevention during operation is enabled in all the
frequency range.
Enabled. The set value in n094 for stall prevention during operation is automatically
decreased when the output frequency exceeds the maximum voltage frequency (FA).
6-29
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
If n115 is set to 1, the stall prevention level will be suppressed as shown below. When using frequencies exceeding the maximum voltage frequency, set n 115 to 1.
Automatic Suppression of Stall Prevention Level (n115 Set to 1)
Operation level
Constant output range

Operating level: n094 x
(Max. voltage
frequency/output frequency)
Output frequency
Max. voltage frequency (FA)
n116
Setting
range
Stall Prevention
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Setting
0, 1
Register
0174 Hex
Changes during
operation
No
Unit of
setting
Set Values
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Accelerates or decelerates at acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 presently selected.
Accelerates or decelerates at acceleration/deceleration time 2 set in n021 and n022.
Select the acceleration/deceleration time with the stall prevention function operating function
enabled.
To accelerate or decelerate quicker or slower than normal, set 1 in n116 and the acceleration time in
n021 (acceleration time 2) and deceleration time in n022 (deceleration time 2) for stall prevention use.
6-30
Advanced Operation
6-7
Chapter 6
Overtorque Detection Function

When an excessive load is applied to the equipment, the Inverter detects the overtorque
condition through an increase in the output current.
n096
Setting
range

Selection 1
0 to 4
Register
0160 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Inverter does not monitor overtorque.
Inverter monitors overtorque only when speed is matched. It continues operation (issues
warning) even after overtorque is detected.
Inverter monitors overtorque only when speed is matched. It discontinues operation
(through protective function) when overtorque is detected.
Inverter always monitors overtorque during operation. It continues operation (issues
warning) even after overtorque is detected.
Inverter always monitors overtorque during operation. It discontinues operation (through
protective function) when overtorque is detected.
2
3
4
Set n097 (overtorque detection function selection 2), n098 (overtorque detection level) and n099
(overtorque detection time) to enable the overtorque detection function. The Inverter will detect overtorque when the current is the same as or higher than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.
Set a multi-function output (n057 to n059) to either of the following so that external overtorque detection output will be ON.
Set Value: 6 for overtorque detection (NO)
Set Value: 7 for overtorque detection (NC)
Overtorque Detection
See note.
Output current
(or output torque)
n098 (Overtorque
detection level)
Time
Overtorque
detection (NO)
Note
n097
Setting
range
n099
Overtorque detection time
Time
Overtorque detection will be canceled if the output current decreases from the detection level by
approximately 5% of the Inverter rated current.

Selection 2
0, 1
Register
0161 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
6-31
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
Value
Description
0
1
Detects overtorque from output torque.

Detects overtorque from output current.
Set n097 to the item used for overtorque detection.

In V/f control mode, overtorque is detected through the output current of the Inverter regardless of the
set value.
n098
Setting
range
Overtorque Detection Level
Register
0162 Hex
30 to 200 (%)
Unit of
setting
1%
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
160
Set Values
Set n098 to the type of overtorque detection level.
To detect the level through the output torque, set the torque in percentage based on the rated motor
torque as 100%.
To detect the level through the output current, set the current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.
Note With general-purpose induction motors for example, a current equivalent to approx. 60% of the
rated motor current will be generated when there is no load. (This current will vary according to the
model and capacity of the motor.) When setting the overtorque detection level, allow for a no-load
current.
n099
Setting
range
Overtorque Detection Time
Register
0163 Hex
0.1 to 10.0 (s)
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.1
Set Values
Set the overtorque detection time.
The Inverter will detect overtorque when the current (or torque) the same as or higher than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.
6-32
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-7-1 Undertorque Detection

Undertorque detection is used to compare Drive output current/torque with the undertorque detection
level. When the output current is equal to or less than the defined level, an undertorque condition exists. This will be indicated as a UL3 fault on the Digital Operator. This feature can be selected to
operate over a wide range of conditions.
H n057: Multi-function Output 1

(terminals MA, MB & MC)
Data 6 or 7: Overtorque
Detection
Data 8 or 9: Undertorque
Detection
n058: Multi-function Output 2

(terminals P1 & PC)
n059: Multi-function Output 3
(terminals P2 & PC)
A Form-C contact, or an open collector output, can be programmed to change states during an overtorque/undertorque detection condition.
Example of Overtorque Detection

n096 setting:
Overtorque enabled, only at set frequency, coast to stop
n057 setting:
Output contact programmed for overtorque detection
n096 setting:
110%
Level at which overtorque is sensed
n099 setting:
1.0 s
Time delay before overtorque event occurs
H n117: Undertorque Detection
Factory setting: 0
This constant determines whether the undertorque detection function of the Drive is enabled, under
what conditions it will detect for undertorque, and what operation it will perform after detecting an undertorque.
Setting
0
1
2
3
Undertorque
Disabled
Disabled
Undertorque
Undertorque
Undertorque
Operation After
Detection
Continues
Coast to stop
Continues
Undertorque
Coast to stop
Detection Condition
Only at set frequency

Only at set frequency
At all times except during
stopping or DC injection braking
At all times except during
stopping or DC injection braking
For undertorque detection during accel or decel, set to 3 or 4.

For continuous operation after undertorque detection, set to 1 or 3. During detection, the Digital
Operator displays a UL3 alarm (blinking).
To stop the drive at an undertorque detection fault, set to 2 or 4. At detection, the Digital Operator
displays a UL3 fault.
To output an undertorque detection signal, set output terminal function selection (n057, n058 or n059)
to 8 or 9.
6-33
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Factory setting: 10 %
H n118: Undertorque Detection Level
Range: 0 to 200 %
This is the reference point for determining that an undertorque condition exists. Set as a percent of
Drive rated current or as a percent of motor rated torque.
Factory setting: 0.1 sec.
H n119: Undertorque Detection Time
Range: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds
Determines how long an undertorque condition must exist before another event will occur, e.g., coast
to stop, multi-function output change of state, or UL3 warning or fault display.
6-8
Torque Compensation Function

This function increases the output torque of the Inverter by detecting an increase in the
motor load.
n103
Setting
range
Torque Compensation Gain
Register
0167 Hex
0.0 to 2.5
Unit of
setting
0.1
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
1.0
Set Values
The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long:
Set the gain to a larger value.
The capacity of the motor is lower than the maximum applicable motor capacity of the Inverter:
Set the gain to a larger value.
The motor vibrates:
Set the gain to a smaller value.
The torque compensation gain must be adjusted so that the output current at low speed will not exceed
50% of the rated output current of the Inverter, otherwise the Inverter may be damaged.
n104
Setting
range
Torque Compensation Primary

Delay Time Constant
0.0 to 25.5 (s)
Register
0168 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Note The default value is 0.2 (s) with the Inverter set to vector control mode.
6-34
No
0.3 (See
note.)
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
This parameter is used for adjusting the response of torque compensation.
Adjust the parameter in the following cases.
The motor vibrates: Increase the set value.
The response of the motor is slow: Decrease the set value.
n105
Setting
range
Torque Compensation Core Loss
Register
0168 Hex
0.0 to 6,550 (W)
Unit of
setting
0.1 W
(See note
1.)
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
See note
2
Note 1. The value will be set in 0.1-W increments if the loss is less than 1,000 W and 1-W increments if
the loss is 1,000 W or over.
Note 2. The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.
Set Values
Set this value to the core loss of the motor in used.
This parameter is valid in V/f control mode only.
Set the value if the capacity of the motor does not coincide with the maximum applicable motor capacity of the Inverter.
6-35
Advanced Operation
6-9
Chapter 6
Slip Compensation Function

The slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current, and sets gain to compensate for output frequency.
This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load. It is mainly
valid for V/f control.
Set the rated motor current (n036) and the motor no-load current (n110) before using the
slip compensation function. If n036 = 0, the slip compensation function cannot be used.
n106
Setting
range
Rated Motor Slip
Register
016A Hex
0.0 to 20.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.1 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
(See
note.)
Set Values
Set the rated slip value of the motor in use.
This parameter is used as a slip compensation constant.
Calculate the rated motor slip value from the rated frequency (Hz) and rpm on the motor nameplate by
using the following formula.
Rated slit value (Hz) = Rated frequency (Hz)
n111
Setting
range
Rated rpm Number of poles

120
Slip Compensation Gain
Register
016F Hex
0.0 to 2.5
Unit of
setting
0.1
Changes during
operation
Default setting
Yes
0.0
(See
note 1.)
Note 1. If set to vector control mode, the default value will be 1.0.
Note 2. This parameter is disabled with the value set to 0.0.
Set Values
Set the parameter to 1.0 first and check the operation of the Inverter. Then fine-tune the gain with
0.1-gain increments or decrements.
If the speed is lower than the target value, increase the set value.
If the speed is higher than the target value, decrease the set value.
n112
Setting
range
Slip Compensation Primary Delay

Time
0.0 to 25.5 (s)
Register
0170 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Note If set to vector control mode, the default value will be 0.2.
6-36
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
2.0 (See
note.)
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
This parameter is used for the response adjustment of the slip compensation function.
The motor vibrates:
Set the value to a larger value.
The motor response is low: Set the value to a smaller value.

n113
Setting
range
Slip Compensation During

Regeneration
0, 1
Register
0171 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
Description
Slip compensation function disabled during regeneration
Slip compensation function enabled during regeneration
Select whether the slip compensation function is enabled or not, even during regeneration (i.e.: when
regeneration energy is returning during deceleration, etc.).
This parameter is only enabled in vector control mode. (In V/f control mode, the slip compensation
function will be disabled during regeneration, regardless of the setting for this parameter.)
6-37
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-10 Other Functions

The following description provides information on the other functions and parameter settings of the Inverter.
Refer to Section 7 Communications for parameters used for communications.
6-10-1 Digital Operator Disconnection Error Detection

This parameter setting is to select whether or not to detect Digital Operator connection errors.
n010
Setting
range
Operation Selection at Digital

Operator Interruption
0, 1
Register
010A Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
The Digital Operator connection error is not detected (Nonfatal error)
The Digital Operator connection error is detected (Error output and the Inverter coasts to a
stop)
0
1
6-10-2 Motor Protection Functions (n037 and n038)

This parameter setting is for motor overload detection (OL1).
n037
Setting
range
Motor Protection Characteristics
Register
0125 Hex
0 to 2
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
Description
Protection characteristics for general-purpose induction motors
Protection characteristics for Inverter-dedicated motors
No protection
This parameter is used to set the electric thermal characteristics of the motor to be connected.
Set the parameter according to the motor.
If a single Inverter is connected to more than one motor, set the parameter to 2 for no protection. The
parameter is also disabled by setting n036 for rated motor current to 0.0. Provide overload protection
for each motor by setting up, for example, thermal relays.
n038
Setting
range
6-38
Motor Protection Time
Register
0126 Hex
1 to 60 (min)
Unit of
setting
1 min
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
8
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
This parameter is used to set the electronic thermal protection constant of motor overload detection
OL1.
To set the parameter according to the characteristics of the motor, confirm the thermal time constant
with the motor manufacturer and set the parameter with some margin. In other words, set the value a
little shorter than the thermal time constant.
To detect motor overloading more quickly, reduce the set value, provided that it does not cause any
application problems.
6-10-3 Cooling Fan Operation Function (n039)

This parameter is used to operate the cooling fan of the Inverter while the Inverter is turned ON or only
while the Inverter is in operation.
n039
Setting
range
Cooling Fan Operation
Register
0127 Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
The fan rotates only while the RUN command is input and for 1 minute after the Inverter
stops operating.
The fan rotates while the Inverter is turned ON.
0
1
This parameter is available only if the Inverter incorporates a cooling fan.

If the operation frequency of the Inverter is low, the life of the fan can be prolonged by setting the
parameter to 0.
6-10-4 Momentary Power Interruption Compensation (n081)

The parameter specifies the processing that will be performed when a momentary power interruption
occurs.
n081
Setting
range
Momentary Power Interruption

Compensation
0 to 2
Register
0151 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
Description
Disabled. (An undervoltage fault will be detected when there is momentary power
interruption for 15 ms or more.)
The Inverter will continue operating if power is restored within 0.5 s. (See note 1.)
The Inverter will restart when power is restored. (See note 2.)
Note 1. By setting n081 to 1, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for
power restoration for 0.5 s if a momentary power interruption occurs. If the power recovers
6-39
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
within 0.5 s, the Inverter will restart after speed searching. If the momentary power interruption continues more than 0.5 s, the Inverter will detect UV1.
Note 2. By setting n081 to 2, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for
power restoration if a momentary power interruption occurs. When the power recovers, the
Inverter will restart after speed searching.
6-10-5 Fault Retry (n082)

! Caution
The Inverter may be damaged if the fault retry function is used.

If the Inverter faults, take the following measures:
Be sure to install a no-fuse breaker (NFB).
Provide the Inverter and peripheral machines with a sequence so that the machines
will stop operating when the Inverter has an operational fault.
The fault retry function automatically resets and restarts the Inverter in the case the Inverter has an
overvoltage fault or an overcurrent fault during operation.
In the case of any other fault, the protective function operates instantly and the fault retry function does
not operate.
This function is to be used only if the user does not want to interrupt the mechanical system, even if this
function may damage the Inverter.
Set a multi-function output (n057 to n059) to the following so that the fault retry signal will be output.
Set value: 14 for fault retries
n082
Setting
range
Number of Fault Retries
Register
0152 Hex
0 to 10
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Set the number of fault retries required.
The count of fault retries will be cleared in any of the following cases.
The Inverter is normal for 10 minutes continuously after the latest fault retry was made.
Power supply to the Inverter is interrupted.
A fault reset is input.
6-10-6 Frequency Jump Function (n083 to n086)

The frequency jump function prevents the Inverter from generating frequencies that make the
mechanical system resonate.
The frequency jump function can be used effectively to set three dead bands of a frequency reference.
n083
Setting
range
6-40
Jump Frequency 1
Register
0153 Hex
0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.00
Advanced Operation
n084
Setting
range
n085
Setting
range
n086
Setting
range
Chapter 6
Jump Frequency 2
Register
0154 Hex
0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
Jump Frequency 3
Register
0155 Hex
0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
Jump Width
Register
0156 Hex
0.00 to 25.50 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.00
0.00
0.00
Set Values
Set n083 through n085 for jump frequencies 1 through 3 to the central values of jumping frequencies.
Values will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if
the frequency is 100 Hz or over.
These values must satisfy the following condition.
n083 n084 n085
The value in n086 must be set for the jump width.
This function is disabled with n086 set to 0.0.
The operation of the Inverter within the dead bands is prohibited. While the Inverter is in acceleration
or deceleration control, however, the Inverter does not jump the bands but changes the frequency
smoothly.
Frequency Jump Function
Output
frequency
Reference frequency
6-41
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-10-7 Accumulated Operating Time (n087, n088)

The accumulated operating time function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
This function calculates and stores in memory the Inverters accumulated operating time. The accumulated operating time that is saved can be checked (unit: 10h) by the accumulated operating time
(U--13) of the multi-function monitor (MNTR indicator).
Use this function in determining the maintenance schedule.
n087
Setting
range
Accumulated Operating Time
Register
0157 Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Select the operation status to be accumulated.
Value
0
1
n088
Setting
range
Description
Accumulate the Inverters power-ON time (the time from when the power is turned ON until
it is shut OFF).
Accumulate the Inverters RUN time (the time that the RUN command is being input).
Accumulated Operating Time
Selection
0 to 6,550
Register
0158 Hex
Unit of
setting
10 H
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set the initial value for the accumulated operating time with 10 hours set as 1. The accumulation will
begin from the time that is set.
Note To clear (i.e., set to 0) the monitor value (U--13) for the accumulated operating time, set n088 to 0.
The monitor value cannot be cleared by setting n001 (parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization) to 8 or 9 (initialize).
6-10-8 Frequency Detection

The 3G3MV has the following frequency detection functions.
Frequency Detection:
Detects that the frequency reference coincides with the output frequency.
Frequency Detection Levels 1 and 2:
Detects that the output frequency is the same as or higher or lower than the set value (frequency
detection level) in n095.
The multi-function outputs (n057 to n059) must be set for the frequency detection function.
6-42
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
H Frequency Detection
The multi-function outputs (n057 to n059) must be set to the following in order to issue an output indicating that the frequency reference and the output frequency agree.
Set value: 2 for frequency agree
Frequency Detection Operation
Output
frequency
Reset width 4 Hz
Detection width 2 Hz
Frequency reference
Time
Frequency
detection
Time
H Frequency Detection Levels 1 and 2

The parameters in n057 to n059 for multi-function output must be set for frequency detection output.
Set value: 4 for frequency detection level 1 (Output frequency n095)
Set value: 5 for frequency detection level 2 (Output frequency n095)
Set the frequency detection level in n095.
n095
Setting
range
Frequency Detection Level
Register
015F Hex
0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)
Unit of
setting
0.01 Hz
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.00
Set Values
Set the frequency to be detected.
6-43
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
The value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments
if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.
Frequency Detection Level 1
Output
frequency
Reset width --2 Hz
n095 (Frequency
detection level)
Time
Frequency
detection level 1
Time
Frequency Detection Level 2

Output
frequency
Reset width +2 Hz
n095 (Frequency
detection level)
Time
Frequency
detection level 2
Time
6-10-9 UP/DOWN Command Frequency Memory (n100)

This function changes the reference frequency by turning the UP and DOWN commands ON and OFF.
In order to use this function, set n056 for multi-function input 7 to 34. Then the multi-function input 6
(S6) and multi-function input 7 (S7) terminals are set as described below.
Multi-function input 6 (S6): UP command
Multi-function input 7 (S7): DOWN command
The output frequency held by the UP/DOWN function will be stored in the memory if n100 for UP/
DOWN frequency storage is set to 1.
By setting n100 to 1, the frequency reference kept on hold for 5 s or more will be retained even after a
power interruption, and operation will be restarted at this frequency the next time the RUN command is
input.
The stored output frequency will be cleared from the memory if n100 is set to 0. The retained frequency
is initialized if n001 for parameter initialization is set to 8 or 9.
Note While this function is used, frequency references can only be used in remote mode with the UP/
DOWN command or inching frequency command. All multi-step speed references are disabled.
6-44
Advanced Operation
n100
Setting
range
Chapter 6
UP/DOWN Frequency Memory
Register
0164 Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
0
1
The frequency on hold is not retained.

The frequency on hold for 5 s or more is retailed.
Operation of UP/DOWN Function
RUN command
(Forward rotation)
Time
UP command
(S5)
Time
DOWN command
(S6)
Time
Output frequency
Upper limit
Lower limit
Time
Status
Frequency
detection
Time
Note Status U: UP (acceleration)
D: DOWN (deceleration)
H: Hold
U1: Frequency acceleration restricted by upper limit.
D1: Frequency deceleration restricted by lower limit.
The following ON/OFF combinations of UP and DOWN commands are possible.

Command
S6 (UP command)
S7 (DOWN command)
Acceleration
ON
OFF
Deceleration
OFF
ON
Hold
OFF
OFF
Hold
ON
ON
With the UP/DOWN function used, the output frequency has the following restrictions for upper and
lower limits.
Upper limit:
The maximum frequency in n011 or the frequency reference upper limit in n033,
whichever is smaller.
Lower limit:
The minimum output frequency in n016 or frequency reference lower limit in n034,
whichever is smaller.
6-45
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
When the RUN command for forward or reverse rotation is input, the Inverter will start operating at the
lower limit regardless of whether the UP/DOWN command is input or not.
When the UP/DOWN function and inching frequency command are both assigned to multi-function
inputs, an inching frequency command input will have the highest priority.
If n100 for UP/DOWN frequency storage is set to 1, the output frequency held by the UP/DOWN function for 5 s or more will be stored in the memory. The output frequency will be held by the UP/DOWN
function when both UP and DOWN commands are ON or OFF together.
6-10-10 Frequency Reference Loss Detection

Factory setting: 0 sec.
H n064: Frequency Reference Loss Detection
Range: 0 or 1
The reference loss detection function is either enabled or disabled, based on the setting of n064.
When enabled (data 1), the reference loss detection compares the change in reference with respect
to time. If the reference decreases by 90% in more than 0.4 seconds, the drive will decelerate to the
set reference; if the reference decreases by 90% in less than 0.4 seconds, the drive will continue to
operate at 80% of the output frequency. To regain control of output frequency, either exceed the set
reference (80% of reference) or initiate a STOP command. If Auto Reference is less than
Fmax (n011) x .05, this function is not performed.
FWD RUN
COMMAND
80%
REF
AUTO
REFERENCE
10%
0.4 SEC
0.4 SEC
80%
REFQ.
GPD 515
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
Timing Chart
Note This function applies to frequency references at terminal FR, RP or 2CN (Multi-Function
Analog Input).
6-46
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
6-10-11 Input Open-phase Detection (n166, n167)

The input open-phase detection function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
This function detects the occurrence of an input power supply open phase. The open phase is detected by means of fluctuations in the main circuit DC voltage, enabling detection of power supply voltage fluctuations and imbalances, decreasing values due to aging of the main circuit capacitor, and so
on, in the same way.
If the fluctuations in the main circuit DC voltage exceed the input open-phase detection level (n166),
and persist at this level for longer than the input open-phase detection time (n167), a main-circuit voltage fault (PF) will be detected.
n166
Setting
range
n167
Setting
range
Input Open-phase Detection Level Register
01A6 Hex
0 to 100
Unit of
setting
1%
Input Open-phase Detection Time
Register
01A7 Hex
0 to 255
Unit of
setting
1s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Set Values
For the input open-phase detection level (n166), set the main-circuit DC voltage fluctuation level for
detecting an input open phase. Set the level as a percentage, as follows:
200-V-class Inverters:Take 400 V as 100%.
400-V-class Inverters:Take 800 V as 100%.
For the input open-phase detection time (n167), set the time (in seconds) for detecting an input open
phase.
Note 1. The following values are recommended for detecting an input open phase: n166 = 7 (%); n167
= 10 (s)
Note 2. If either n166 or n167 is set to 0, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.
6-10-12 Output Open-phase Detection (n168, n169)

The output open-phase detection function is provided for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
This function detects the occurrence of an output terminal open phase. The detection is performed at
the current flowing at each output phase.
If the current in any of the Inverter output phases becomes less than the output open-phase detection
level (n168) and persists at this level for longer than the output open-phase detection time (n169), an
output open-phase fault (LF) will be detected.
n168
Setting
range
n169
Setting
range
Output Open-phase Detection

Level
0 to 100
Register
01A8 Hex
Unit of
setting
1%
Output Open-phase Detection

Time
0.0 to 2.0
Register
01A9 Hex
Unit of
setting
0.1 s
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0.0
6-47
Advanced Operation
Chapter 6
Set Values
For the output open-phase detection level (n168), set the current for detecting an output open phase.
Make the setting as a percentage, taking the Inverters rated output current as 100%.
For the output open-phase detection time (n169), set the time in seconds for detecting an output open
phase.
Note 1. The following values are recommended for detecting an output open phase: n168 = 5 (%);
n169 = 0.2 (s)
Note 2. If either n168 or n169 is set to 0, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.
Note 3. If the applicable motor capacity is small in relation to the Inverter capacity, it may cause errors
in the output open-phase detection. To prevent this from occurring, lower the output openphase detection level to match the motor capacity.
6-10-13 Fault Log (n178)

The 3G3MV stores information on the four most recent faults.
The latest record is displayed. By pressing the Increment Key, the previous record is displayed. A
maximum of four records can be checked. 1. indicates the most recent fault.
The details of the information are the same as that obtained from the multi-function monitor U-09.
n178
Setting
range
Fault Log
Register
01B2 Hex
---
Unit of
setting
---
Changes during
operation
Default setting
-----
Note The information is read only.
Display Example
D Fault display
Fault
generation
item
D No fault stored
Fault code
To clear the fault log, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 6.
6-48
7
Chapter 7
Communications
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
Inverter Settings
Message Communications Basic Format
DSR Message and Response
Enter Command
Setting the Communications Data
Register Number Allocations in Detail
Communications Error Codes
Self-diagnostic Test
Communications with Programmable Controller
Communications
Chapter 7
The 3G3MV Inverter has standard RS-422/485 and optional CompoBus/D communications functions. This section provides information on how to communicate over
RS-422/485. For CompoBus/D communications in detail, refer to the 3G3MVPDRT1-SINV CompoBus/D Communications Unit Users Manual (I529).
It is possible to control the Inverter, give frequency references, monitor the Inverter status, and read and write parameters through communications.
A maximum of 32 Inverter Units can be connected and used as a simple network system.
Note The RS-422/485 communications of the 3G3MV Inverter conform to the MODBUS
Communications Protocol and this protocol cannot be used together with any other
communications protocol. Only 3G3MV-Series products can be connected as Slaves.
If a CompoBus/D Communications Unit is used, RS-422/485 communications will not
be possible. Therefore, select which communications method is to be used.
(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation.)
7-1
Inverter Settings
7-1-1 Setting the Communications Conditions

H Communications Time-over Detection Selection (n151)
This parameter is used for monitoring the communications system.
The set value in the parameter determines whether communications time-over detection will be performed with CE displayed if there is an interval of more than 2 s between normal communications.
The method to process the detected communications time-over is also determined according to the
set value in the parameter.
When a control signal (the RUN command, forward/reverse rotation command, or an external fault
signal) is input into the Inverter through communications, be sure to set n151 to 0, 1, or 2. Then the
system will stop in the case of a time-over detection.
If there is a communications failure, no control input will be operable. It will be, however, impossible to
stop the Inverter if n151 is to 4 or 3.
Use a host program that monitors how the Inverter handles all control input signals, for example, so
that there will be no interval of more than 2 s between communications.
n151
Setting
range
RS-422/485 Communications
Time-over Detection Selection
0 to 4
Register
0197 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
3
4
7-2
Description
Detects a time-over and fatal error and coasts to a stop (See note 1.)
Detects a time-over and fatal error and decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 1 (See note 1.)
Detects a time-over and fatal error and decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2 (See note 1.)
Detects a time-over and nonfatal error warning and continues operating. The warning is
canceled when the communications return to normal. (See note 2.)
No time-over is detected.
Communications
Chapter 7
Note 1. The fatal error is canceled with error reset input.

Note 2. The nonfatal error warning is canceled when the communications returns to normal.
H Communications Frequency Reference/Display Unit Selection (n152)

Set this parameter to the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through communications.
This unit is for communications use only and independent from the units of setting made through the
Digital Operator.
n152
Setting
range
Register
Frequency Reference/Display Unit
Selection
0 to 3
Unit of
setting
0198 Hex
Changes during
operation
No
Default setting
Set Values
Value
Description
0.1 Hz
0.01 Hz
Converted value based on 30,000 as max. frequency
0.1% (Max. frequency: 100%)
0
1
2
3
Note Communications data after the above conversion is hexadecimal.

For example, if the frequency is 60 Hz and the unit of setting is 0.01 Hz, the converted value is
obtained as follows:
60/0.01 = 6000 = 1770 Hex
H Slave Address (n153)

Set this parameter to the Slave address (Slave unit number) for communications.
If more than one Inverter is connected as a Slave, make sure that there will be no Slave address
duplication.
n153
Setting
range
Slave Address
00 to 32
Register
0199 Hex
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
00
Set Values
Value
00
01 to 32
Description
Only receives broadcast messages from the Master (See note.)
Slave address
Note Address 00 is for broadcast purposes only. Do not set the Slave to this address, otherwise the
Slave will not communicate.
H Communications Baud Rate and Parity Selection (n154 and n155)

Set the baud rate and parity according to the communications conditions of the Master.
n154
Setting
range
RS-422/485 Baud Rate Selection
Register
019A Hex
0 to 3
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
2
7-3
Communications
Chapter 7
Set Values
Value
Description
0
1
2
3
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
n155
Setting
range
RS-422/485 Parity Selection
Register
019B Hex
0 to 2
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
0
1
2
Even
Odd
No parity
In normal serial communications, data is configured in single bytes, and messages are created by
stringing together multiple bytes of data. The parity check described here sets the check for each byte of
data. Set the parity check method that is required by the Master.
Note The entire message is checked by a separate check code called CRC-16, so the communications data will be checked even if no special parity check is performed.
H Send Wait Time Setting (n156)

Set this parameter to an awaiting period for returning a response after the DSR (data-send-request)
message is received from the Master.
n156
Setting
range
RS-422/485 Send Wait Time
Register
019C Hex
10 to 65 (ms)
Unit of
setting
1 ms
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
10
Set Values
When the DSR message is received from the Master, the Inverter must wait for a communications time
of 24-bit length plus the set value in n156 before returning a response.
Set this value according to the response time of the Master.
H RTS Control Selection (n157)

Select whether or not to enable the RTS (request-to-send) communications control function.
This function can be disabled (i.e., set to 1) only when a 1-to-1 Master/Slave configuration is used in
RS-422 communications. When multiple Slaves are used for RS-422, or whenever RS-485 communications are used, it is necessary to set 0 (enable RTS control).
n157
Setting
range
7-4
RS-422/485 RTS Control Selection Register
019D Hex
0, 1
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Communications
Chapter 7
Set Values
Value
Description
0
1
Enabled
Disabled (Available to 1-to-1 RS-422 communication only)
7-1-2 RUN Command Selection (n003)

Select the method to input the RUN or STOP command into the Inverter.
This parameter is enabled in remote mode only. The Inverter in local mode accepts the RUN command only through key sequences on the Digital Operator.
n003
Setting
range
Operation Command Selection
Register
0103 Hex
0 to 3
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
Description
The RUN Key and STOP/RESET Key on the Digital Operator are enabled.
Multi-function input terminals are enabled in 2- or 3-wire sequence.
RS-422/485 communications are enabled.
Input from the option (CompoBus/D Communications Unit) is enabled.
0
1
2
3
Note 1. To input the RUN command through RS-422/485 communications, set this parameter to 2.
Then the RUN command only through RS-422/485 communications will be enabled.
Note 2. The RUN command can be input through RS-422/485 with multi-function input settings as
well. For details, refer to 7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs.
7-1-3 Frequency Reference Input Selection (n004)

Select the method to input the frequency reference into the Inverter in remote mode.
Ten methods can be used to input the frequency reference in remote mode. Select the ideal method
according to the application.
n004
Setting
range
Frequency Reference Selection
Register
0104 Hex
0 to 8
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
0
Set Values
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Description
The FREQUENCY adjuster on the Digital Operator is enabled.
Frequency reference 1 (024) is enabled.
Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 10-V voltage input is enabled.
Frequency reference control terminal for 4- to 20-mA current input is enabled.
Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 20-mA current input is enabled.
Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.
7-5
Communications
Value
6
7
8
9
Chapter 7
Description
Frequency reference through communications is enabled.
Multi-function analog voltage for 0- to 10-V input is enabled.
Multi-function analog current for 4- to 20-mA) input is enabled.
Frequency reference through option (CompoBus/D communications) is enabled.
Note 1. To input the frequency reference through RS-422/485 communications, set this parameter to
6. Then the frequency reference only through RS-422/485 communications will be enabled.
Note 2. The frequency reference can be input through RS-422/485 with multi-function input settings
as well. For details, refer to 7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs.
7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs (n050 to n056)

In addition to the methods described above, the RUN command and frequency reference can be input
through RS-422/485 communications by setting the value 18 in any one of the parameters from n050
to n056 (multi-function input).
Subsequently, the following operations are selectable in remote mode. None of these parameters,
however, can be changed while the operation command is being input.
When the function-set input terminal is OFF, the RUN command will be executed according to the
setting in n003 (RUN command selection) and the frequency reference will be executed according
to the setting in n004 (frequency reference selection).
When the function-set input terminal is ON, the Inverter will operate according to the RUN command
and frequency reference through RS-422/485 communications.
n050
Setting
range
n051
Setting
range
n052
Setting
range
n053
Setting
range
n054
Setting
range
n055
Setting
range
7-6
Multi-function input 1 (S1)
Register
0132 Hex
1 to 25
Unit of
setting
Register
0133 Hex
1 to 25
Unit of
setting
Register
0134 Hex
1 to 25
Unit of
setting
Register
0135 Hex
1 to 25
Unit of
setting
Register
0136 Hex
1 to 25
Unit of
setting
Register
0137 Hex
1 to 25
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
Communications
n056
Setting
range
7-2
Chapter 7
Register
0138 Hex
1 to 25, 34, and 35
Unit of
setting
Changes during
operation
Default setting
No
10
Message Communications Basic Format

The following description provides information on the format of message data (DSR and
response data).
Message communications of the Inverter conform to the MODBUS Communications
Protocol, which does not require message start and end processing.
H Communications Format
The following format is used for message data communications.
Message data consists of a Slave address, function code, communications data, and error check
block.
Message data (DSR message
and response)
Slave address
1 byte
Function code
1 byte
Communications Error check

block
data
2 bytes
7-7
Communications
Chapter 7
H Message Interval
When the Inverter receives a DSR message from the Master, the Inverter waits for a period that is
equivalent to 24 bits in length and a Send Wait Time set in n156. Then the Inverter will return a
response. Set n156 according to the Masters processing time or the timing adjustment.
When the Master issues the next message after receiving the response from the Inverter, the Master
must wait for a 24-bit period plus another period of at least 10 ms.
Response from Inverter
DSR message from Master
24-bit (or 3-byte)

standby period
Standby period
set in n156
24-bit (3-byte)
standby period
DSR message from Master
Set a standby period of

10 ms or more for the
Master.
H Message Data Configuration

The communications message is configured entirely of hexadecimal data. (ASCII and FINS are not
used.)
Communications data is divided into the four areas shown in the following table.
Data name
Slave address
Function code
Communications data
Error check
Description
Set the Slave address (the set value in n153) of the Inverter, to which the
DSR message is sent. The Slave address must be within a range from 00 to
32 (00 to 20 Hex).
A command giving instructions of the details of processing to the Inverter.
Example: Data read (03 Hex) and data write (10 Hex)
Data attached to the command.
Example: The register number of read start data and the number of registers
of read data
CRC-16 check code for checking the reliability of the message data.
Note In the above communications, the default is --1 (65535) and the LSB (least-significant byte) is
converted as MSB (most-significant byte) (in the opposite direction). The CRC-16 check is automatically performed by using the protocol macro function of OMRONs SYSMAC CS1-series or
C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers.
7-8
Communications
Chapter 7
H Slave Address
The Master can communicate with a maximum of 32 Slaves over RS-422/485. A unique Slave
address is allocated to each Slave (Inverter) for communications.
Slave addresses are within a range from 00 to 32 (00 through 20 Hex). If a DSR message is issued to
Slave address 00, the message will be a broadcast message.
Note The broadcast message is addressed to all Slaves. Only the RUN command (register 0001 Hex)
and frequency command (register 0002 Hex) can be written to the message. The Inverter receiving this message does not return a response regardless of whether or not the message is
received properly. Therefore, for measures against communications errors, the monitor function
of the Inverter should be used for checking the reception of broadcast messages.
H Function Code
The function code is a command giving instructions of the details of processing to the Inverter.
The following three functions codes are available.
Function code
03 Hex
Command name
Data read
08 Hex
Loop-back test
10 Hex
Data write
Description
Reads the data of the specified register number.
Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes) can
be read.
The DSR message is returned as a response. This
command is used for checking the status of
communications.
The attached data in the format is written to the specified
register number. Consecutive data of a maximum of 16
words (32 bytes) can be written.
Note 1. Do not use any code other than the above, otherwise the Inverter will detect a communications error and return an error message.
Note 2. The Inverter uses the same function code for the response. If an error occurs, however, the
MSB of the function code will be set to 1. For example, if an error occurs in a DSR message
with function code 03, the function code of the response will be 83.
H Communications Data
Communications data is attached to the command. The contents and its arrangement of communications data vary with the function code. For details, refer to 7-3 DSR Message and Response.
7-9
Communications
Chapter 7
H Error Check
The CRC-16 check code is the remainder (16 bits) when all of the message blocks from the Slave
address to the final communications data are connected in series, as shown in the following diagram,
and this data is divided by a fixed 17-digit binary number (1 1000 0000 0000 0101).
8 bits
Slave address
Note 1. Normally 0 is used as the initial value for CRC-16 calculations, but --1 (16 bits all 1) is used here.
Function code
Note 2. The CRC-16 code is calculated with the LSB of the

Slave address handled as the MSB, and the final MSB
of the communications data handled as the LSB.
Start of communications data
Note 3. Calculate the CRC-16 code for responses from the

Slave as well, and compare it with the CRC-16 code in
the response message.
End of communications data
7-10
The LSB of the Slave address is handled as the MSB in CRC-16 calculation.
Communications
7-3
Chapter 7
DSR Message and Response

The following description provides information on how to set DSR messages and what
details are returned as responses. Each DSR message or response is divided into 8-bit
blocks. Therefore, data must be set in 8-bit blocks for communications.
7-3-1 Data Read (Function Code: 03 Hex)

H Settings and Responses
To read data (such as control I/O status data, monitor item data, or parameter set value data) from the
Inverter, issue the following DSR message.
Data read is a maximum of 16 words in length (i.e., data of 32 bytes from 16 registers) per DSR message.
A register number is allocated to each function item, such as control I/O, monitor item, and parameter
functions. The register number of each parameter is indicated wherever the parameter is explained in
this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters. For register numbers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail.
Note 1. A parameter corresponds to one register (one word), so the number of registers of read data
indicates the number of parameters to be read (i.e., the number of consecutive registers beginning with the first register number).
Note 2. The number of bytes of attached data indicates the number of bytes of data read from the
registers attached from that point onwards. The number of registers must equal the number of
bytes divided by two.
D DSR Message
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data
Slave address
Function code (03 Hex)
Register
g
No. of read start data
Number of registers
g
of read data (max.
(
16))
CRC-16 check
7-11
Communications
Chapter 7
D Response
Normal
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Data
Slave address
Number of bytes of attached data
Data of start register
g
MS B
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
Data of next register

g
g
:
n--1
n
CRC-16 check
Error
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
Data
Slave address
Error code
CRC-16 check
Note When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.
H Example of Data Read

In the following example, four-register data (status signal data) is read from register 0020 Hex of the
Inverter with a Slave address of 02.
D DSR Message
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7-12
Data
Slave address
Function code
Register
g
No. of read start data
Number of registers
g
of read data
CRC-16 check
Data
example
(Hex)
02
03
00
20
00
04
45
F0
Communications
Chapter 7
D Response
Normal
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Data
Slave address
Function code
Number of bytes of attached data
Data in register
g
No. 0020
MS B
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
Data in register
g
No. 0021
Data in register
g
No. 0022
Data in register
g
No. 0023
CRC-16 check
Data
example
(Hex)
02
03
08
00
65
00
00
00
00
01
F4
AF
82
Error
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
Data
Slave address
Function code
Error code
CRC-16 check
Data
example
(Hex)
02
83
03
F1
31
7-3-2 Data Write/Broadcast Data Write (Function Code: 10 Hex)

H Settings and Response
To write data to the Inverter, such as control I/O and parameter set value data, issue the following DSR
message.
Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes for 16 registers) can be written per DSR message.
The register number is allocated to each function item, such as control I/O and parameter functions.
The register number of each parameter is indicated wherever the parameter is explained in this
manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters. For register numbers other than those of parameters,
refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations in Details.
Note 1. A parameter corresponds to one register (one word), so the number of registers of write data
indicates the number of parameters to be written (i.e., the number of consecutive registers
beginning with the first register number).
Note 2. The number of bytes of attached data indicates the number of bytes of data written to the
registers attached from that point onwards. The number of registers must equal the number of
bytes divided by two.
7-13
Communications
Chapter 7
D DSR Message
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Data
Slave address
Register
g
No. of write start data
Number of registers
g
of write data (max.
(
16))
g
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB

g
g
:
n--1
n
CRC-16 check
D Response
Normal
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data
Slave address
Register
g
MS B
LSB
MSB
LSB
Number of registers
g
of write data
CRC-16 check
Error
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
Data
Slave address
Error code
CRC-16 check
Note 1. When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.
Note 2. A broadcast message uses the same DSR message format. The Slave address is, however,
always set to 00 and only register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) and register number 0002
Hex (the frequency reference) can be written.
7-14
Communications
Chapter 7
H Example of Data Read

In the following example, two-register data (the RUN command) is written from register 0002 Hex of
the Inverter with a Slave address of 01.
D DSR Message
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Data
Slave address
Function code
Register
g
Number of registers
g
of write data
Data in register
g
No. 0001
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
Data in register
g
No. 0002
CRC-16 check
Data
example
(Hex)
01
10
00
01
00
02
04
00
01
02
58
63
39
D Response
Normal
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data
Data
example
(Hex)
01
10
00
01
00
02
10
08
Data
Data
example
(Hex)
01
90
02
DC
C1
Slave address
Function code
Register
g
Number of registers
g
of write data
CRC-16 check
Error
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
Slave address
Function code
Error code
CRC-16 check
7-15
Communications
Chapter 7
7-3-3 Loop-back Test (Function Code: 08 Hex)

H Settings and Response
The DSR message from the Master is returned as a response. The Inverter does not retrieve or process this data.
The DSR message or normal response for loop-back test use is divided into 8-byte blocks as shown
below. Any data can be set as test data 1 or 2 provided that the number of data items remains changed.
This command is used for checking the status of communications or for dummy communications without detecting any communications time-over.
D DSR Message
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data
Slave address
Test data 1
Test data 2
CRC-16 check
D Response
Normal
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data
Slave address
Test data 1
Test data 2
CRC-16 check
Error
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
Data
Slave address
Error code
CRC-16 check
Note When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.
7-16
Communications
Chapter 7
H Example of Loop-back Test

In the following example, a loop-back test is conducted on the Inverter with a Slave address of 01.
D DSR Message
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data
Data
example
(Hex)
01
08
00
00
A5
37
DA
8D
Data
Data
example
(Hex)
01
08
00
00
A5
37
DA
8D
Data
Data
example
(Hex)
01
88
01
86
50
Slave address
Function code
Test data 1
Test data 2
CRC-16 check
D Response
Normal
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Slave address
Function code
Test data 1
Test data 2
CRC-16 check
Error
Byte No.
1
2
3
4
5
Slave address
Function code
Error code
CRC-16 check
7-17
Communications
7-4
Chapter 7
Enter Command
The Enter command is used for copying parameter set values that have been written
through communications in and after register 0101 Hex of the RAM area to the
EEPROM of the Inverter. This is done so that the EEPROM can maintain the parameter
set values.
By issuing a DSR message to write data, the data is written to the RAM area of the
Inverter. This data will be lost when the Inverter is turned OFF. Issue the Enter command
to store in the EEPROM of the Inverter the parameter set value that has been written
through communications.
Note The Enter command is not accepted while the Inverter is running. Be sure to issue the Enter command while the Inverter is not running.
H DSR Message of Enter Command

The Enter command is issued in response to the DSR message (with a function code of 10 Hex) to
write data.
By writing data 0000 Hex to be sent to register 0900 Hex, the Inverter copies to the EEPROM all
parameter set values that the Inverter has received.
Note 1. Only the parameter constants (in and after register 0101 Hex) are stored in the EEPROM with
the Enter command.
The RUN command (in register No. 0001 Hex) is in the RAM area. The frequency reference
(in register 0002 Hex) or any other data in registers with a number up to 003D Hex is also in the
RAM area. Therefore, the EEPROM does not store these parameters.
Note 2. Data can be written to the EEPROM a maximum of approximately 100,000 times. Therefore,
be sure to reduce the number of Enter commands sent as much as possible.
7-18
Communications
7-5
Chapter 7
Setting the Communications Data

The following description provides information on how to convert the register data (such
as monitor value or parameter set value data) in the communications data block of the
message data (such as DSR and response data).
H Converting the Register Data

The data in each register is sent as 2-byte data.
The data in each register is processed under the following rules and sent in hexadecimal.
D The data is converted to a hexadecimal value based on the minimum unit of

setting of each register as 1.
If the frequency reference is 60 Hz and the minimum unit of setting will be 0.01 Hz,
the data will be converted as follows:
60 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 6000 = 1770 Hex
Note 1. The minimum unit of setting of each parameter is indicated whenever the parameter is
explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters. For registers other than those
of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations in Details.
Note 2. The minimum unit of setting of frequency reference data or frequency monitor data is determined by n152 (register 0198 Hex: RS-422/485 communications frequency reference/monitor unit selection). The unit of setting of each of the three registers below is determined by the
set value in n152. For the units of setting of these constants, refer to the List of Parameters.
The set value in n152 has nothing to do with frequency data items set as parameter constants
(e.g., frequency references 1 through 16, inching frequency reference, maximum frequency,
minimum output frequency, jump frequency).
S Monitor Items
Register 0023: Frequency reference monitor
Register 0024: Output frequency monitor
S Communications-dedicated Register
Register 0002: Frequency reference
In spite of the set value in n152, however, set the maximum frequency to 3000 when the frequency
reference is executed with a broadcast message. In this case, the Inverter rounds off any value
less than 0.01 Hz.
Note 3. There are parameters that make setting unit changes when the values are increased with the
Digital Operator. The smaller units are, however, used for communications in such cases. For
example, the value in n083 (register 0153 Hex: jump frequency 1) will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or
over. The value 0.01 Hz is always 1 Hex for communications.
If the jump frequency is 100.0 Hz, the minimum unit of setting will be 0.01 Hz and the
data will be converted as follows:
100.0 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 10000 = 2710 Hex
7-19
Communications
Chapter 7
D Negative Values Expressed in 2s Complements

If the frequency reference bias in n061 is --100%, the minimum unit of setting will be
1% and the data will be converted as follows:
100 (%)/1 (%) = 100 = 0064 Hex
2s complement: FF9C Hex
Bit reversed.
1 is added.
Note Whether the data is positive or negative is determined by the parameter set value.
The MSB of negative-value data is always set to 1. Data with its MSB set to 1 is not, however,
always negative-value data.
For example, the setting range of the n083 parameter (register 0153 Hex: jump frequency 1) is
within a range from 0.00 to 400.00 Hz. If the jump frequency is 400.0 Hz, the data is obtained from
the following formula and its MSB will be 1.
400.0 (Hz)/0.001 (Hz) = 4000 = 9C40 Hex
D Setting All Unused Bits to 0

Bits 11 through 15 of the RUN command (register 0001 Hex) are unused. When writing the data, be
sure to set all of these bits to 0.
These bits when read are set to 0.
D No Data Settings in Unused Registers

Registers described not used may be used for internal processing. Do not write any data to such
registers.
7-20
Communications
7-6
Chapter 7
Register Number Allocations in Detail

The following description provides information on register numbers allocated to the
Inverter and the meanings of the registers. As for the register numbers of the parameters
(n001 through n179), refer to Section 10 List of Parameters and the description of each
of these parameters wherever explained in this manual.
7-6-1 I/O Function

H Communications with a Single Slave with Addresses 01 to 32
(01 to 20 Hex)
Read/Write
Register No.
(Hex)
0000
0001
0002
Function
Not used.
RUN command
Frequency reference
0003
V/f gain
0004 to 0008
0009
000A to 000F
Not used.
Inverter output
Not used.
Description
--Refer to the table below.
Set the frequency reference in the unit according to
the set value in n152.
Set on condition that 100% is 1000 within a range
from 2.0 to 200.0% (20 to 2000). (See note 1.)
---
Note 1. The V/f gain is a rate to be multiplied by the output voltage obtained from V/f operation. If 1000
(03E8 Hex) is set, the multiplication rate will be 1.
Note 2. When the above registers are read, values that are set through communications will be read.
For example, when the RUN command (register 0001) is read, the control input in the register
that was previously set through communications will be returned. This is not a value monitored through the input signal terminal.
D RUN Command (Register 0001 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 to 15
Function
RUN command (1: RUN)
Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse)
External fault (External fault EF0)
Fault reset (1: Fault reset)
Multi-function input 1 (1: ON)
Not used.
7-21
Communications
Chapter 7
Note There is an OR relationship between input from the control terminals and input through communications. Therefore, if multi-function inputs of this register are set to forward/stop and reverse/
stop, it is possible to execute the RUN command through the multi-function inputs. These settings
are not, however, recommended because these settings establish two command lines.
D Inverter Output (Register 0009 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3 to 15
Function
Multi-function contact output (1: ON)
Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)
Not used.
Note The settings will be enabled if multi-function outputs 1 through 3 in n057 through n059 are set to
18 for communications output. Then the corresponding output terminal will be turned ON and
OFF through communications.
H Broadcast Message with Slave Address: 00 (00 Hex)

Register No.
(Hex)
0000
0001
0002
Function
Not used.
RUN command
Frequency reference
0003 to 000F
Not used.
Write
Description
Set the frequency reference based on the maximum
frequency as 30,000.
---
Note 1. Data can be written to registers 0001 and 0002 only.

Note 2. No data can be written to multi-function input.
Note 3. The unit of setting of the broadcast message is different from that in the DSR message to communicate with a single Slave.
D RUN Command (Register 0001 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4 to 15
Function
RUN command (1: RUN)
Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse)
External fault (1: External fault EF0)
Fault reset (1: Fault reset)
Not used.
7-6-2 Monitor Functions

Register No.
(Hex)
0020
0021
0022
7-22
Function
Status signal
Fault status 1
Data link status
Description
Refer to the following corresponding table.
Communications
Register No.
(Hex)
0023
0024
0025 to 0026
0027
0028
0029
002A
002B
002C
002D
002E
002F to 0030
0031
0032
0033 to 0034
0035
Chapter 7
Function
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Not used.
Output current
Output voltage
Fault status 2 (See note.)
Warning status (See note.)
Input terminal status
Inverter status 1
Output terminal status
Inverter status 2 (See note.)
Not used.
Main circuit DC voltage
Torque reference
0036
0037
Not used.
Accumulated operating time
(See note.)
Not used.
Output power
0038
PID feedback
0039
PID input
003A
PID output
003B to 003C
003D
003E to 00FF
Not used.
Communications error
Not used.
Description
According to the set value in n152.
According to the set value in n152.
--Read based on 1 A as 10.
Read based on 1 V as 1.
--Read based on 1 V as 1.
Read based on 1% as 1 and the rated motor
torque is 100%.
--Read based on 1 [h] as 1.
--Read based on 1 W as 1. Cannot be monitored in
vector control mode.
Read based on 1% as 10 and a value equivalent to
the maximum frequency as 100%.
Read based on 1% as 10 and a value equivalent
to the maximum frequency as 100%.
Read based on 1% as 10 and a value equivalent
to the maximum frequency as 100%.
--Refer to the following corresponding table.
---
Note The fault status 2, warning status, Inverter status 2, and accumulated operating time functions are
provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
D Status Signal (Register 0020 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 to 15
Function
During RUN (1: During RUN)
Forward/reverse operation (1: Reverse operation)
Inverter ready (1: Ready)
Fault (1: Fault)
Data setting error (1: Error)
Not used.
7-23
Communications
Chapter 7
D Fault Status 1 (Register 0021 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function
OC
OV
OL2
OH
Not used.
Not used.
FBL
EFj, STP
Bit No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Function
Fj
OL1
OL3
Not used.
UV1
UV2
CE
OPR
Note When a fault results, the corresponding bit will be set to 1.
D Data Link Status (Register 0022 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1 to 2
3
4
5 to 15
Function
Data writing (1: Writing)
Not used.
Upper and lower limit error (1: Error): Outside set range
Verify error (1: Error): Same as OPEj.
Not used.
D Fault Status 2 (Register 0029 Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6 to 15
7-24
Function
SC
GF
PF
LF
RH
RR
Not used.
Communications
Chapter 7
D Warning Status (Register 002A Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 to 11
12
13
14
15
Function
STP (Emergency stop)
SER
EF
BB
OL3
OH
OV
UV
FAN
Not used.
OH3
FBL
STP (Emergency stop)
Not used.
D Input Terminal Status (Register 002B Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 to 15
Function
Multi-function input terminal 1 (S1) (1: ON)
Not used.
7-25
Communications
Chapter 7
D Inverter Status 1 (Register 002C Hex)

Bit No.
Function
0
1
2
3
4
During RUN (1: During RUN)

Zero speed (1: Zero speed)
Frequency agree (1: Frequency agree)
Warning (Nonfatal error) (1: Warning)
Frequency detection 1 (1: Output frequency n095)
Frequency detection 2 (1: Output frequency n095)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Inverter ready (1: Ready)

UV (1: UV)
Base block (1: Base block)
Frequency reference mode (1: Other than communications)
RUN command mode (1: Other than communications)
Overtorque detection (1: Overtorque detection)
Not used.
Fault retry (1: Fault retry)
Fault (1: Fault)
Communications time-over: No normal communications for 2 s or more
(1: Communications time-over detecting)
D Output Terminal Status (Register 002D Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3 to 15
Function
Multi-function contact output terminal MA (1: ON)
Multi-function photocoupler output terminal 1 (P1) (1: ON)
Multi-function photocoupler output terminal 2 (P2) (1: ON)
Not used.
D Inverter Status 2 (Register 002E Hex)

Bit No.
0
1 to 15
Function
Frequency reference loss
Not used.
D Communications Error (Register 003D Hex)

Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 to 15
7-26
Function
CRC error (1: Error)
Data length error (1: Error)
Not used.
Parity error (1: Error)
Overrun error (1: Error)
Framing error (1: Error)
Communications time-over (1: Error)
Not used.
Communications
7-7
Chapter 7
Communications Error Codes

The Inverter will detect a communications error if normal communications fail or a message data error occurs.
The Inverter returns a response that consists of the Slave address, function code with
the MSB set to 1, error code, and CRC-16 check block when the communications error is
detected.
When the Master receives an error code, refer to the following table for troubleshooting
and remedying the error.
H Errors and Remedies

Error
code
01 Hex
Name
Function code error
02 Hex
Register number
error
03 Hex
Data number error
21 Hex
Data setting
g error
Probable cause
Remedy
The function code is set to a code other than 03,

08, or 10 Hex.
The specified register number has not been
registered.
An attempt was made to read the register of the
Enter command.
The number of write or read registers is not within
a range from 1 to 16 (0001 and 0010 Hex).
The number of registers of the DSR message
multiplied by two does not coincide with the
number of bytes of the attached data.
The write data is not within the permissible range.
The data set is illegal and causes an OPE (OPE1
through OPE9) error.
Check and correct

the function code.
Check and correct
the register
number.
g
Check and correct

the number of
registers or the
number of bytes.
Check the display
p y on
the
h Digital
Di i l Operator
O
and correct the data.
7-27
Communications
Error
code
22 Hex
Name
Write mode error
Chapter 7
Probable cause
The Inverter in operation received a DSR
message to write data to a parameter that
prohibits any data to be written while the Inverter
is running.
The Enter command was received while the
Inverter is running.
The Inverter detecting UV received a DSR
message to write data.
The Inverter detecting UV received the Enter
command.
The Inverter detecting F04 for an initialization
memory fault received a DSR message other
than that for parameter initialization (with n001
set to 8 or 9).
The Inverter processing data written received a
DSR message to write data.
A DSR message to a read-only register was

received.
7-28
Remedy
Write the data after
stopping the
Inverter.
Write the data after

restoring the UV
(main circuit
undervoltage)
status.
Turn the Inverter
OFF and ON after
parameter
initialization with
n001 set to 8 or 9.
Wait for an elapse
period equivalent to
24 bits plus a
minimum of 10 ms to
issue the message
after a response is
received from the
Inverter.
Check and correct
the register number.
Communications
7-8
Chapter 7
Self-diagnostic Test
The Inverter incorporates a self-diagnostic test function that checks whether
RS-422/485 communications are functioning.
If the Inverter has a communications failure, take the steps provided below to check
whether the communications function of the Inverter is normal.
H Self-diagnostic Test Steps

1. Set the Parameter
S Set n056 for multi-function input 7 (S7) to 35 through the Digital Operator.
2. Turn OFF the Inverter and Wire the Terminal
S Turn OFF the Inverter and wire the following control terminals. At this time, make sure that all other
circuit terminals are open.
Set SW1 to NPN.
Connect S7 and SC.

Connect R+ and S+.
Connect R-- and S--.
3. Turn ON the Inverter and Check the Display

S Turn ON the Inverter.
S Check the display on the Digital Operator.
Normal
The display is normal with no error code displayed.
Fault
The display shows CE (communications time-over) or CAL (communications standby). In
either case, the communications circuit of the Inverter is broken. Replace the Inverter.
7-29
Communications
7-9
Chapter 7
Communications with Programmable Controller

The Communications Board can be mounted to OMRONs SYSMAC CS1-series or
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit. The Inverter can then be controlled by the Communications
Board through its RS-422/485 port.
The communications protocol can be set by using the protocol macro function. Therefore, there is no need to write a ladder program for the communications protocol when
the function is used.
The following description provides information on how to control the Inverter through
communications with the SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE Communications
Board by using the protocol macro function.
The RS-422/485 communications of the 3G3MV Inverter conform to the MODBUS
Communications Protocol and this protocol cannot be used together with CompoBus/D
communications protocol or any other communications protocol. Only 3G3MV-series
Units can be connected as Slaves.
7-9-1 Available Programmable Controller and Peripheral

Device
H OMRONs SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE Programmable
Controller
The Communications Board can be mounted to the following SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/
HE CPU Unit.
Series
SYSMAC CS1 Series
SYSMAC
C200HX/HG/HE
7-30
CPU model
High-speed models: CS1H-CPU67-E, CS1H-CPU66-E, CS1H-CPU65-E,
CS1H-CPU64-E, and CS1H-CPU63-E
Low-speed models: CS1G-CPU45-E, CS1G-CPU44-E, CS1G-CPU43-E, and
CS1G-CPU42-E
C200HX-CPU34-E/44-E/54-E/64-E/34-ZE/44-ZE/54-ZE/64-ZE/65-ZE/85-ZE
C200HG-CPU33-E/43-E/53-E/63-E/33-ZE/43-ZE/53-ZE/63-ZE
C200HE-CPU32-E/42-E/32-ZE/42-ZE
Communications
Chapter 7
H Communications Board
The following Communications Boards are available.
Note The RS-232C port can be used if an RS-422/485 conversion adapter is installed. For ease of wiring, however, it is recommended that the RS-422/485 port be used. The following information is
for the RS-422/485 port.
Series
SYSMAC CS1 Series
SYSMAC
C200HX/HG/HE
Communications Board
model
CS1W-SCB41
Mounting method
As an inner board of
the CPU Unit
C200HW-COM06-EV1
Mounted to an optional
slot of the CPU Unit
Note Make sure that the
model number has the
suffix EV1, otherwise
the CRC-16 check code
cannot be used.
Specifications
One RS-232C port
One RS-422/485 port
Protocol macro function
One RS-232C port
One RS-422/485 port
H Peripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices are required to use the protocol macro function.
Name
CX-Protocol
Model
WS02-PSTC1-E
Specification
The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro
function of the SYSMAC CS1 Series.
Personal computer environment
Personal
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer
computer
CPU
Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz
Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster
OS
Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98
Memory
Minimum: 16 MB
Recommended: 24 MB min.
Hard disk
Minimum: Available space of 24 MB
Recommended: Available space of 50 MB
Monitor
SVGA or better
Drive
FDD: 1 or more
CD-ROM drive: 1 or more
7-31
Communications
Name
Protocol
Support
pp Tool
Chapter 7
Model
WS01-PSTF1-E
Specification
The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro
function of the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE.
Personal computer environment
Personal
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer
computer
CPU
Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz
Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster
OS
Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98
Memory
Minimum: 16 MB
Recommended: 24 MB min.
Hard disk
Minimum: Available space of 24 MB
Recommended: Available space of 50 MB
Monitor
SVGA or better
Drive
FDD: 1 or more
CD-ROM drive: 1 or more
H Manuals
Refer to the following manuals for the peripheral devices and support software in detail.
Product
SYSMAC CS1-series Programmable Controllers
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers
CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board
C200HW-COM06-EV1 Communications Board
WS02-PSTC1-E CX-Protocol
WS01-PSTF1-E Protocol Support Tool
Catalog No.
Operation Manual: W339
Programming Manual: W340
Installation Manual: W302
Operation Manual: W303
W336
W304
W344
W319
7-9-2 Wiring the Communications Line

H Connector Pin Arrangements of CS1W-SCB41 and
C200HW-COM06-EV1
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Frame
7-32
Code
SDA
SDB
NC
NC
NC
RDA
NC
RDB
NC
FG
Signal name
Send data (--)
Send data (+)
------Recv data (--)
--Recv data (+)
--FG
I/O
Output
Output
------Input
--Input
-----
Communications
Chapter 7
H Standard Connection Diagram

D RS-485 (2-wire)
3G3MV
CodePin No.
Shielded line
Code
RS-422
/485
Interface
Frame
Control
circuit terminal block
(communications
terminals)
3G3MV
9-pin, D-sub connector

(Cable side: Male)
Code
Control
(communications
terminals)
Note Be sure to set the terminal resistance of only the Inverter at each end to ON and that any other
Inverter to OFF. Refer to page 2-19, Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance for details.
D RS-422 (4-wire)
CodePin No. Shielded line
B500-AL001 Link Adapter

Pin No. Code
RS-422/485
Interface
Frame
9-pin, D-sub connector
(Cable side: Male)
Code Pin No.
3G3MV
Shielded line
Code
RS-422
Interface
Control
(communications
terminals)
Code
Pin No.
3G3MV
Shielded line
Code
Control
(communications
terminals)
Note Turn the terminal resistance of all the Inverters to ON for RS-422 communications. Refer to page
2-19, Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance for details.
7-33
Communications
Chapter 7
7-9-3 Outline of Protocol Macro Function

H Protocol Macro Function
The protocol macro function makes it possible to customize a communications protocol in order to
create a macro according to the specifications of the serial communications port of the general-purpose peripheral device.
The protocol macro function is mainly used for the following jobs.
Creation of message communications frame.
Creation of Send & Recv procedures for message communications frame.
Note This manual uses the terms message, DSR message, and response to express the communications data exchanged.
S Message: A DSR message or response.
S DSR Message: A message sent by the Master for instructions to the Inverter.
S Response: A message that the Inverter returns in compliance with a DSR message from the Master.
D Creating a Message
The message can be created according to the communications specifications of the general-purpose
peripheral device (Inverter) as a counterpart.
A DSR message can include variables to set data in the I/O memory (such as data memory) of the
CPU Unit or write response data to the I/O memory.
Each component of a message is in the memory of the Communications Board. Therefore, the CPU
Unit can just execute the PMCR instruction to send or receive the data. Therefore, there is no need to
write ladder programs for the communications protocol.
CPU Unit
Communications
Board
3G3MV
DSR message
PMCR
instruction
Send
Reception
7-34
Response
Communications
Chapter 7
D Step to Send and Receive Messages

Sending and receiving messages as a single step includes step-type commands, such as Send, Recv,
Send & Recv, and Wait commands.
The step can be finished or switched to another step according to the result of the step.
CPU Unit
Communications
Board
PMCR
instruction
3G3MV
Step 0
Next process
according to
the result.
To step n according to the

result.
H Configuration of Protocol Macro Function

The protocol consists of one or more sequences.
A sequence is an independent set of actions to perform together with a general-purpose peripheral
device, such as an Inverter. The RUN command and the frequency reference are given to the Inverter
and the status of the Inverter is read in a single sequence, for example.
A sequence consists of one or more steps.
D Sequence
When repeating actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter and read
the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions can be registered as one sequence, or more than
one if necessary. In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with all actions registered as a
single sequence.
A sequence may include the following parameters.
7-35
Communications
Parameter
Transmission control
parameter
Link word
Monitor time
Response notify
method
Chapter 7
Description
Set the method of control, such as flow control.
Note Select only model control for communications with the 3G3MV.
Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and
Communications Board.
Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown without such an area set.
Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr,
and Tfs.
Note Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3MV.
A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable
Controller.
Note Select notify by scan for communications with the 3G3MV.
3G3MV
CPU Unit
Step 00
PMCR
instruction
DSR message
(Write the RUN command and
frequency reference.)
Response
Step 01
DSR message
Inverter status read
Sequence 000
Response
(Inverter status)
D Step
In a single step, a DSR message is sent and a response for the DSR message is received. A step may
not include a response if it is a broadcast message.
In the case of repetitive actions to issue the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter
and read the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions to give the RUN command and frequency
reference is one step. The reason is that these register numbers are consecutive and can be sent with
a single DSR message. The action to read the status of the Inverter is another step.
A step includes a command and a maximum of two messages.
The above example uses the Send & Recv command. The DSR message and response are both messages.
A step may include the following parameters.
7-36
Communications
Chapter 7
Parameter
Description
Command
The Send, Send & Recv, Wait, Flush, Open (ER-ON), or Close
(ER-OFF) command is set.
Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with the
Send & Recv command used. The Send command is used
for a broadcast message.
Message
g
Send message
A DSR message is set for the Send command used.
Recv message
A response is set for the Recv command.
Send & Recv message A DSR message and response are set for the Send & Recv
command.
Recv matrix
If there are two or more responses for the Send or Send & Recv
command, the next process is selected per response.
Repeat counter
The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range
from 0 to 255.
It is possible to change messages by making use of the number
(N).
Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with
this function used for enabling three Slaves to repeat the
same process.
Number of retries
The number of times to retry the command can be set within a
range from 0 to 9 only when the Send & Recv command is used.
Note It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger.
Send Wait Time
The waiting time until data is sent with the Send or Send & Recv
command executed.
Response Write (with operand specified) Determines whether or not to write the reception data in the
response.
Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example is shown with
this function used for writing the Inverter status to the
memory.
Next process
Determines which step is to be processed next or finishes the
operation after the step is finished normally.
Error processing
Determines which step is to be processed next or finishes the
operation, if the step has an error.
7-37
Communications
Chapter 7
H Data Created by Protocol Support Tool

A project file is used by the Protocol Support Tool to create and control data.
A project file consists of the following data.
Single project file
Protocol list
Protocol name
A maximum of 20 protocols
(A maximum of 1,000
sequences per project)
Protocol name
Protocol name
Trace list
PC
Protocol name
(Single protocol)
A maximum of 60
sequences/protocol
The first sequence number
and last sequence number
are specified by each
protocol.
Sequence 000/Sequence name

Send message list
Message name
Message name
Recv message list
Message name
A maximum of
300 messages
Message name
Recv matrix
Matrix name
Matrix name
Sequence #jjj
A maximum of
100 matrixes
Step 00
Step 01
A maximum of 16 steps
Step 15
Note The standard system protocol incorporated by the Communications Board cannot be edited or
transferred. To make use of the standard system protocol, copy it to the project file and edit it.
In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File, an example to create a new project file is shown without making
use of the standard system protocol.
7-9-4 Creating a Project File

The following description provides information about how to create a project file to issue the RUN command and frequency reference and read the Inverter status.
H Design
Select from I/O items, monitor items, and parameters the data to be exchanged according to the
application. Then consider what sequence is required by using the protocol macro function.
Example: Writes control input items (such as the RUN command and multi-function input) of the
Inverter and frequency reference, monitors the control output (such as error output and RUN out-
7-38
Communications
Chapter 7
put) of the Inverter, and monitors the Inverter status.

Three Inverters with Slave addresses from 01 to 03 are installed for communications.
D Checking the Register Numbers

In the above example, the following three registers are required.
Control Input:
Register 0001 Hex for RUN command
Frequency Reference:
Register 0002 Hex
Control Output:
Register 002C Hex for Inverter status
D Memory Allocations
The PMCR instruction sends each Slave the data in consecutive words specified by the operand and
beginning with the first word (S), and writes in the memory area beginning with the first word (D) the
data received.
The following memory allocations are made in the above example.
SYSMAC CS1-series or C200HX/HG/HE
Programmable Controllers
Communications
Board
3G3MV
C: Control data (See note.)
Sequence No.
000 to 999 (BCD)
No. of data items send in accordance with PMCR

instruction (000A)
No. of Slaves (0003)

First Slave address (0001)
RUN command to Slave 1
Frequency reference to Slave 1
Second Slave address (0002)
Third Slave address (0003)
Communications port
1: Port A
2: Port B
Data
No. of data items received in accordance with

PMCR instruction (0003)
Note
Control data on the SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE is indicated. The
SYSMAC CS1 Series uses different control data.
Slave 1 Inverter status

H Creating a New Project and Protocol

1. Select New from the File in the Menu Bar or click on the New icon with the left button of the mouse to
create a new project.
2. If CX-Protocol is used, set the PC name, PC model, and network type according to the actual conditions.
7-39
Communications
Chapter 7
Note 1. The network type refers to the type of the network connected to the Support Software and it
does not refer to the communications configuration between the Programmable Controller
and the 3G3MV Inverter.
Note 2. The above settings will not be displayed if the Protocol Support Tool is used.
3. Double-click on New Project with the left button of the mouse to display Protocol List.
4. Click on Protocol List with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right
button of the mouse.
5. Select Create Protocol.
H Creating a Sequence
1. Click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse. Then click on a blank space with the right
2. Select Create communication Sequence.
The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the sequence in the table.
*
#
000
Communicat
Link word
ion
sequence
Inverter I/O
--Send & Recv
Control
Set (Setting
required)
Response
Scan
Timer Tr
0.5
Timer
Tfr
0.5
Timer
Tfs
0.5
#
Sequence number. The sequence number is automatically set.
Communication Sequence
The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.
Link Word
Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and Communications Board.
Note In this example, the link word is specified by the operand of the PMCR instruction. Therefore, no
link word is set here.
Control
Set the control method, such as flow control.
Note Select only model control for communications with the 3G3MV.
Response
A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable Controller.
Note Select notify by scan for communications with the 3G3MV.
7-40
Communications
Chapter 7
Timer Tr
Timer Tfr
Timer Tfs
Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and Tfs. The following timing chart shows the meaning of each monitor.
Be sure to set the periods according to the application.
The step will be retried if the step is not completed within the monitor periods. An error will occur if the
step is not completed within the monitor time again.
Note Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3MV.
Send & Recv
Monitored for Tr period.
Monitored for Tfs

period.
Monitored for Tfr

period.
Ts: Send wait time set per step. Nothing is sent during this period.
Tfs: Monitors the completion of the data sent. If the data transmission is not finished within this
period, the data will be re-transmitted.
Tr: Monitors the response to be received. If the response is not returned within this period, the
response will be re-transmitted.
Tfr: Monitors the reception completion of the response. If the response transmission is not finished
within this period, the response will be re-transmitted.
Note If the Tr period is too long, the time required to detect a communications error will be longer,
during which the Inverter cannot be controlled. Therefore, be sure to set an appropriate
period.
H Creating a Step
1. Double-click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse.
2. Click on New Sequence with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right
3. Select Create Step.
The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the step in the table.
*
Step
j 00
j 01
Repeat
Command
Reset/R
(1)
Reset/R
(1)
Send &
Receive
Send &
Receive
Retry
Send
wait
---
---
Send
message
Input
send
Status
Recv
message
Response
Input
Yes
response
Read
Yes
response
Next
Error
Next
Abort
End
Abort
Step
Step number. The step number is automatically set.
7-41
Communications
Chapter 7
Repeat
The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255.
It is possible to change messages by making use of the number (N).
Note In this example, the same message is sent to three Slaves with addresses different to each other.
Therefore, the number is set to 3 in word S + 1. The number of Slaves is specified by the operand.
Therefore, select Channel, use the Edit command to set Data Address to Operand, and set 0N +
1 in order to select word S + 1.
In the above table, Reset means that the repeat counter must be reset first in the step.
Command
Set the commands, such as Send, Recv, and Send & Recv.
Note Only the Send & Recv command is used for communications with the 3G3MV except for sending
broadcast messages, in which case the Send & Receive command is used.
Retry
Set the number of times to retry the command within a range from 0 to 9.
Note It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger. If a transmission error occurs due to
noise, the transmission of the command will be retried. If the number is set to 3, an error will be
detected if the transmission fails three times.
Send Wait
The waiting time until the data is sent.
Note For communications with the 3G3MV, if data is repeatedly transmitted to the same Slave, set the
waiting time to 20 ms or more.
In this example, the DSR message is sent to Slaves 1, 2, and 3 one by one. Therefore, no send
wait time is set.
Send Message and Recv Message

Set the labels of the DSR message and response to be used.
Note Make these settings after deciding the labels in Send Message Detail Settings and Recv Message Detail Settings.
Response
Determine whether or not to write the reception data in the response.
Note Always set this parameter to Yes for communications with 3G3MV.
Next
Determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation after the step finishes normally.
Note In this example, step 00 is set to Next and step 01 is set to END because the sequence completes
by executing steps 00 and 01.
Error
If the step has an error, determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation.
Note In this example, the parameter will be set to Abort to interrupt the sequence if an error occurs.
7-42
Communications
Chapter 7
H Send Message Detail Settings

1. Click on Send Message List with the left button of the mouse, and then click on a blank space with
the right button of the mouse.
2. Select Create Send Message. The following table will appear. Set the send message in the table.
*
Message
Name
j Input send
Header
<h>
Terminator
<t>
j Status
Check
code <c>
~CRC-16
(65535)
(2Byte
BIN)
~CRC-16
(65535)
(2Byte
BIN)
Length
<l>
(0) (1Byte
BIN)
Address <a>
Data
~(R
(3N+2), 1) <a> + [10] + [00] +

[01] + [00] + [02] +
 (R (3N + 3), 4) +
<c>
~(R (3N+2), 1) <a> + [03] + [00] +
[2C] + [00] + [01] +
<c>
Message Name
The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.
Note Set the label in the send message box in the table shown under Creating a Step.
Header <h>
Terminator <t>
Set the header and terminator.
Note No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Therefore, set both to
None.
Check Code <c>

Set the check code.
Note The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Select the CRC-16 check
code and set the default value to 65535.
Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN for date type.
Length <l>
Set the length of the data.
Note All communications with the 3G3MV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN. Select
No for reading data because there is no data to be read.
Address <a>
Set the addresses of the Slaves.
Note In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data
from those locations.
The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable Reverse, otherwise
the data is read from the LSB. Then click on Edit Variable with the left button of the mouse.
7-43
Communications
Chapter 7
Select Read R () and set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number (N) of times to
repeat the step.
Set Edit Length to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to 0N + 1.
Data
Set the DSR message in details.
DSR Message Requesting that the RUN Command and Frequency Reference be Written
The DSR message to write data to two registers from register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) consists
of the following items.
CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Next register data
Set with variables
Start register data
Number of bytes of attached data (set with <l>)
Number of write data registers: 2
Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)
Function code (Write 10)
Slave address (Set with <a>)
Set data: <a> + [10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02] + + (R (3N + 3), 4) + <c>
<a>
The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.
[10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02]
Set the constants contained in the DSR message.
Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.

The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of bytes of the succeeding data (R(3N + 3), 4). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.
(R(3N+3), 4)
The Inverters actual data to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the
operand. Set Data to 3N + 3 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from S + 3, S +
6, and S + 9.
Set Edit Length to 0N + 4 so that it will be set to four bytes.
<c>
The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the Insert icon. All the
data including the address data before the check code is operated. Mark all the items if the Protocol
Support Tool is used. The check code is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.
7-44
Communications
Chapter 7
DSR Message to Read the Inverter Status

The DSR message to read the Inverter status from register 002C Hex consists of the following items.

Number of read data registers: 1
Read start register number (Inverter status: 002C)
Function code (Read 03)
Set data: <a> + [03] + [00] + [2C] + [00] + [01] + <c>

Set the address data, constant data, and check code data.
H Recv Message Detail Settings

1. With the left button of the mouse, click on Receive Message List. Then click on a blank space with
the right button of the mouse.
2. Select Create Receive Message.
The following table will appear. Set the Receive message in the table.
*
Message
Header
<h>
Terminator
<t>
j Input
response
j Read
response
Check code
Length
<c>
<l>
~CRC-16
(65535)
(2Byte BIN)
~CRC-16
(0) (1Byte
(65535)
BIN)
(2Byte BIN)
Address
<a>
~(R (3N+2),
1)
~(R (3N+2),
1)
Data
<a> + [10] + [00] +
[01] + [00] + [02] +
<c>
<a> + [03] + + (W
(1N + 1), 2) + <c>
Message
The label (name) of the response. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.
Note Set the label in the Recv message box in the table shown under Creating a Step.
Header <h>
Terminator <t>
Set the header and terminator.
Note No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Therefore, set both to
None.
Check Code <c>

Set the check code.
Note The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Select the CRC-16 check
code and set the initial value to 65535.
Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN as the data type.
Length <l>
Set the length of the data.
Note All communications with the 3G3MV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN. Select
No for reading data because there is no data to be read.
7-45
Communications
Chapter 7
Address <a>
Set the addresses of the Slaves.
Note In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data
from those locations.
The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable Reverse, otherwise
the data will be read from the LSB. Then click on Edit Variable with the left button of the mouse.
Select Read R () and set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number (N) of times to
repeat the step.
Set Edit Length to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to 0N + 1.
Data
Set the expected response in details.
Response to the RUN Command and Frequency Reference
The response to the DSR message written consists of the following items.

Number of write data registers: 2
Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)
Set data: <a> + [10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02] + <c>

<a>
The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.
[10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02]
Set the constants contained in the response.
Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.
<c>
The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the Insert icon. All the
data including the address data before the check code is used. Mark all the items if the Protocol
Support Tool is used. The check code is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.
Response to the Inverter Status Read
The response to the DSR message to request the Inverter status in register 002C Hex consists of the
following items.

Inverter status data (Set with variable)
Number of bytes of attached data (set with <l>)
Set data: <a> + [03] + + (W (1N + 1), 2) + <c>

<a., [03], <c>
The address data, constant data, and check code data are the same as the above.
7-46
Communications
Chapter 7
<l>
The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of
bytes of the succeeding data (W(1N + 1), 2). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.
(W(1N + 1), 2)
The Inverters actual data is to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the operand. Set Data to 1N + 1 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from D + 3, D + 6, and D +
9.
Set Edit Length to 0N + 2 so that it will be set to two bytes.
7-9-5 Ladder Program

Transfer the created protocol to the Communications Board.
The following example describes how to control the Inverter with this protocol.
Before using this program in your system, be sure to check the word and data memory allocations and
change them if necessary so that there will be no word or data memory duplication.
This program will stop all communications if a communications error or fault occurs. Be sure to set
n151 for communications time-over detection selection to 0 through 2 so that the system will stop with
time-over detection.
H Memory Allocations
D Starting Communications and Status Signals
Word
00000
00001
00002
Functions common to all Slaves

Inverter control communications (continued when set to ON)
Communications error output (on hold when a communications error or fault
occurs)
Communications fault reset
D Inverter Control Input (Register 0001 RUN Command)

Word
00100
00101
00102
00103
00104
00105
00106
00107
00108
00109
00110
00111
00112
00113
00114
00115
Slave 1 function
RUN command
Forward/Reverse
External fault
Fault reset
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Word
00200
00201
00202
00203
00204
00205
00206
00207
00208
00209
00210
00211
00212
00213
00214
00215
Slave 2 function
RUN command
Forward/Reverse
External fault
Fault reset
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Word
00300
00301
00302
00303
00304
00305
00306
00307
00308
00309
00310
00311
00312
00313
00314
00315
Slave 3 function
RUN command
Forward/Reverse
External fault
Fault reset
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
Always set to 0.
7-47
Communications
Chapter 7
D Frequency Reference of Inverter (Register 0002 Frequency Reference)

DM
D0001
D0002
D0003
Function
Slave 1 frequency reference
D Inverter Control Output (Register 002C Inverter Status)

Word
01100
01101
01102
01103
01104
01105
01106
01107
01108
01109
01110
01111
01112
01113
01114
01115
Slave 1 function
During RUN
Zero speed
Frequency agree
Warning (Nonfatal error)
Inverter ready
UV
Base block
Frequency reference
mode
RUN command mode
Overtorque detection
0 (Not used.)
Fault retry
Fault
Communications timeover
Word
01200
01201
01202
01203
01204
01205
01206
01207
01208
01209
01210
01211
01212
01213
01214
01215
Slave 2 function
During RUN
Zero speed
Frequency agree
Inverter ready
UV
Base block
Frequency reference
mode
RUN command mode
0 (Not used.)
Fault retry
Fault
Word
01300
01301
01302
01303
01304
01305
01306
01307
01308
01309
01310
01311
01312
01313
01314
01315
Slave 3 function
During RUN
Zero speed
Frequency agree
Inverter ready
UV
Base block
Frequency reference
mode
RUN command mode
0 (Not used.)
Fault retry
Fault
D Area Used by Operand of PMCR Instruction

Control Data: C
Area
Note
Communications port
A selected
7-48
Sequence 000 set
Control data on the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE

is indicated. The SYSMAC CS1 Series uses
different control data.
Communications
Chapter 7
Send Data: S
DM
D1000
D1001
D1002
D1003
D1004
D1005
D1006
D1007
D1008
D1009
D1010
Area
000A (Number of send data items: 10) (See note 1.)
0003 (Number of Slaves)
0001 (Slave 1 address)
Recv data: D
DM
D2000
D2001
D2002
D2003
Area
0003 (Number of Recv data items: 3) (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the number of send data items in Hex to the number of words of D10001 through D1010
(10).
Note 2. The number of words of D2001 through D2003 (3) is written in Hex the number of Recv data
items.
7-49
Communications
Chapter 7
H Ladder Program
Protocol
Macro
Execution
Flag
Note
Communications
Port Abort Flag
7-50
Communications
Port Enabled
Flag
The Communications Port Enabled

Flag will be required if the SYSMAC
CS1 Series is used.
Communications
Chapter 7
7-9-6 Communications Response Time

The communications response times for communications with an Inverter via the RS-422/485 port of an
OMRON-made Communications Board are detailed below. Use this information as a reference when
deciding the number of Slaves to be connected to one network, and when considering the timing of input
and output signals.
H Communications Time for One Message

A wide variety of programs for RS-422/485 communications can be created using the protocol macro
function. The communications times will vary according to the contents of the program.
In general, the communications time for one message can be calculated using the following formula.
Communications time = [Number of bytes in DSR message 10 (See note 1.) (1/baud rate)
1,000 (ms)] + [Number of bytes in response 10 (1/baud rate) 1,000 (ms)] + [24 (1/baud rate)
1,000 (ms)] + send wait time setting n156 (ms) + protocol macro waiting time (See note 2.) (ms)
Note 1. The reason that the number of bytes in the DSR message and response is multiplied by 10 is
because both the start bit and the stop bit require one bit each.
(1 byte = 8 bits) + (start bit: 1 bit) + (stop bit: 1 bit) = 10 bits
Note 2. With RS-422/485 communications, set at least 20 ms as the protocol macro waiting time.
D Calculation Example
The communications time required for one Slave in the protocol macro created in 7-9-7 Creating a Project File, can be calculated according to the following formula. (Baud rate = 19,200 bps.)
Communications time = [(DSR message to write data (13 bytes) + DSR message to read (8 bytes))
10 (1/19,200) 1,000 (ms)] + [(write response (8 bytes) + read response (7 bytes)) 10
(1/19,200) 1,000 (ms)] + [24 (1/19,200) 1,000 (ms) 2] + [10 (ms) 2] + [20 (ms) 2] =
81.2 (ms)
Note If there are N Slaves, the total communications time will be N 81.2 ms. Consequently, the more
Slaves that are used, the longer the communications time will be. If the number of Slaves is too
high, it is possible that the detection time of 2 s for communications time-over will be exceeded. In
this case, either disable the time-over detection function and use a different sequence to detect
communications errors, or increase the number of Masters thereby decreasing the number of
Slaves per Master.
H I/O Response Time

The communications processing times for the Inverter are as follows.
S Inverter communications input scan: 8 ms
S Inverter communications output scan: 8 ms
S Internal processing time for the Inverter: Approx. 20 ms
The I/O response times for the Inverter are illustrated in the following diagram.
Ladder program cycle time
Communications time 2
Inverter I/O scan
Internal processing for
the Inverter
Max. input response time
Max. output response time
7-51
8
Chapter 8
Maintenance
Operations
8-1
8-2
8-3
Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Troubleshooting
Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance Operations
8-1
Chapter 8
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
8-1-1 Fault Detection (Fatal Errors)

The Inverter will detect the following faults if the Inverter or motor burns or the internal
circuitry of the Inverter malfunctions. When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault code will
be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output will operate, and the
Inverter output will be shut off causing the motor to coast to a stop. The stopping method
can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with
these faults. If a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the
cause of the fault. Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the
Inverter. If the operation command is being input, however, the reset signal will be ignored. Therefore, be sure to reset the fault with the operation command turned OFF.
S
Turn ON the fault reset signal. A multi-function input (n050 to n056) must be set
to 5 (Fault Reset).
S
Press the STOP/RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
S
Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
H Fault Displays and Processing

Fault
display
%c
Fault name and meaning

Overcurrent (OC)
The Inverter output current is
as high as or higher than
250% of the rated output
current.
Probable cause and remedy

A short-circuit or ground fault has occurred and at the
Inverter output.
Check and correct the motor power cable.
The V/f setting is incorrect.
Reduce the V/f set voltage.
The motor capacity is too large for the Inverter.
Reduce the motor capacity to the maximum applicable
motor capacity.
The magnetic contactor on the output side of the Inverter
has been opened and closed.
Rearrange the sequence so that the magnetic contactor
will not open or close while the Inverter has current
output.
The output circuit of the Inverter is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
8-2
Fault
display
%U

Overvoltage (OV)
The main circuit DC voltage
has reached the overvoltage
detection level (410 V DC for
200-V Inverters,
820 V DC for 400-V Inverters)
Chapter 8
There is excessive regenerative energy with no braking
resistor or Braking Resistor Unit connected.
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor.
Increase the deceleration time.
The regenerative energy has not been processed though a
braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit.
Set n092 for stall prevention during deceleration to 1
(disable)
The braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit is not wired properly.
Check and correct the wiring.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it will be within specifications.
There is excessive regenerative energy due to overshooting
at the time of acceleration.
Suppress the overshooting as much as possible.
The braking transistor is damaged.
uU1
Main circuit undervoltage

(UV1)
has reached the undervoltage
detection level (200 V DC for
the 3G3MV-C2j, 160 V DC
for the 3G3MV-CBj, and 400
V DC for the 3G3MV-C4j).
Change the Inverter.

Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss, power input
terminal screws are loose, or the power cable is disconnected.
Check the above and take necessary countermeasures.
Incorrect power supply voltage
Make sure that the power supply voltage is within
specifications.
Momentary power interruption has occurred.
Use the momentary power interruption compensation
(Set n081 so that the Inverter restarts after power is
restored)
Improve the power supply.
The internal circuitry of the Inverter is damaged.
uU2
Control power supply

undervoltage (UV2)
The control power supply
voltage has reached the
undervoltage detection level.

Internal circuit fault.
Turn the Inverter OFF and ON.
Change the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.
8-3
Fault
display
%h

Radiation fin overheated
(OH)
The temperature of the
radiation fins of the Inverter
has reached 110_C 10_C.
Chapter 8
The ambient temperature is too high.
Ventilate the Inverter or install a cooling unit.
The load is excessive.
Reduce the load.
Change the inverter to one with a higher capacity.
The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
The ventilation is obstructed.
Change the location of the Inverter to meet the
installation conditions.
The cooling fan of the Inverter does not work.
%l1
Motor overload (OL1)

The electric thermal relay
actuated the motor overload
protective function.
Calculate the heat radiation of
the motor from the output
current of the Inverter based
on the rated motor current
(n036), motor protection
characteristics (n037), and
motor protective time setting
(n038).
Replace the cooling fan.

Reduce the load.
Increase the motor capacity.
The value in n013 for maximum voltage frequency is low.
Check the motor nameplate and set n013 to the rated
frequency.
The value in n036 for rated motor current is incorrect.
Check the motor nameplate and set n036 to the rated
current.
The Inverter is driving more than one motor.
Disable the motor overload protective function and install
an electronic thermal relay for each of the motors.
The motor overload protective function is disabled by
setting n036 to 0.0 or n037 to 2.
The motor protective time setting in n038 is short.
%l2
Inverter overload (OL2)

The electronic thermal relay
has actuated the Inverter
overload protective function.
Set n038 to 8 (the default value).

Reduce the load.
The Inverter capacity is insufficient.
Use an Inverter model with a higher capacity.
8-4
Fault
display
%l3
efj
f00
Chapter 8
Overtorque detection (OL3) The mechanical system is locked or has a failure.

There has been a current or
Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of
torque the same as or greater
overtorque.
than the setting in n098 for
The parameter settings were incorrect.
overtorque detection level and
Adjust the n098 and n099 parameters according to the
that in n099 for overtorque
mechanical system.
detection time. A fault has
Increase the set values in n098 and n099.
been detected with n096 for
overtorque detection function
selection set to 2 or 4.
External fault j (EFj)
An external fault has been
input from a multi-function
input.
A multi-function input 1 to 7
set to 3 or 4 has operated.
The EF number indicates the
number of the corresponding
input (S1 to S7).
An external fault was input from a multi-function input.
Digital Operator
transmission fault 1 (F00)
No communications were
possible with the Digital
Operator for 5 s or more after
the Inverter had been turned
ON.
The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.
Remove the cause of the external fault.

The sequence is incorrect.
Check and change the external fault input sequence
including the input timing and NO or NC contact.
Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the Digital

Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.
The Digital Operator has a failure.
Change the Digital Operator.
The Inverter has a failure.
f01
Digital Operator
transmission fault 2 (F01)
A transmission fault continued
for 5 s or more after
communications with the
Digital Operator had failed.
Initial memory fault (F04)

An error in the built-in
EEPROM of the Inverter has
been detected.
The internal circuitry of the Inverter has a fault.
Analog-to-digital converter
fault (F05)
An analog-to-digital converter
fault has been detected.
The internal circuitry of the Inverter has a fault.

The Digital Operator has a failure.
Change the Digital Operator.
The Inverter has a failure.
f04
f05
f06
Initialize the Inverter with n001 set to 8, 9, 10, or 11 and

turn the Inverter OFF and ON.
Replace the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.
Turn the Inverter OFF and ON.
Replace the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.
The Option Unit may not be connected properly.

Option Unit fault (F06)
An Option Unit fault was
Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the Option
detected. The Inverter will
Unit or attachment, and turn ON the Inverter.
detect this error if the output or The Option Unit has a failure.
verify signal of the Unit has a
Change the Option Unit.
fault.
The attachment has a failure.
Change the attachment.
8-5
Fault
display
f07
%pr
ce

Digital Operator fault (F07)
An error in the built-in control
circuit of the Digital Operator
has been detected.
The EEPROM of the Digital
Operator or the
analog-to-digital converter has
a failure.
Digital Operator connection
error (OPR)
The Inverter will detect this
error if n010 for Digital
Operator connection error
processing selection is set to
1.
Communications time-over
(CE)
Normal RS-422/485
communications were not
established within 2 s. The
Inverter will detect this error if
n151 for RS-422/485
communications time over
detection selection is set to 0,
1, or 2.
Chapter 8
The internal circuitry of the Digital Operator has a fault.
Turn the Digital Operator OFF and ON.
Replace the Digital Operator if the same fault occurs
again.

A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred

on the communications line.
Check and correct the line.
The termination resistance setting is incorrect.
In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin 1 of SW2
of all Inverters to ON. In the case of RS-485
communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of only the Inverter
located at each end of the network to ON.
Noise influence.
Do not wire the communications line along with power
lines in the same conduit.
Use the twisted-pair shielded wire for the
communications line, and ground it at the Master.
Masters program error.
Check and correct the program so that communications
will be performed more than once every 2-s period.
Communications circuit damage.
Emergency stop (STP)

An emergency stop alarm is
input to a multi-function input.
(A multi-function input from 1
to 7 that was set to 19 or 21
has operated.)
8-6
If the same error is detected as a result of a

self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.
An emergency stop alarm is input.
Remove the cause of the fault.
Check and change the external fault input sequence
including the input timing and NO or NC contact.
Fault
display
FbL
PF (See
note.)
LF (See
note.)

Feedback loss fault (FbL)
A feedback input was
interrupted during PID control
execution. (This fault is
detected when an input level
below the feedback loss
detection level set in n137
persists for longer than the
feedback loss detection time
set in n138.)
Main circuit voltage fault

(PF)
has oscillated erroneously
when regeneration was not
being performed.
This fault is detected when a
voltage fluctuation greater
than the input open-phase
detection level set in n166
persists for longer than the
input open-phase detection
time set in n167.
Chapter 8
Feedback wiring error.
Check for and correct any cable disconnection or faulty
wiring.
Feedback sensor error
Check sensor status and replace any defective sensors.
PID target value input error or feedback loss detection setting error
Correct the target value input so that it is outside of the
feedback loss detection range. Correct the feedback loss
detection parameter settings (n137, n138).
Feedback input circuit error
Momentary power failure.
Either apply countermeasures against momentary power
failures or disable the input open-phase detection.
Input power supply open phase.
Check for and correct any main circuit power supply
disconnections or faulty wiring.
Excessive input power supply voltage fluctuation or bad line
voltage balance.
Check the power supply voltage. Apply measures to
stabilize the power supply, or disable the input
open-phase detection.
Main circuit capacitor failure.
If this fault is occurring frequently and there is no error at
the power supply, replace the Inverter or disable the input
open-phase detection. (Also check the usage time with
the accumulated operating time function.)
Output cable is disconnected.
Output open-phase fault

(LF)
Check for and correct any output cable disconnections or
An open phase has occurred
faulty wiring.
at the Inverters output.
Motor winding disconnected.
This fault is detected when a
Check the motors line resistance. If winding is broken,
current in any of the Inverter
replace the motor.
output phases less than the
Output
terminal screws are loose.
output open-phase detection
level set in n168 persists for
Check and tighten the output terminal screws.
longer than the output
Inverter output transistor open breakdown.
open-phase detection time set
in n169.
8-7
Fault
display
GF (See
note.)
SC (See
note.)
BUS
Chapter 8
Motor burnout or insulation damage.

Ground fault (GF)
The ground current at the
Check the motors insulation resistance. If conducting,
Inverter has exceeded
replace the motor.
approximately 50% of the
Cable is damaged.
Inverters rated output current.
Check the resistance between the cable and FG. If
conducting, replace the cable.
Cable and FG floating capacity
Load short circuit (SC)

The Inverter output or load is
short-circuited.
Communications error
(Option Unit)
A communications error
occurred at the Option Unit.
If the cable is longer than 100 m, lower the carrier

frequency.
Apply measures to reduce the floating capacity. Dont use
metal ducts, use a separate cable for each phase,
include an AC reactor in the output side, etc.
Motor burnout or insulation damage.
Check the resistance between the motor phases. If
abnormal, replace the Inverter.
Cable is damaged.
Check the resistance between the cables. If conducting,
replace the cable.
Communications cable wired incorrectly, short-circuited, or
disconnected.
Check and correct the communications cable wiring.
Data destroyed by noise.
Change to a dedicated communications cable or to
shielded cable, and mask the shield or ground it at the
power supply.
Use a dedicated communications power supply, and
connect a noise filter to the power supply input side.
Option Unit is damaged.
OFF
Power supply error

Control power supply voltage
is insufficient.
If communications errors frequently occur and there is no

problem with the wiring, replace the Option Unit.
No power supply is provided.
Check and correct the power supply wire and voltage.
Terminal screws are loose.
Check and tighten the terminal screws.
Operator connectors are faulty.
If only the Operator indicator is not lit, (i.e., if the RUN
and ALARM indicators are lit), check and correct the
Operators connectors.
The Inverter is damaged.
Note This fault is displayed for 200 and 400-V, 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters only.
8-8
Chapter 8
8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Errors)

The warning detection is a type of Inverter protective function that does not operate the
fault contact output and returns the Inverter to its original status once the cause of the
error has been removed. The Digital Operator flashes and display the detail of the error.
If a warning occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Note Some warnings or some cases stop the operation of the Inverter as described in
the table.
H Warning Displays and Processing

Fault display
Warning name and meaning
Main circuit undervoltage (UV)
uU
(flashing)
The main circuit DC voltage has
reached the undervoltage detection
level (200 V DC for the 3G3MV-j2j,
160 V DC for the 3G3MV-jBj, and
400 V DC for the 3G3MV-j4j).
%U
(flashing)
%h
(flashing)
cal
(flashing)
Main circuit overvoltage

The main circuit DC voltage has
reached the overvoltage detection
level (410 V DC for 200-V Inverters,
820 V DC for 400-V Inverters).
Radiation fin overheated (OH)
The temperature of the radiation fins
of the Inverter has reached 110_C
10_C.
Communications standby (CAL)
No normal DSR message has been
received during RS-422/4895
communications.
The Inverter detects this warning only
when RUN command selection (n003)
is set to 2 or frequency reference
selection (n004) is set to 6. Until the
warning is reset, no input other than
communications input will be ignored.

Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss,
power input terminal screws are loose, or the
power line is disconnected.
Check the above and take necessary
countermeasures.
Incorrect power supply voltage
Make sure that the power supply voltage is
within specifications.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it will be within
specifications.
Ventilate the Inverter or install a cooling unit.
A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has
occurred on the communications line.
In the case of RS-422 communications, set
pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the
case of RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of
SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end
of the network to ON.
Check the start of communications and
correct the program.
8-9
Chapter 8
Fault display
Operation error (OPj)
%p1
(flashing)
(Parameter setting error)

The values in n050 through n056 for multi-function inputs 1 through 7 have been duplicated.
%p2
(flashing)
Check and correct the values.

The V/f pattern settings do not satisfy the following condition.
n016 n014 < n013 n011
Check and correct the set value.
The rated motor current set in n036 exceeds
150% of the rated output current of the Inverter.
%p3
(flashing)

The frequency reference upper limit set in n036
and the frequency reference lower limit set in
n034 do not satisfy the following condition.
n033 n034
%p4
(flashing)
%p5
(flashing)
Check and correct the set values.

The jump frequencies set in n083 to n085 do not
satisfy the following condition.
n083 n084 n085
%p9
(flashing)
Check and correct the set values.

The carrier frequency set in n080 is incorrect. An
attempt was made to set a value that is not within
a permissible range.
%l3
(flashing)
The mechanical system is locked or has a failure.

Overtorque detection (OL3)
There has been a current or torque the
Check the mechanical system and correct the
same as or greater than the setting in
cause of overtorque.
n098 for overtorque detection level
The parameter settings were incorrect.
and that in n099 for overtorque
Adjust the n098 and n099 parameters
detection time. A fault has been
according to the mechanical system.
detected with n096 for overtorque
Increase the set values in n98 and n099.
detection function selection set to 1 or
3.
ser
(flashing)
Sequence error (SER)

A sequence change has been input
while the Inverter is in operation.
Local or remote selection or
communications/remote selection are
input while the Inverter is in operation.
Note The Inverter coasts to a stop.
bb
(flashing)
The external base block command has been

External base block (bb)
input.
The external base block command has
been input.
Remove the cause of external base block
Note The Inverter coasts to a stop.
input.
Check and change the external fault input
sequence including the input timing and NO
or NC contact.
8-10
A sequence error has occurred.

Check and correct the sequence.
Chapter 8
Fault display
Forward- and reverse-rotation input A sequence error has occurred.
ef
(EF)
(flashing)
Check and adjust the local or remote
The forward and reverse commands
selection sequence.
are input to the control circuit terminals
simultaneously for 0.5 s or more.
Note The Inverter stops according to
the method set in n005.
(flashing)
Emergency stop (STP)

The Digital Operator stops operating.
The STOP/RESET Key on the Digital
Operator is pressed while the Inverter
is operating according to the forward
or reverse command through the
control circuit terminals.
The parameter setting was incorrect.

Check that the n007 parameter setting for
STOP/RESET Key function selection is
correct.
An emergency stop warning is input to a multifunction input.
Remove the cause of the fault or correct the
input sequence.
The emergency stop alarm signal is

input as multi-function input.
A multi-function input 1 to 7 set to 20
or 22 has been used.
The Inverter decelerates to a
stop in deceleration time 2 with
n005 set to 0.
FAn (flashing)
Cooling fan fault (FAN)

The cooling fan has been locked.
The cooling fan wiring has a fault.

Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount the fan, and
check and repair the wiring.
The cooling fan in not in good condition.
Check and remove the foreign material or
dust on the fan.
The cooling fan is beyond repair.
Replace the fan.
FbL (flashing)
Feedback loss fault (FbL)

A feedback input was interrupted
during PID control execution. (This
fault is detected when an input level
below the feedback loss detection
level set in n137 persists for longer
than the feedback loss detection time
set in n138.)
Feedback wiring error.

Check for and correct any cable
disconnection or faulty wiring.
Feedback sensor error
Check sensor status and replace any
defective sensors.
PID target value input error or feedback loss
detection setting error
Correct the target value input so that it is
outside of the feedback loss detection range.
Correct the feedback loss detection
parameter settings (n137, n138).
Feedback input circuit error
8-11
Chapter 8
Fault display
oH3
Inverter overheating warning (oH3) Clear the Inverter overheating warning signal.
An Inverter overheating warning signal Eliminate the cause of the warning signal input.
was input from an external control
terminal set to multi-function input.
A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has
CE
Communications time over (CE)
occurred on the communications line.
RS-422 or RS-485 communications
were not properly carried out within 2
s. (Detected when n151 is set to 3.)
In the case of RS-422 communications, set
pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the
case of RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of
SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end
of the network to ON.
Noise influence.
Do not wire the communications line along
with power lines in the same conduit.
Use the twisted-pair shielded wire for the
communications line, and ground it at the
Master.
Check and correct the program so that
communications will be performed more than
once every 2-s period.
8-12
8-2
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not
operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section
as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
Refer to 8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions, if the contents of the fault are displayed,
8-2-1 Parameters Fail Set

H The display does not change when the Increment or Decrement Key is
pressed.
Parameter write-prohibit is input.
This occurs when n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization is set to 0. Set
n001 to an appropriate value according to the parameter to be set.
The Inverter is operating.
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Refer to the list of parameters.
Turn the Inverter OFF and then make the settings.
H OPj is displayed.
A parameter setting error has occurred. Refer to 8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Error) and
make the necessary corrections.
H Nothing is displayed on the Digital Operator or OPR is displayed.

A connection error has occurred in the Digital Operator.
Turn OFF the Inverter and dismount the Digital Operator. After checking that the connector is free of
any foreign material remount the Digital Operator.
8-2-2 Motor Fails to Operate

H The motor does not operate with input through the control circuit
terminals even though the frequency reference is correct.
The operation method setting is incorrect.
If parameter n003 for operation mode selection is not set to 1 to enable the control circuit terminals,
the RUN command cannot be executed through the control circuit terminals.
Check and correct the setting in n003.
Input in 2-wire sequence while 3-wire sequence is in effect and vice-versa.
The Inverter will operate in 3-wire sequence according to the RUN, stop, and forward/stop commands if n052 for multi-function input 3 is set to 0. At that time, the Inverter will not operate if input in
2-wire sequence is ON. On the other hand, the Inverter in 2-wire sequence will only rotate in the
reverse direction if input in 3-wire sequence is ON.
Check and correct the setting in n052 or change the input method of the RUN command.
8-13
Chapter 8
The Inverter is not in RUN mode.

When the PRGM or LO/RE indicator (red indicator) of the Digital Operator is lit, the Inverter does not
start.
Cancel the RUN command, and by pressing the Mode Key, turn ON the green indicator before
restarting the Inverter.
The value of the frequency reference is too low.
The Inverter will have no output if the frequency reference is below the minimum output frequency in
n016.
Set the frequency reference to exceed the minimum output frequency.
The Inverter is in local mode.
The RUN command can be given to the Inverter in local mode only with the RUN Key of the Digital
Operator. Check the LO/RE indicator. If Lo is displayed, the Inverter is in local mode. Press the
Increment Key so that rE will be displayed.
If the above operation is not possible, multi-function input will be set to local/remote selection. In that
case, the mode can be switched only through the corresponding multi-function input terminal. Set
the input terminal to OFF so that the Inverter will be in remote mode.
The input wiring of the control circuit terminals of the Inverter is incorrect.
The Inverter cannot check the input signal if the input line of the control circuit terminals is incorrectly
wired. Use the Digital Operator and check the setting in multi-function monitor U-96 for the input
terminal status.
The default setting for Inverter input is to NPN sequence input, which can be changed to PNP
sequence input. Refer to 2-2-1 Terminal Block and check that the SW1 settings conform with the
actual wiring.
H The motor does not turn with input through the control terminals. (The
frequency reference is set to zero or different from the set value.)
The setting of the frequency reference is incorrect.
The frequency reference through analog input will be ignored if the Digital Operator has been
selected for frequency reference settings. The frequency reference through digital input will be
ignored if the Digital Operator has not been selected.
Check that the set value in n004 for frequency reference selection matches the actual method used.
When using analog input, refer to 2-2-1 Terminal Block and check that the SW2 settings conform
with the actual input (voltage or current).
The Inverter is in local mode.
The frequency reference can be given to the Inverter in local mode only with the FREQUENCY
adjuster or through a key sequence on the Digital Operator.
Check the LO/RE indicator. If Lo is displayed, the Inverter is in local mode. Press the Increment
Key so that rE will be displayed.
If the above operation is not possible, multi-function input will be set to local/remote selection. In that
case, the mode can be switched only through the corresponding multi-function input terminal. Set
the input terminal to OFF so that the Inverter will be in remote mode.
The gain and bias settings of the analog input are incorrect.
Check that the frequency reference gain in n060 and the frequency reference bias in n061 conform
with the actual analog input characteristics.
8-14
Chapter 8
The auxiliary frequency reference and frequency gain are not input by the multi-function analog inputs.
If frequency reference 2 is selected when an auxiliary frequency reference is set for a multi-function
analog input, the analog value of the multi-function analog input will become the frequency reference. Also, if the frequency gain is set, the specified frequency will be multiplied by a factor proportional to the analog value of the multi-function input. In either case, if no analog voltage is input by the
multi-function analog input, the Inverter will not operate. Check the multi-function analog input terminal parameters (n077, n078) and the wiring.
H The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

The load may be too big.
The 3G3MV has a stall prevention function and automatic torque boost function, but the motor
responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too big.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
H The motor only rotates in one direction.

Reverse rotation-prohibit is selected.
If n006 for reverse rotation-prohibit selection is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not
accept reverse-rotation commands.
To use both forward and reverse rotation, set n05 to 0.
8-2-3 Motor Rotates in the Wrong Direction

The output wiring of the motor is faulty.
When the U, V, and W terminals of the Inverter are properly connected to the U, V and W terminals of
the motor, the motor will operate in a forward direction when a forward rotation command is
executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type. Therefore, be
sure to check the specifications.
Switching two wires among the U, V, and W will reverse the direction of rotation.
8-2-4 Motor Outputs No Torque or Acceleration is Slow

The Inverter in vector control is restricted by the torque compensation limit.
If the torque compensation limit in n109 is set to a value that is too small, the motor torque will be
limited to a low value and sufficient torque will not be available.
If no torque restriction is required, set the parameter to a range from 150% (default setting) to 200%.
The stall prevention level during operation is too low.
If the value in n094 for stall prevention level during operation is too low, the speed will drop before
torque output is turned ON.
Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value in n093 for stall prevention level during acceleration is too slow, the acceleration time will
be too long.
Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
8-15
Chapter 8
V/f Control Limit

Unlike vector control, the output torque of the Inverter in V/f control is low at low frequencies. Consider the use of vector control if higher output torque at low frequencies is required.
8-2-5 Speed Accuracy of the Inverter Rotating at High Speed in

Vector Control is Low
The rated motor voltage is high.
The maximum output voltage of the Inverter is determined by the voltage of input into the Inverter. If
the input is at 200 V AC, for example, the maximum output voltage will be 200 V AC. The speed
precision of the Inverter will drop if the output voltage designated by vector control has exceeded the
maximum output voltage of the Inverter.
Use a motor with a lower rated voltage (e.g., a dedicated motor for vector control use).
8-2-6 Motor Deceleration Rate is Low

Stall prevention during deceleration is set.
When connecting the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor as a braking option, set n092 for
Stall prevention during deceleration to 1 so that stall prevention will be disabled. If n092 is set to 0
(default setting), the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor connected will not be used. Therefore, there will be no reduction in the deceleration time.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time settings in n020 and n022.
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameter constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, the power of the motor will
be limited.
Consider increasing the motor capacity.
The Inverter in vector control is restricted by the torque compensation limit.
If the torque compensation limit in n109 is set to a value that is too small, the motor torque will be
limited to a low value and sufficient torque will not be available.
If no torque restriction is required, set the parameter to a range from 150% (default setting) to 200%.
8-2-7 Vertical-axis Load Drops when Brakes are Applied

The Inverter goes into DC braking status for 0.5 s after deceleration is completed. This is the default
setting.
Check the sequence to make sure that the brake is applied with DC braking status or adjust the
value n090 for DC injection control time.
The DC injection braking is insufficient.
If the DC braking power is insufficient, adjust the value in n089 for DC injection control current.
An inappropriate brake is being used.
Use a brake intended for braking rather than holding.
8-16
Chapter 8
8-2-8 Motor Burns

The load is too big.
If the load of the motor is too big and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the rated
torque of the motor, the motor will burn out. For example, the rated torque of the motor and capacity
may be limited to eight hours of use if the inscription on the motor states that the motor is rated for
eight hours. If the 8-hour rated torque is used for normal operation, it may cause the motor to burn
out.
Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration
time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The rating of the motor is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The
motor will burn out if it runs continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum
ambient operating temperature is exceeded.
Lower the ambient temperature of the motor to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the phases of the motor is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the output of the Inverter, a surge will be generated between the
switching of the Inverter and the coil of the motor.
Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the input power supply voltage
of the Inverter (i.e., approximately 600 V for 200-V Inverters, 1,200 V for 400-V Inverters).
Therefore, the dielectric strength of the motor to be used must be higher than the maximum surge
voltage.
In particular, use a dedicated motor for 400-V Inverters.
8-2-9 Controller or AM Radio Receives Noise when Inverter is

Started
Noise derives from Inverter switching.
Take the following actions to prevent noise.
S Lower the carrier frequency of the Inverter in n080.
The number of internal switching times is reduced, so noise can be reduced to some extent.
S Install an Input Noise Filter.
Install an Input Noise Filter on the power input area of the Inverter.
S Install an Output Noise Filter.
Install an Output Noise Filter on the output area of the Inverter.
S Use metal tubing.
Electric waves can be shielded by metal. Therefore, enclose the Inverter with a metal tube.
8-2-10 Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated when Inverter is

Started
Leakage current flows through the Inverter.
The Inverter performs internal switching. Therefore, a leakage current flows through the Inverter.
This leakage current may actuate the ground fault interrupter, shutting the power OFF.
8-17
Chapter 8
Use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage-current detection value (sensitivity amperage of
200 mA or more, operating time of 0.1 s or more) or one with high-frequency countermeasures for
Inverter use.
Reducing the carrier frequency value in n080 is also effective.
In addition, remember that a leakage current increases in proportion to the cable length. Normally,
approximately 5 mA of leakage current is generated for each meter of cable.
8-2-11 Mechanical Vibration

H Mechanical system makes unusual noise.
Resonance between the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system and the carrier frequency.
There may be resonance between the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system and the
carrier frequency. If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery system is vibrating
with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance,
adjust the carrier frequency value in n080.
Resonance between the characteristic frequency of a machine and the output frequency of the
Inverter.
There may be resonance between the characteristic frequency of a machine and the output frequency of the Inverter. To prevent this from occurring, use the frequency jump function with the
constants set in n083 through n086 to change the output frequency or install vibration-proof rubber
on the motor base to prevent the resonance of the mechanical system.
H Vibration and hunting are occurring.

Influence by the torque compensation function or the slip compensation function.
The torque compensation function or the slip compensation function of the Inverter may influence
the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system, causing vibration or hunting. In that case,
increase the time constants in n104 for torque compensation and in n112 for slip compensation. The
larger these time constants are, however, the slower the response speed of the torque compensation function and slip compensation function will be.
H Motor vibrates excessively and does not rotate normally.

Motor Phase Interruption
If one or two of the three phases of the motor are open, the motor will vibrate excessively and will not
rotate. Check that the motor is wired correctly without any disconnection. The same phenomenon
will occur if the output transistor of the Inverter is open and damaged. Check the balance of the
Inverters output voltage as well.
8-2-12 Stable PID Control is Not Possible or Control Fails

H PID control is not possible with vibration or hunting.
PID control gain adjustment is insufficient.
Check the frequency of vibration and adjust the proportional (P) control, integral (I) control, and
derivative (D) control of the Inverter. Refer to 6-3-7 PID Adjustments.
8-18
Chapter 8
H PID control diverges.

No feedback is input.
If the detected value is 0 with no feedback input, the PID control function will not operate. As a result,
the output of the Inverter will diverge and the motor will increase its speed up to the maximum frequency.
Check that the set value in n164 for PID feedback input block selection conforms with the actual
input and that the PID constants are set properly. Refer to 6-3-6 PID Control Settings.
Level adjustments of the target and detected values are imperfect.
The Inverter in PID control adjusts the deviation between the target and detected values so that the
deviation will be zero. Therefore, the target and detected values must be adjusted so that they will
have the same input level. Set the detected value gain in n129 after making the proper level adjustments.
The relationship between the output frequency and detected value of the Inverter is opposite.
PID control will result in diversion if the detected value decreases when the output frequency of the
Inverter increases. If that happens, set n128 for PID control selection to negative characteristics
(e.g., if 1 has been set, change it to 5).
8-2-13 Inverter Vibration in Energy-saving Control

The energy-saving settings are incorrect.
Check the frequency of vibration.
If the frequency coincides with the power averaging time in n143, the Inverter is not in smooth probe
operation. Set the probe operation voltage limit to 0 in n144 to disable the probe operation of the
Inverter or reduce the set values of n145 (100% probe-control voltage step) and n146 (5% probecontrol voltage step) so that the voltage change range will be narrower.
8-2-14 Motor Rotates after Output of Inverter is Turned OFF

Insufficient DC Injection Braking Control
If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration
stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough.
In such cases, adjust the DC control as described below.
S Increase the parameter in n089 for DC injection braking current.
S Increase the parameter in n090 for DC injection braking-to-stop time.
8-2-15 Detects OV (Over voltage) and Stalls when Motor Starts

Insufficient DC Injection Braking Control at Startup
Generation of OV and stalling can occur if the motor is turning when it is started.
This can be prevented by slowing the rotation of the motor by DC injection braking before starting
the motor.
Increase the parameter in n091 for startup DC injection braking time.
8-19
Chapter 8
8-2-16 Output Frequency Does Not Reach Frequency Reference

The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
If the jump function is used, the output frequency stays within the jump frequency range.
Make sure that the jump width settings in n083 through n085 for jump frequencies 1 through 3 and
jump width in n086 are appropriate.
The preset output frequency exceeds the upper-limit frequency.
The upper-limit frequency can be obtained from the following formula.
Maximum frequency in n011 frequency reference upper limit in n033/100
Make sure that the parameters in n011 and n033 are correct.
8-2-17 Inverter Does Not Run Because EF (Simultaneous Inputs

of Forward and Reverse Commands) is Detected, Or
Motor Rotates Momentarily When Control Device Power
is Turned OFF
H Sequence Error
An EF will be detected if a forward command and a reverse command are input simultaneously for 0.5
seconds or longer. Correct the sequence.
H Malfunction Due to Unwanted Current Path

Inverter inputs may remain ON due to an unwanted current path for the controller outputs. With the wiring shown in the following table, if the controller output power supply is less than 24 V DC or if the power
is OFF, the current indicated by the arrow will flow and the Inverter inputs will operate. If that occurs,
insert a diode as shown in the diagram at point A.
A
Control device
Inverter (control input)
S1 to 7
8-20
8-3
Chapter 8
Maintenance and Inspection
! WARNING
Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.
! WARNING
Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF,
electrical shock.
! WARNING
Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized

personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.
! WARNING
Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock or injury.
! Caution
Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless

handling may result in malfunction.
! Caution
Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or

replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.
H Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
There should be no abnormal heat generation.
The output current value shown on the monitor display should not be higher than normal.
The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally, if the Inverter model has
the cooling fan.
H Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Before beginning inspection, be sure to turn OFF the power supply. Confirm that all the indicators on the
front panel have turned OFF, and then wait until at least 1 minute has elapsed before beginning the
inspection.
Be sure not to touch the terminals right after the power has been turned OFF. Otherwise, an electric
shock may occur.
The terminal screws of the Inverter should not loose.
There should be no conductive dust or oil mist on the terminal block or inside the Inverter.
The mounting screws of the Inverter should not be loose.
8-21
Chapter 8
No dirt or dust should be accumulating on the radiation fin.

No dust should be accumulating on the vents of the Inverter.
There should be no abnormalities in the outward appearance of the Inverter.
There should be no unusual noises or vibration and the accumulated operating time should not
exceeded the specifications.
H Periodic Maintenance Parts

The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must operate properly in order to make full use
of the Inverters functions. Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance
depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period
of time, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary with the installation environment and usage conditions of the
Inverter.
The maintenance periods of the Inverter are described below. Keep them as reference.
Maintenance Periods (Reference)
S Cooling fan:
2 to 3 years
S Electrolytic capacitor: 5 years

S Fuse:
10 years
The usage conditions are as follows:

S Ambient temperature:40_C
S Load factor:
80%
S Operation:
8 hours per day
S Installation:
According to instructions in manual
It is recommended that the ambient temperature and power-on time be reduced as much as possible to extend of the life of the Inverter.
Note For details regarding maintenance, consult your OMRON representative.
H Replacement of Cooling Fan

If the FAN fault is displayed or the cooling fan needs replacement, take the following steps to replace it.
8-22
Chapter 8
D Cooling Fan Models

3-phase
p
200-V AC
Single-phase
g p
200-V
V AC
3-phase
p
400-V AC
Inverter
3G3MV-j2007
3G3MV-j2015
3G3MV-j2022
3G3MV-j2037
3G3MV-j2055
3G3MV-j2075
3G3MV-jB015
3G3MV-jB022
3G3MV-jB037
3G3MV-j4015/-j4022
3G3MV-j4037
3G3MV-j4055
3G3MV-j4075
Cooling Fan
3G3IV-PFAN2007
3G3IV-PFAN2015M
3G3IV-PFAN2022
3G3IV-PFAN2037
3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)
3G3IV-PFAN2015M
3G3IV-PFAN2037
3G3IV-PFAN2015M
3G3IV-PFAN2037
D Replacing Cooling Fan (68-, 140-, 170-, and 180-mm-wide Inverters)

1. Press the left and right sides of the fan cover located on the lower part of the radiation fin in the arrow
1 directions. Then lift the bottom of the Fan in the arrow 2 direction to remove the Fan as shown in the
following illustration.
Radiation fin (Heat sink)

Wind direction
2. Hold the fan wire and pull the protective tube of the cover in the arrow 3 direction.
Protective tube
There is a connector inside.
Fan wind direction
3. Slide the protective tube and remove the internal connector.

4. Remove the Fan from the fan cover.
5. Mount the new Fan on the fan cover. At this time, make sure that the wind direction of the Fan will be
in the direction of the heat radiation fin.
6. Attach the connector, cover the connector with the protective tube, and insert the connector into the
cover.
8-23
Chapter 8
7. Mount the fan cover with the new Fan to the lower part of the heat radiation fin. Make sure that the
fan cover snaps on securely with the heat radiation fin.
D Replacing Cooling Fan of 108-mm-wide Inverter Model

1. Dismount the front cover, bottom cover, and fan connector CN4.
Cooling fan connector

(CN10 built in)
Heat radiation fin (Heat sink)

Fan wind direction
2. Press the left and right sides of the fan cover located on the lower part of the radiation fin in the arrow
1 directions. Then lift the bottom of the Fan in the arrow 2 direction to remove the fan as shown in the
following illustration.
Disconnect the wire from the electrical inlet on the bottom of the plastic casing.
3. Remove the Fan from the fan cover.
4. Mount the new Fan on the fan cover. At this time, make sure that the wind direction of the fan will be
in the direction of the heat radiation fin.
5. Mount the fan cover with the new Fan to the lower part of the heat radiation fin. Make sure that the
fan cover snaps on securely with the heat radiation fin.
6. Wire the power line through the electrical inlet on the bottom of the plastic casing and the wiring
groove into the internal circuitry of the Inverter.
7. Attach the wire to connector CN10 and attach the bottom cover and front cover.
8-24
9
Chapter 9
Specifications
9-1
9-2
Inverter Specifications
Option Specifications
Specifications
9-1
Chapter 9
Inverter Specifications
H 200-V-class Inverters
3-phase
p
200-V
V
AC
models
Model 3G3MVModel V7CUPower Rated voltage

supply
pp y and frequency
Allowable
voltage
fluctuation
Allowable
frequency
fluctuation
Input power
supply capacity
[kVA]
(See note 1.)
Heat radiation (W)
(See note 2.)
Weight (kg)
Cooling
g
NEMA 1
method
h d
NEMA 4
Model 3G3MVSingleg
phase
h
Power
Rated voltage
200-V
supply
and
AC modfrequency
els
Allowable
voltage
fluctuation
Allowable
frequency
fluctuation
Input power
supply
capacity [kVA]
(See note 1.)
Heat radiation (W) (See
note 2.)
Weight (kg)
Cooling method
9-2
C2001 C2002 C2004 C2007 C2015 C2022 C2037 C2055 C2075

20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
13.3
17.6
3-phase 200 to 230 V AC at 50/60 Hz

--15% to 10%
5%
0.4
0.9
1.6
2.7
4.3
5.9
9.3
13.0
18.0
28.1
45.1
72.8
94.8
149.1 249.8 318.1
1.5
2.1
0.6
0.6
0.9
Natural cooling
CB001
CB002
1.1
1.4
Cooling fan
CB004
CB007
CB015
4.6
CB022
4.8
CB037
Single-phase 200 to 240 V AC at 50/60 Hz

--15% to 10%
5%
0.5
0.9
1.6
2.7
4.3
5.9
9.3
14.1
20.0
31.9
51.4
82.8
113.6
176.4
1.0
1.5
1.5
2.2
Cooling fan
0.6
0.7
Natural cooling
2.9
Specifications
Chapter 9
Max. applicable motor capacity 0.1

(kW)
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
Output
specifip
cations
Control
characteristics
Protective
i
functions
Rated output
capacity (kVA)
Rated output
current (A)
Rated output
voltage (V)
Max. output
frequency
0.3
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.2
6.7
9.5
13.0
0.8
1.6
3.0
5.0
8.0
11.0
17.5
25.0
33.0
Harmonic-current
countermeasures
Control method
Carrier frequency
Frequency control
range
Frequency precision
(temperature
characteristics)
Frequency setting
resolution
Output frequency
resolution
Overload capacity
External frequency
set signal
Acceleration/deceleration time
Braking torque
Voltage/frequency
characteristics
DC reactor (option) connection possible
Motor protection
Instantaneous
overcurrent
protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage
protection
Undervoltage
protection
Momentary power
interruption
compensation
(selection)
Cooling fan
overheating
Grounding
protection
Charge indicator
(RUN indicator)
Protection by electronic thermal

Stops at approx. 250% of rated output current
3-phase 200 to 240 V AC (according to the input voltage)

400 Hz parameter setting
Sine wave PWM (V/f control or vector control)

2.5 to 10.0 kHz (step switching)
0.1 to 400 Hz
Digital commands: 0.01% (--10 to 50C)
Analog commands: 0.5% (25 10C)
Digital commands: 0.1 Hz (less than 100 Hz) and 1 Hz (100 Hz or over)
Analog commands: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (equivalent to 1/1000)
0.01 Hz
150% of rated output current for 1 min
Selectable with FREQ adjuster: 0 to 10 V DC (20 k), 4 to 20 mA (250
), and 0 to 20 mA (250 )
0.01 to 6,000 s (Independent acceleration and deceleration time
settings: 2 types)
Approx. 20% (125% to 150% possible with braking resistor)
Set voltage vector control/user V/f pattern
Stops in 1 min at approximately 150% of rated output current

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 410 V
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 200 V (160 V for
single-phase 200-V AC model)
Stops for 15 ms or more. By setting the Inverter to momentary power
interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within
approximately 0.5 s.
Detects at 110 10C
Protection at overcurrent detection level
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 50 V or less.
9-3
Specifications
Environ- Location
ment
Ambient storage
temperature
Ambient humidity
Ambient operating
temperature
Chapter 9
Indoors (with no corrosive gas, oil spray, or metallic dust)
--20 to 60C
Operating: 95% max. (with no condensation)
Panel-mounting: --10 to 50C
Closed
wall-mounting:
--10 to 40C
Panelmounting:
--10 to 50C
Altitude
Insulation
resistance
Vibration resistance
Degree of protection
1,000 m max.
5 M min. (Do not carry out any insulation resistance or withstand
voltage tests)
9.8 m/s2 max. between 10 to 20 Hz
2.0 m/s2 max. between 20 and 50 Hz
Closed wall mounting IP20/NEMA 1 (See note 3.)
NEMA 1 or NEMA 4 models available
Note 1. The power supply capacity is the capacity for the Inverters rated output. It will vary depending
on the impedance at the input power supply. (This is due to fluctuations in the power factor.
The power factor can be improved by inserting an AC reactor.) There will also be variations in
the ratio between the rated current of the motor that is used and the rated output current of the
Inverter.
Note 2. The heat radiation is the electric power consumed in the Inverter at the Inverters rated output.
Note 3. The 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters are closed wall-mounting models (NEMA 1/IP20) as a standard, but they can be converted to panel-mounting (IP00) by removing the top and bottom
covers.
9-4
Specifications
Chapter 9
H 400-V-class Inverters
3-phase
p
400-V
V
AC
models
Model 3G3MV-
C4002
Model V7CUPower Rated voltage

supply
pp y and frequency
Allowable
voltage
fluctuation
Allowable
frequency
fluctuation
Input power
supply
capacity [kVA]
(See note 1.)
Heat radiation (W)
(See note 2.)
Weight (kg)
Cooling
g
NEMA 1
method
h d
NEMA 4
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
3-phase 380 to 460 V AC at 50/60 Hz
Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)
Output
Rated output
specifip
capacity (kVA)
cations Rated output
current (A)
Rated output
voltage (V)
Max. output
frequency
C4004 C4007 C4015 C4022 C4037 C4055 C4075

43P7
45P5
47P5
--15% to 10%
5%
1.3
1.9
3.6
5.1
5.9
9.1
15.8
19.2
23.1
30.1
54.9
75.7
83.0
117.9
256.5
308.9
1.5
1.5
1.5
Cooling
g fan
2.1
4.8
4.8
1.0
1.1
Natural cooling
g
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
0.9
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.2
6.6
11.0
14.0
1.2
1.8
3.4
4.8
5.5
8.6
14.8
18.0
3-phase 380 to 460 V AC (according to the input voltage)

400 Hz parameter setting
9-5
Specifications
Control
characteristics
Protective
i
functions
9-6
Harmonic-current
countermeasures
Control method
Carrier frequency
Frequency control
range
Frequency precision
(temperature
characteristics)
Frequency setting
resolution
Output frequency
resolution
Overload capacity
External frequency
set signal
Acceleration/deceleration time
Braking torque
Voltage/frequency
characteristics
Motor protection
Instantaneous
overcurrent
protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage
protection
Undervoltage
protection
Momentary power
interruption
compensation
(selection)
Cooling fin
overheating
Grounding
protection
Charge indicator
Chapter 9
DC reactor (option) connection possible
Sine wave PWM (V/f control or vector control)
2.5 to 10.0 kHz (step switching)
0.1 to 400 Hz
Digital commands: 0.01% (--10 to 50C)
Analog commands: 0.5% (25 10C)
Digital commands: 0.1 Hz (less than 100 Hz) and 1 Hz (100 Hz or over)
Analog commands: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (equivalent to 1/1000)
0.01 Hz
150% of rated output current for 1 min
Selectable with FREQ adjuster: 0 to 10 V DC (20 k), 4 to 20 mA (250
), and 0 to 20 mA (250 )
0.01 to 6,000 s (Independent acceleration and deceleration time
settings)
Approx. 20% (125 to 150% possible with braking resistor: 2 types)
Set voltage vector control/user V/f pattern
Protection by electronic thermal
Stops at approx. 250% of rated output current
Stops in 1 min at approximately 150% of rated output current
Stops for 15 ms or more. By setting the Inverter to momentary power
interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within
approximately 0.5 s.
Detects at 110 10C
Protection at overcurrent detection level
Charge indicator until main circuit DC voltage reaches 50 V max.
Specifications
Environ- Location
ment
Ambient operating
temperature
Chapter 9
Indoors (with no corrosive gas, oil spray, or metallic dust)
--10 to 50C
Closed
wall-mounting:
--10 to 40C
Panelmounting:
--10 to 50C
Ambient humidity
Ambient storage
temperature
Altitude
Insulation
resistance
Vibration resistance
Degree of protection
Operating: 95% max. (with no condensation)

--20 to 60C
1,000 m max.
5 M min. (Do not carry out any insulation resistance or withstand
voltage tests)
9.8 m/s2 max. between 10 to 20 Hz
2.0 m/s2 max. between 20 and 50 Hz
Closed wall mounting IP20/NEMA 1 (See note 3.)
NEMA 1 and NEMA 4 models available
Note 1. The power supply capacity is the capacity for the Inverters rated output. It will vary depending
on the impedance at the input power supply. (This is due to fluctuations in the power factor.
The power factor can be improved by inserting an AC reactor.) There will also be variations in
the ratio between the rated current of the motor that is used and the rated output current of the
Inverter.
Note 2. The heat radiation is the electric power consumed in the Inverter at the Inverters rated output.
Note 3. The 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters are closed wall-mounting models (NEMA 1/IP20) as a standard, but they can be converted to panel-mounting (IP00) by removing the top and bottom
covers.
9-7
Specifications
9-2
Chapter 9
Option Specifications
9-2-1 List of Options

H Mounted Options
Name
CompoBus/D
Communications Unit
Model
3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV
Fan Unit
3G3IV-PFANj
Description
Required when controlling the Inverter from
CompoBus/D.
Remote I/O functions and message functions can be
used to suit the application.
Replacement for the existing cooling fan of the
Inverter.
Replace the cooling fan if it has reached the end of its
service life or a warning of cooling fan failure (FAN) is
indicated.
H Dedicated Options
Name
DIN Track Mounting
Bracket
Model
3G3IV-PEZZ08122j
Description
An adapter making it possible to easily mount the
Inverter to DIN tracks.
H Recommended Options
Name
EMC-conforming
Input Noise Filter
(Rasmi)
9-8
Model
3G3IV-PRSj
Description
A Noise Filter on the input side meeting the EC
Directives EMC requirements.
The top of the Noise Filter has mounting screw holes
with which the Inverter mounted to the Noise Filter
can be secured.
Specifications
Chapter 9
9-2-2 CompoBus/D Communications Unit

H 3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV
This Unit is required when controlling the Inverter from CompoBus/D. Remote I/O functions and message functions can be used to suit the application.
Note Only CompoBus/D Communications Units manufactured after January 1st, 2000 can be connected to 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters. Earlier products are not compatible with these Inverters.
128
H External Dimensions (mm)
68
38
10.3
9-9
Specifications
Chapter 9
H Connection Example
C200HW-DRM21-V1 or
CVM1-DRM21-V1 Master Unit
3G3MV-series
Inverter
3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV
CompoBus/D Communications
Unit
Switch
RUN
FWD REV
Power
Supply
Motor
STOP
9-2-3 Fan Unit

H 3G3IV-PFANj
The Fan Unit is a replacement for the presently installed cooling fan of the Inverter. Replace the cooling
fan if it has reached the end of its service life or a warning of cooling fan failure (FAN) is indicated.
3-phase
p
200 V AC
Single-phase
g p
200 V AC
3-phase
p
400 V AC
Inverter
3G3MV-C2007
3G3MV-C2015
3G3MV-C2022
3G3MV-C2037
3G3MV-C2055
3G3MV-C2075
3G3MV-CB015
3G3MV-CB022
3G3MV-CB037
3G3MV-C4015/-A4022
3G3MV-C4037
3G3MV-C4055
3G3MV-C4075
H Replacement Method
Refer to 8-3 Maintenance and Inspection.
9-10
Fan Unit
3G3IV-PFAN2007
3G3IV-PFAN2015M
3G3IV-PFAN2022
3G3IV-PFAN2037
3G3IV-PFAN2015M
3G3IV-PFAN2037
3G3IV-PFAN2015M
3G3IV-PFAN2037
Specifications
Chapter 9
9-2-4 Braking Resistor

H DBTMV-jjjj-NO
Uses a resistor to absorb regenerative energy of the motor to reduce deceleration time.
(Usage rate: 10% ED.)
Note Usage rate: 10% ED indicates that the deceleration time can be reduced by 10% of the
operating time of one cycle.
H Applicable Models with Open DBT Resistor

Inverter
Voltage
Omron
Inverter
Model
Nominal
HP
Resistor
Watts
Resistor
Ohms
Quantity
Required
230V
1--
3G3MV-CB004
3G3MV-CB007
3G3MV-CB015
3G3MV-CB022
3G3MV-CB037
3G3MV-C2002
3G3MV-C2004
3G3MV-C2007
3G3MV-C2015
3G3MV-C2022
3G3MV-C2037
3G3MV-C2055
3G3MV-C2075
3G3MV-C4004
3G3MV-C4007
3G3MV-C4015
3G3MV-C4037
3G3MV-C4055
3G3MV-C4075
3/4
1
2
3
5
1/4
3/4
1
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
1
2
3
5
10
15
70W
70W
260W
260W
390W
70W
70W
70W
260W
260W
390W
520W
780W
70W
70W
260W
390W
520W
780W
300
300
70
70
40
300
300
300
70
70
40
30
20
750
750
400
150
100
75
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
230V
3--
460V
3--
Open
Smooth/Wirewound
Resistor
(See note below table.)
DBTMV-2001-N0
DBTMV-2001-N0
DBTMV-2003-N0
DBTMV-2003-N0
DBTMV-2005-N0
DBTMV-2001-N0
DBTMV-2001-N0
DBTMV-2001-N0
DBTMV-2003-N0
DBTMV-2003-N0
DBTMV-2005-N0
DBTMV-2010-N0
DBTMV-2010-N0
DBTMV-4002-N0
DBTMV-4002-N0
DBTMV-4003-N0
DBTMV-4005-N0
DBTMV-4010-N0
DBTMV-4015-N0
Note Open resistors are mounted on L-brackets and do not include a temperature switch.
9-11
Specifications
Chapter 9
9-2-5 Braking Resistor Unit

H DBSMV-jjjj-TS-N1
Uses a resistor to absorb regenerative energy of the motor to reduce deceleration time.
(Usage rate: 10% ED.)
Note Usage rate: 10% ED indicates that the deceleration time can be reduced by 10% of the
operating time of one cycle.
H Applicable Models with NEMA 1 DBS Resistor

Inverter
Voltage
Omron
Inverter
Model
230V
1--
3G3MV-CB004
3G3MV-CB007
3G3MV-CB015
3G3MV-CB022
3G3MV-CB037
3G3MV-C2002
3G3MV-C2004
3G3MV-C2007
3G3MV-C2015
3G3MV-C2022
3G3MV-C2037
3G3MV-C2055
3G3MV-C2075
3G3MV-C4004
3G3MV-C4007
3G3MV-C4015
3G3MV-C4037
3G3MV-C4055
3G3MV-C4075
230V
3--
460V
3--
Nominal Resistor Resistor

HP
Watts
Ohms
3/4
1
2
3
5
1/4
3/4
1
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
1
2
3
5
10
15
70W
70W
260W
260W
390W
70W
70W
70W
260W
260W
390W
520W
780W
70W
70W
260W
390W
520W
780W
300
300
70
70
40
300
300
300
70
70
40
30
20
750
750
400
150
100
75
Quantity
Required
NEMA 1
Wire-wound
Resistor (See note below table.)
table )
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DBSMV-2001-TS-N1
DBSMV-2001-TS-N1
DBSMV-2003-TS-N1
DBSMV-2003-TS-N1
DBSMV-2005-TS-N1
DBSMV-2001-TS-N1
DBSMV-2001-TS-N1
DBSMV-2001-TS-N1
DBSMV-2003-TS-N1
DBSMV-2003-TS-N1
DBSMV-2005-TS-N1
DBSMV-2010-TS-N1
DBSMV-2010-TS-N1
DBSMV-4002-TS-N1
DBSMV-4002-TS-N1
DBSMV-4003-TS-N1
DBSMV-4005-TS-N1
DBSMV-4010-TS-N1
DBSMV-4015-TS-N1
Note NEMA 1 resistors are housed in a steel mesh enclosure and include a normally closed temperature switch.
9-12
Specifications
Chapter 9
9-2-6 DC Reactor -- Consult factory

9-2-7 DIN Track Mounting Bracket
H 3G3IV-PEZZ08122j
An adapter making it possible to easily mount the Inverter to DIN tracks.
H Applicable Models
Inverter
3-phase
p
200 VAC
Single-phase
g p
200 VAC
3-phase
p
400 VAC
DIN Track Mounting

Bracket
3G3IV-PEZZ08122A
3G3MV-j2001/-j2002/-j2004/-j2007
3G3IV-PEZZ08122B
3G3MV-j2015/-j2022
3G3IV-PEZZ08122C
3G3MV-j2037
3G3IV-PEZZ08122A
3G3MV-jB001/-jB002/-jB004
3G3IV-PEZZ08122B
3G3MV-jB007/-jB015
3G3IV-PEZZ08122C
3G3MV-jB022
3G3IV-PEZZ08122D
3G3MV-jB037
3G3MV-j4002/-j4004/-j4007/-j4015/-j4022 3G3IV-PEZZ08122B
3G3IV-PEZZ08122C
3G3MV-j4037
9-13
Specifications
Chapter 9
H External Dimensions (mm)
(35.1)
3G3IV-PEZZ08122B
Four, M4 tap
DIN track
3G3IV-PEZZ08122A
3G3IV-PEZZ08122D
3G3IV-PEZZ08122C
Four, M4 tap
9-14
Four, M4 tap
Side View
(Common to all the Units)
Four, M4 tap
Specifications
Chapter 9
9-2-8 AC Reactor -- Consult factory

9-2-9 EMC-compatible Noise Filter
H 3G3MV-PFIj (Rasmi)
Be sure to select an optimum Noise Filter from the following so that the Inverter will satisfy EMC directive requirements of the EC Directives.
Connect the Noise Filter between the power supply and the input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) of
the Inverter.
The Inverter can be mounted to the upper side of the Noise Filter because the upper side of the Noise
Filter incorporates mounting holes for the Inverter.
H Applicable Models
Inverter
Voltage
3-phase
p
200 V AC
Single-phase
g p
200 V AC
3-phase
p
400 V AC
Model
3G3MVj2001/j2002/j2004/j2007
j2015/j2022
j2037
j2055/j2075
jB001/jB002/jB004
jB007/jB015
jB022
jB037
j4002/j4004
j4007/j4015/A4022
j4037
j4055/j4075
EMC-compatible Noise Filter

Model
Rated
Weight (kg)
3G3MV
current (A)
PFI2010V
10
0.8
PFI2020V
16
1.0
PFI2030V
26
1.1
PFI2050V
50
2.3
PFI1010V
10
0.6
PFI1020V
20
1.0
PFI1030V
30
1.1
PFI1040V
40
1.2
PFI3005V
5
1.0
PFI3010V
10
1.0
PFI3020V
15
1.1
PFI3030V
30
2.3
H Connection Example
MCCB
Noise Filter
SYSDRIVE 3G3MV
3-phase 200 V AC,

single-phase 200 V AC or
3-phase 400 V AC
9-15
Specifications
Chapter 9
H External Dimensions
Noise Filters for 3-phase 200/400-V AC Inverter Models
D 3G3MV-PFI2010V
Three, 5-dia. holes
Two, M4 holes
(for Inverter mounting use)
D 3G3MV-PFI2020V/-PFI3005V/PFI3010V
Voltage
g
Three, 5-dia. holes
Four, M4 holes
9-16
Model
3G3MV3G3MV
Dimension (mm)
A
3-phase 200 V
PFI2020V
50
25
3-phase
p
400 V
PFI3005V
45
22
PFI3010V
45
22
Specifications
Chapter 9
D 3G3MV-PFI2030V/-PFI3020V
Three, 5-dia. holes
Four, M4 holes
9-17
Specifications
Chapter 9
D 3G3MV-PFI2050V
Three, 6-dia. holes
Four, M5 holes
9-18
Specifications
Chapter 9
D 3G3MV-PFI3030V
Three, 6-dia. holes
Four, M5 holes
Noise Filters for Single-phase 200-V AC Models

D 3G3MV-PFI1010V
Three, 5-dia. holes
Two, M4 holes
9-19
Specifications
Chapter 9
D 3G3MV-PFI1020V
Three, 5-dia holes
Four, M4 holes
D 3G3MV-PFI1030V
Three, 5-dia holes
Four, M4 holes
9-20
Specifications
Chapter 9
D 3G3MV-PFI1040V
Three, 5-dia holes
Four, M4 holes
9-21
10
Chapter 10
List of Parameters
List of Parameters
Chapter 10
H Function Group 1 (n001 through n049)

Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n001
0101
Name
Parameter
write-prohibit
selection/parameter initialization
Description
Used to prohibit parameters to be

written, sets parameters, or change
the monitor range of parameters.
Used to initialize parameters to
default settings.
0: Parameter n001 is set or displayed. Parameters from n002 to
n179 can be displayed only.
1: Parameters from n001 to n049
(function group 1) are set or displayed.
(function groups 1 and 2) are set or
displayed.
(function groups 1 through 3) are
set or displayed.
(function groups 1 through 4) are
set or displayed.
6: Clears the error log.
8: Initializes parameters to default
settings in 2-wire sequence.
9: Initializes parameters to default
settings in 3-wire sequence.
10: For the USA, initializes parameter
in 2-wire sequence.
11: For the USA, initializes parameter
in 3-wire sequence.
10-2
Setting
range
0 to 9
Unit
of
setting
1
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
3-12
5-2
No
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n002
0102
Chapter 10
Name
Description
Control mode
selection
Used to select the control mode of the

Inverter.
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
0, 1
No
5-3
0 to 3
No
5-9
0: V/f control mode

1: Vector control mode (open loop)
Note
The set value in n002 is not initialized with n001 set to 8, 9, 10,
or 11.
Note
Each of the following parameters is initialized according to

the preset control mode. The
default setting varies with the
control mode.
n014: Middle output frequency

n015: Middle output frequency voltage
n016: Minimum output frequency
n017: Minimum output frequency
voltage
n104: Torque compensation primary
delay time constant
n111: Slip compensation gain
n112: Slip compensation primary
delay time constant
See the reference pages for details.
n003
0103
RUN command selection
Used to select the input method for

the RUN and STOP commands in
remote mode.
0: The STOP/RESET Key on the digital Operator is enabled.
1: Multi-function input is enabled
through the control circuit terminals
in 2- or 3-wire sequence.
2: RS-422/485 communications are
enabled.
3: Input is enabled from the optional
CompoBus/D Communications
Unit.
Note The RUN command only
through key sequences on the
Digital Operator is acceptable
in local mode.
10-3
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n004
0104
Name
Frequency
reference
selection
Chapter 10
Description
Used to set the input method for the

frequency reference in remote mode.
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
0 to 9
No
5-10
0, 1
No
5-28
0, 1
No
5-27
0, 1
No
5-9
0, 1
No
5-11
0, 1
No
5-22
0: Digital Operator
1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)
2: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 10 V)
3: Frequency reference control terminal (4 to 20 mA)
4: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 20 mA)
5: Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.
6: Frequency reference through
RS-422/RS-485 is enabled.
7: Multi-function analog voltage input
(0 to 10 V) is enabled.
8: Multi-function analog current input
(4 to 20 mA) is enabled.
9: Frequency reference input through
CompoBus/D communications is
enabled.
n005
0105
Stopping
method
selection
Used to set the stopping method for

use when the STOP command is
input.
0: Decelerates to stop in preset time.
1: Coasts to stop (with output turned
OFF by the STOP command)
n006
0106
Reverse rotation-prohibit
selection
Used to select the operation with the

reverse command input.
0: Reverse enabled (accept).
1: Reverse disabled (not accept).
n007
0107
STOP Key
function
selection
Used to enable/disable the STOP Key

in remote mode with n003 for operation mode selection not set to 0.
0: STOP Key of the Digital Operator
enabled.
1: STOP Key of the Digital Operator
disabled.
n008
0108
Frequency
reference
selection in
local mode
Used to set the input method for the

frequency reference in local mode.
0: The FREQ adjuster of the Digital
Operator enabled.
1: Key sequences on the Digital
Operator enabled. (Set in n024.)
n009
0109
Operator frequency setting method

selection
Used to enable the Enter Key for setting the frequency reference with the
Increment and Decrement Keys.
0: The value is entered with the Enter
Key pressed.
1: The value is enabled when the
value is input.
10-4
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n010
010A
Chapter 10
Name
Operation
selection at
Digital Operator interruption
Description
Setting
range
Select whether or not to detect the

OPR error (Digital Operator connection error).
0, 1
Unit
of
setting
1
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
No
6-38
0: No (The Inverter continues operating.)

1: Yes
(Error output turns ON and the
Inverter coasts to a stop)
n011
010B
Maximum frequency
(FMAX)
Used to set the V/f pattern as the

basic characteristic of the Inverter.
V/f control mode: set output voltage
per frequency
Vector control mode: set for torque
adjustment
50.0 to 0.1
400.0
Hz
60.0
No
5-6
n012
010C
Maximum
voltage
(VMAX)
Output (V)
voltage
n012
0.1 V
5-6
010D
Maximum
voltage frequency (FA)
200.0
(400.0)
(See
note 1.)
60.0
No
n013
0.1 to
255.0
(0.1 to
510.0)
0.2 to
400.0
No
5-6
n014
010E
Middle output
frequency
(FB)
0.1 to
399.9
0.1
Hz
1.5
(See
note 3.)
No
5-6
0.1 V
12.0
(24.0)
(See
note 2
and 3.)
No
5-6
0.1
Hz
1.5
(See
note 3.)
No
5-6
0.1 to
50.0
(0.1 to
100.0)
0.1 V
12.0
(24.0)
(See
note 2
and 3)
No
5-6
0, 1
No
5-25
n015
010F
Middle output
frequency
voltage (VC)
n016
0110

(FMIN)
n017
0111

voltage
(VMIN)
n0180
0112
Acceleration/
Deceleration
time setting
Unit (n018)
n015
n017
n016
Note
Note
n014
n013
FreFre
quency
n011 (Hz)
Set the parameters so that the

following condition will be satis
satis0.1 to
fied.
255.0
n016 n014 < n013 n011
(0.1 to
510.0)
The value set in n015 will be
i
ignored
d if parameters n016 and
d 0.1 to
n014 have the same value.
10.0
Select the unit of acceleration or

deceleration time of the Inverter.
0.1
Hz
0: 0.1 s Unit
(Less than 1,000 s: 0.1-s increments; 1,000 s or over: 1-s increments)
1: 0.01 s Unit
(Less than 100 s: 0.01-s increments; 100 s or over: 0.1-s increments)
Note 1. The values in brackets are those for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. For 200 and 400-V-class 5.5-/7.7-kW Inverters, this value is 10.0 V (20.0 V).
Note 3. Factory setting differs depending on control method selected (n002).
10-5
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
Name
n019
0113
Acceleration
time 1
n020
0114
Deceleration
time 1
n021
0115
Acceleration
time 2
n022
0116
Deceleration
time 2
n023
0117
S-shape
acceleration/
deceleration
characteristic
Chapter 10
Description
Acceleration time: The time required

to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency.
0.0 to
6,000
Deceleration
D
l ti time:
ti
The
Th time
ti
required
i d
Note The actual acceleration or
deceleration time is obtained
from the following formula.
Acceleration/Deceleration time
= (Acceleration/Deceleration
time set value) (Frequency
reference value) (Max. frequency)
Used to set S-shape acceleration/de- 0 to 3
celeration characteristics.
0: No S-shape acceleration/deceleration (trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration)
1: S-shape acceleration/deceleration
characteristic time 0.2 s
Note When the S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic
time is set, the acceleration and
deceleration times will be
lengthened according to the
S-shape at the beginning and
end of acceleration/deceleration.
10-6
Setting
range
Unit Default Changes Refof

setting
during
ersetoperaence
ting
tion
page
0.1 s 10.0
Yes
5-25
(chan
ge in
n018)
10.0
Yes
5-25
10.0
Yes
5-25
10.0
Yes
5-25
No
5-27
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n024
0118
n025
0119
n026
011A
n027
011B
n028
011C
n029
011D
n030
011E
n031
011F
n032
0120
n033
0121
Upper frequency reference limit
n034
0122
Lower frequency reference limit
Chapter 10
Name
Description
Setting
range
Frequency
reference 1
Frequency
reference 2
Frequency
reference 3
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 8
Inching frequency command
Used to set internal frequency references.

Note Frequency reference 1 is
enabled in remote mode with
n004 for frequency reference
selection set to 1.
0.0 to
max.
fre
frequency
Note
Unit Default
of
setting
setting
0.01
6.00
Hz
(chan 0.00
ge in
n035)
0.00
These frequency references

multi step
are selected with multi-step
speed references (multi-function input). See the reference
pages for the relationship
between multi
step speed refref
multi-step
erences and frequency references.
Used to set the inching frequency

command.
Note The inching frequency command is selected with the inching command (multi-function
input). The inching frequency
command takes precedence
over the multi-step speed reference.
Used to set the upper and lower frequency reference limits in percentage
based on the maximum frequency as
100%.
Note If n034 is set to a value less than
the minimum output frequency
(n016), the Inverter will have no
output when a frequency reference less than the minimum
output frequency input is input.
Changes
during
operation
Reference
page
Yes
5-19
Yes
5-19
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
6.00
Yes
5-21
0 to
110
1%
100
No
5-11
0 to
110
1%
No
5-11
10-7
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n035
0123
Chapter 10
Name
Frequency
reference setting/display
unit selection
Description
Set the unit of frequency reference

and frequency-related values to be
set or monitored through the Digital
Operator.
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
0 to
3,999
No
5-18
0.0 to
150%
of rated
output
current
of the
Inverter
0.1 A
Varies
with the
capacity
No
5-4
5-6
0 to 2
No
6-38
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.1%
2 to 39: rpm (number of motor poles)
40 to 3,999: The value to be set or
monitored at max. frequency.
Set the value as shown below.
jjjj
Three digits
Note
Decimal place (See

note below)
To display 50.0, for example,
set the value to 1500. The setting unit of each parameter or
monitor item below varies with
the decimal place.
Parameters: n024 through n032 and

n120 through n127
Monitor Items: U-01 and U-02
n036
0124
Rated motor
current
Used to set the rated motor current

for motor overload detection (OL1)
based on the rated motor current.
Note In vector control mode, this
parameter is used as a constant
for vector control operation.
Note
Note
n037
0125
Motor protection characteristics
Motor overload detection (OL1)

is disabled by setting the
parameter to 0.0.
The rated motor current is
default to the standard rated
current of the maximum applicable motor.
Used to set the motor overload detection (OL1) for the electronic thermal
characteristics of the motor.
0: Protection characteristics for general-purpose induction motors
1: Protection characteristics for
inverter-dedicated motors
2: No protection
Note If a single Inverter is connected
to more than one motor, set the
parameter to 2 for no protection.
The parameter is also disabled
by setting n036 for rated motor
to 0.0.
10-8
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n038
0126
Chapter 10
Name
Motor protective time
Description
Note
0127
Cooling fan
operation
Unit
of
setting
Used to set the electric thermal char1 to 60 1 min

acteristics of the motor to be connected in 1-minute increments.
Note The default setting does not
require any changes in normal
operation.
Note
n039
Setting
range
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
No
6-38
To set the parameter according

to the characteristics of the
motor, check with the motor
manufacturer the thermal time
constant and set the parameter
with some margin. In other
words, set the value slightly
shorter than the thermal time
constant.
To detect motor overloading
quicker, reduce the set value,
provided that it does not cause
any application problems.
Used to operate the Cooling Fan of

the Inverter while the Inverter is
turned ON or only while the Inverter is
in operation.
0, 1
No
6-39
No
---
10.0
Yes
5-26
---
---
---
0: Rotates only while RUN command

is input and for 1 minute after
Inverter stops operating
1: Rotates while Inverter is turned ON
Note This parameter is available only
if the Inverter incorporates a
Cooling Fan.
Note
n040
0128
If the operation frequency of the

Inverter is low, the life of the fan
can be prolonged by setting the
parameter to 0.
Motor
Rotation
0: Rotate C.C.W.
Acceleration time: The time required

n041
0129
Acceleration
Time 3
(note 4)
n042
012A
Deceleration
Time 3
(note 4)
n043
012B
Acceleration
Time 4
(note 4)
n044
012C
Deceleration
Time 4
(note 4)
n045
to
n049
---
Not used
1: Rotate C.W. (or opposite direction)
Deceleration
D
l ti titime: Th
The titime required
i d
Note The actual acceleration or
deceleration time is obtained
from the following formula.
= (Acceleration/Deceleration
time set value) (Frequency
reference value) (Max. frequency)
---
0.00 to 0.01
600.00 (sec)
or
or
0.0 to
0.1
6000.0 (sec)
(Dependent
on
n018
setting).
---
---
10-9
List of Parameters
Chapter 10

Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n050
0132
(Input terminal S1)
n051
0133
(Input terminal S2)
Description
Used to select the functions of multi-function

input terminals S1 through S7.
Set
value
Function
Forward/
Reverse
rotation
command
Description
3-wire sequence (to
be set in n052 only)
By setting to 0, the set
values in n050 and
n051 are ignored and
the following settings
are forciblyy made.
S1 RUN iinputt (RUN
S1:
when ON)
S2: STOP input
(STOP when OFF)
S3: Forward/Reverse
rotation command
(OFF: Forward; ON:
Reverse)
Forward rotation command in 2-wire
sequence. (Forward
rotation with the signal
turned ON)
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defaul
ChanReft set- ges durerting
ing
ence
opera- page
tion
1 to
25
(26
See
note.)
No
5-29
1 to
25
(26
See
note.)
No
5-29
0 to
25
(26
See
note.)
No
5-29
1 to
25
(26
See
note.)
No
5-29
n052
0134
(Input terminal S3)
n053
0135
(Input terminal S4)
Forward/
Stop
n054
0136
(Input terminal S5)
Reverse/
Stop
Reverse rotation command in 2-wire

sequence (Reversed
with the terminal
turned ON)
1 to
25
(26
See
note.)
No
5-29
n055
0137
((Input
p terminal
i l S6)
S )
External
fault (NO)
ON: External fault

(EFj detection: j is
a terminal number)
No
5-29
External
fault (NC)
OFF: External fault

(EFj detection: j is
a terminal number)
1 to
25
((26
S
See
note.)
(Input terminal S7)
Fault reset
ON: Fault reset (disabled while RUN command is input)
10
No
5-29
n056
0138
1 to
1
25,
(26
See
note.)
34, 35
Note Inverter overheating warning (setting value: 26) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
10-10
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n056
0138
((Input
p terminal
i l S7)
S )
Chapter 10
Description
Multi-step
speed reference 1
Signals to select frequency references 1

through
g 16.
Multi-step
speed reference 2
Multi-step
speed reference 3
Multi-step
speed reference 4
Refer to 5-6-4 Setting

Frequency References
through Key
Sequences for the
relationship between
multi-step speed references and frequency
references.
10
Inching frequency
command
ON: Inching frequency

command (taking precedence over the multi-step speed reference)
11
changeover
External
base block
command
(NO)
External
base block
command
(NC)
Search
command
(Searching
starts from
maximum
frequency)
ON: Acceleration time

2 and deceleration
time 2 are selected.
15
Search
command
(Searching
starts from
preset frequency)
ON: Speed search
16
Acceleration/Deceleration-prohibit command
ON: Acceleration/Deceleration is on hold

(running at parameter
frequency)
17
Local or
remote
selection
ON: Local mode

(operated with the Digital Operator)
18
Communications/
remote
selection
ON: Communications
input is enabled.
12
13
14
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defaul
ing
ence
opera- page
tion
ON: Output turned

OFF
OFF: Output turned

OFF
ON: Speed search

n011)
10-11
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n056
0138
(Input terminal S7)
Chapter 10
Description
19
Emergency
stop fault
(NO)
20
Emergency
stop warning (NO)
21
Emergency
stop fault
(NC)
22
23
Emergency
stop warning (NC)
The Inverter stops

according to the setting in n005 for interruption mode selection
with the emergency
stop input turned ON.
ON
NO: Emergency stop
with the contact
closed.
NC: Emergency stop
with the contact
opened.
Fault: Fault output is
ON and reset with
RESET input. Warning
output is ON (no reset
required).
STP is displayed (lit
with fault input ON and
flashes with alarm
input ON)
PID control
cancel
PID control
integral
reset
ON: PID control disabled.

ON: Integral value
reset.
25
PID control
integral
hold
ON: Keeps integral

value on hold.
26
(See
note)
Overheat
Pre-alarm
OH3
ON: Displays inverter

overheating warning
(oH3).
27
Accel/Decel
time select
2
ON: Signals to select

accel and decel times
1 through 4.
34
Up or down
command
Up or down command
(set in n056 only)
24
By setting n056 to 34,

the set value in n055
is ignored and the following setting are forcibly made.
S6: Up command
S7: Down command
35
Self-diagnostic test
ON: RS-422/485 communications self-diagnostic test (set in n056

only)
Note Available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
10-12
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defaul ChanReft set- ges durerting

ing
ence
opera- page
tion
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n057
0139
Multi-function output
1 (MA/MB
and MC
output
t t tert
minals)
n058
n059
013A
013B
2 (P1-PC
output terminals)
3 (P2-PC
(
output terminals)
Chapter 10
Description
Used to select the functions of multi-function

output terminals.
Set
Function
Description
value
Fault output
ON: Fault output (with

protective function
working)
During
RUN
Frequency
agree
ON: During RUN
Zero speed
ON: Zero speed (at

less than min. output
frequency)
Frequency
detection 1
ON: Output frequency

frequency detection
level (n095)
Frequency
detection 2

frequency detection
level (n095)
Overtorque
being monitored (NOcontact output)
Output if any of the following parameter

conditions is satisfied.

agree with frequency
reference
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defaul
ing
ence
opera- page
tion
0 to 7, 1
10 to
19
(21
S
See
note.)
No
5-35
0 to 7, 1
10 to
19
(21
See
note )
note.)
No
5-35
0 to 7, 1
10 to
19
(
(21
See
note.)
No
5-35
n096: Overtorque
detection function
selection 1
n097: Overtorque
detection function
selection 2
Overtorque
being monitored (NCcontact output)
n098:
098 Overtorque
O t
detection level
n099: Overtorque
detection time
NO contact: ON with
overtorque being
detected
NC contact: OFF with
overtorque being
detected
Not used
---
10
Warning
output
ON: Warning being

detected (Nonfatal
error being detected)
11
Base block
in progress
12
RUN mode
ON: Base block in

progress (in operation
with output turned
OFF)
ON: Local mode (with
the Digital Operator)
8
9
10-13
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n059
013B
3 (P2-PC
output terminals)
Chapter 10
Description
13
Inverter
ready
14
During auto restart
15
During under voltage
16
During reverse run
17
During speed search
18
Serial Comm. Controlled
19
PID feedback loss
20
Frequency
reference
loss
(See
note)
21
(See
note)
Inverter
overheating
warning
oH3
ON: Inverter ready to

operate (with no fault
detected)
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
0 to 7,, 1
10 to
19
(21
See
note.)

ing
ence
opera- page
tion
2
No
5-35
ON: Frequency reference lost (when frequency reference loss

detection in n064 is
enabled, and either
analog input or pulse
train input is set for
frequency reference
selection in n004)
ON: Inverter overheating warning (ON when
the multi-function input
warning signal is being
input, i.e., when 0H3 is
flashing.)
Note Frequency reference loss (setting value: 20) and inverter overheating warning (setting value: 21)
can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
10-14
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n060
013C
Frequency
reference
gain
n061
013D
Frequency
reference
bias
Chapter 10
Description
Used to set the input characteristics of analog

frequency references.
Gain: The frequency of maximum analog input
(10 V or 20 mA) in percentage based on the
Bias: The frequency of minimum analog input
(0 V or 0 or 4 mA) in percentage based on the
Setting
range
0 to
255
Unit
of
setting
1%
Defaul
ing
ence
opera- page
tion
100
Yes
5-12
--100 1%
to 100
Yes
5-12
n062
013E
Analog fre- Used to set the digital filter with a first-order lag
quency ref- for analog frequency references to be input.
erence filter time
constant
0.00
to
2.00
0.01 s
0.10
Yes
5-12
n063
---
Not used
---
---
---
---
---
---
n064
0140
Frequency
reference
loss detection (See
note.)
Selects the frequency loss detection function

for when the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal suddenly drops.
No
5-17
0, 1
No
5-37
n065
0141
output type
selection
0: No detection
1: Enable (Continue operation at 80% of frequency reference prior to loss.)
Note: Frequency reference loss: Frequency
reference voltage drop of 90% within 400 ms.
Selects the multi-function analog output type.
0: Analog voltage output (functions set in n066)
1: Pulse train output (functions set in n150)
10-15
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n066
0142
output
Chapter 10
Description
Selects the monitor item with n065 set to 0.
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defaul
ing
ence
opera- page
tion
0 to 6
No
5-37
0.00
to
2.00
0.01
1.00
Yes
5-37
--255 1%
to 255
100
Yes
5-14
--100 1%
to 100
Yes
5-14
0.10
Yes
5-15
0: Output frequency (with 10-V output at max.

frequency)
1: Output current (with 10-V output with
Inverter rated output current)
2: Main circuit DC voltage (with 10-V output at
400 [800] V DC)
3: Vector operation torque monitor (with 10-V
output at rated motor torque)
4: Output power (with 10-V output at power
equivalent to max. applicable motor capacity) Cannot be monitored in vector control
mode.
5: Output voltage (with 10-V output at
200 [400] V AC)
6: Frequency reference
Note Values in ( ) apply with n067 set to 1.00.
n067
0143
output gain
n068
0144
voltage
input gain
n069
0145
voltage
input bias
Note Values in [ ] are for 400-V models.

Used to set the output characteristics of multifunction analog output.
Sets the input characteristics of multi-function
analog voltage input.
Gain:Sets the frequency of maximum analog
input (10 V) in percentage based on the
Bias: Sets the frequency of minimum analog
input (0 V) in percentage based on the
n070
0146
voltage
input filter
time constant
Sets a primary lag digital filter for multi-function

analog voltage input.
0.00
to
2.00
n071
0147
current
input gain
Sets the input characteristics of multi-function

analog current input.
--255 1%
to 255
100
Yes
5-14
--100 1%
to 100
Yes
5-14
0.00
to
2.00
0.10
Yes
5-15
n072
n073
10-16
0148
0149
current
input bias
current
input filter
time constant
Gain:Sets the frequency of maximum analog

input (20 mA) in percentage based on the
Bias: Sets the frequency of minimum analog
input (4 mA) in percentage based on the
Sets a primary delay digital filter for multi-function analog current input.
0.01 s
0.01 s
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n074
014A
Pulse train
frequency
reference
gain
n075
014B
Pulse train
frequency
reference
bias
n076
014C
Pulse train
frequency
reference
filter time
constant
n077
014D
input
selection
Chapter 10
Description
Sets the input characteristics of pulse train

input.
Gain:Sets the gain in percentage based on the
maximum frequency of the pulse train
input scale in n149 as 100%.
100%
Bias: Sets the bias in percentage for frequency
reference input at 0-Hz pulse train input
100%.
Sets the pulse train inputs primary-delay digital
filter for frequency reference.
Selects the function allocated to the multi-function analog input terminal.
Setting
range
0 to
255
Unit
of
setting
1%

ing
ence
opera- page
tion
100
Yes
5-23
--100 1%
to 100
Yes
5-23
0.00
to
2.00
0.01 s
0.10
Yes
5-24
0 to 4
No
5-13
0 to 1
No
5-13
0 to
50
1%
10
No
5-13
0: Multi-function analog input disabled

1: Aux. Frequency reference
2: Frequency gain
3: Frequency bias
4: Voltage bias
n078
n079
014E
014F
input signal selection
input bias
setting
Note: When setting 3, also set the standard

value for the bias in n079.
Used to set the input method for the digital
operators multi-function analog input.
0: 0 -10V
1: 4 -20 mA
Used to set the input characteristics of the
digital operators multi-function analog input.
0 to 50
10-17
List of Parameters
Chapter 10

Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n080
0150
Carrier frequency
selection
Description
0151
Momentary
power
interruption
compensation
Unit
of
setting
Used to set the carrier frequency.

1 to 4, 1
Note The default setting does not need any 7 to 9
changes in normal operation.
Note
n081
Setting
range
Refer to 6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency for details.
Used to specify the processing that is performed when a momentary power interruption
occurs.
Defa
ult
setting
ChanRefges dur- ering

ence
opera- page
tion
Varies No
with
the
capacity.
6-23
0 to 2
No
6-39
0: Inverter stops operating

1: Inverter continues operating if power interruption is 0.5 s or less.
2: Inverter restarts when power is restored.
n082
0152
Number of
fault retries
Used set the number of times that reset and

restart are automatically attempted for the
Inverter when the Inverter has an overvoltage
fault or overcurrent fault.
0 to
10
No
6-40
n083
0153
Jump frequency 1
Used to set the frequency jump function.
0.00
to
400.0
0.01
Hz
0.00
No
6-40
0.00
to
400.0
0.01
Hz
0.00
No
6-40
0.00
to
400.0
0.01
Hz
0.00
No
6-40
0.00
Set n083 to n085 to satisfy the following to
condition.
25.50
n083 n084 n085
0.01
Hz
0.00
No
6-40
0, 1
No
6-42
0 to
6,550
1=10
H
No
6-42
n084
0154
Jump frequency 2
n085
0155
Jump frequency 3
Output
frequency
Frequency
reference
n086
0156
Jump
width
n087
0157

function
selection
(See note.)
Selects the operating status to be accumulated.

(See note.)
Sets the initial value for the accumulated operating time, with 10 h as 1.
n088
0158
Note
0: Accumulate the time that the Inverter power

is ON (i.e., the time from when the power is
turned ON until it is shut OFF).
1: Accumulate Inverter execution time (i.e., the
time that forward or reverse signals are being
input).
The accumulation begins from the set time.

The accumulated operating times monitor value (U-13) can be cleared to 0 by setting 0
here.
Note Accumulated operating time can be selected with 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.
10-18
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
n089
0159
DC injection braking current
n090
015A
DC injection braking-to-stop
time
Startup DC
injection
braking
time
n091
n092
015B
015C
Stall prevention
during
deceleration
Chapter 10
Description
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defa
ult
setting

ence
opera- page
tion
Used to impose DC on the induction motor for

braking control.
0 to
100
1%
50
No
6-26
Sets the DC braking current as a percentage

based on the rated current of the Inverter as
100%.
0.0 to
25.5
0.1 s
0.5
No
6-26
0.0 to
25.5
0.1 s
0.0
No
6-26
0, 1
No
6-27
30 to
200
1%
170
No
6-28
30 to
200
1%
160
No
6-29
Output
frequency
Minimum
output
frequency
(n016)
Time
n091
n090
Used to select a function to change the deceleration time of the motor automatically so that
there will be no overvoltage imposed on the
motor during deceleration.
0: Stall prevention during deceleration enabled
1: Stall prevention during deceleration disabled
Note
n093
n094
015D
015E
Be sure to set the parameter to 1 when

the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking
resistor is used as an option.
Stall prevention
level during acceleration
Used to select a function to stop the acceleration of the motor automatically for stall prevention during acceleration.
Stall prevention
level during operation
Used to select a function to reduce the output

frequency of the Inverter automatically for stall
prevention during operation.
Sets the level as a percentage based on the

rated current of the Inverter as 100%.
Sets the level as a percentage based on the

rated current of the Inverter as 100%.
n095
015F
Frequency
detection
level
Used to set the frequency to be detected.

0.00
Note The parameter n059 for multi-function to
output must be set for the output of fre- 400.0
quency detection levels 1 and 2.
0.01
Hz
0.00
No
6-43
n096
0160
Overtorque
detection
function
selection 1
Used to enable or disable overtorque detection

and select the processing method after overtorque detection.
0 to 4
No
6-31
0, 1
No
6-31
0: Overtorque detection disabled

1: Overtorque detection only when speed coincides and operation continues (issues
alarm)
2: Overtorque detection only when speed coincides and output turned OFF (for protection)
3: Overtorque always detected and operation
continues (issues alarm)
4: Overtorque always detected and output
turned OFF (for protection)
n097
0161
Overtorque Select the item to detect overtorque.

detection
0: Detected from output torque.
function
selection 2 1: Detected from output current.
10-19
List of Parameters
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
n098
0162
Name
Chapter 10
Description
Overtorque Used to set overtorque detection level.

detection
Detection from output torque: Set as a percentlevel
age based on the rated motor torque as 100%.
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defa
ult
setting

ence
opera- page
tion
30 to
200
1%
160
No
6-32
Detection from output current: Set as a percentage based on the rated Inverter output current as 100%.
n099
0163
Overtorque Used to set the detection time of overtorque.

detection
time
0.1 to
10.0
0.1 s
0.1
No
6-32
n100
0164
UP/DOWN
frequency
memory
0, 1
No
6-44
Used to store the adjusted frequency reference

with the UP/DOWN function.
0: Frequency not stored
1: Frequency stored
The frequency must be on hold for 5 s or
more.
n101
0165
Speed
search deceleration
time (see
note.)
Used to set deceleration time during a speed 0.0 to

search.
10.0
0.1
(sec)
No
5-34
n102
0166
Speed
search operation level (see
note.)
Used to set the current level against which the 0 to

output current is compared during a speed 200%
search.
1%
150
No
5-34
n103
0167
Torque
Used to set the gain of the torque compensa0.0 to
compensation function.
2.5
tion gain
Note The default setting does not need any
0.1
1.0
Yes
6-34
n104
0168
Torque
Sets the response speed of the torque com0.0 to
compensa- pensation function.
25.5
tion priNote Normally, the default setting does not
mary delay
need to be changed.
time constant
0.1 s
0.3
No
6-34
n105
0169
Torque
Sets the core loss of the motor in use.
0.0 to
compensa- Note Normally, the default setting does not 6,550
tion core
need to be changed.
loss
Note This parameter is enabled in V/f control
mode only.
0.1 W
Varies No
with
the
capacity.
6-35
n106
016A
Rated
motor slip
0.1
Hz
Varies Yes
with
the
capacity.
6-36
Used to set the rated slip value of the motor in

0.0 to
use.
20.0
Note Used as the constant of the slip compensation function or vector control.
Note Speed search deceleration time and speed search operating level can be set for 5.5-kW and
7.5-kW Inverters only.
10-20
List of Parameters
Chapter 10
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
Description
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
n107
016B
Motor
phase-toneutral
resistance
n108
016C
Motor leak- Sets the leakage inductance of the motor in

0.00
age induc- use.
to
tance
Note This parameter is used as a vector con- 655.0
trol constant.
Set this parameter to the phase-to-neutral

0.000
resistance or 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resisto
tance of the motor.
65.50
Note This parameter is used as a vector control constant.
0.001
Varies No
with
the
capacity
5-5
6-2
0.01
mH
Varies No
with
the
capacity.
6-2
1%
150
No
6-3
Note
n109
016D
The Inverter with the default setting in this

parameter fully functions in vector control.
Torque
Sets a limit on the torque compensation func0 to
compensation in vector control mode.
250
tion limit
Note Normally, the default setting does not
need to be changed.
Note
Defa
ult
setting

ence
opera- page
tion
The Inverter in torque compensation control limits the torque at a current 1.5 times
larger than the set value.
n110
016E
Motor noload current
Used to set the no-load current of the motor in

0 to
use based on the rated motor current as 100%. 99
Note Used as the constant of vector control
and the slip compensation function.
1%
Varies No
with
the
capacity
5-5
n111
016F
Slip compensation
gain
Used to set the gain of the slip compensation

0.0 to
function.
2.5
Note The default is set to 1.0 in vector control
mode.
0.1
0.0
Yes
6-36
0.1 s
2.0
No
6-36
0, 1
No
6-37
---
---
---
---
---
Note
n112
0170
Slip compensation
primary
delay time
Used for the response speed of the slip com0.0 to

pensation function.
25.5
Note The default is set to 0.2 in vector control
mode.
Note
n113
n114
0171
The slip compensation function is disabled with n111 set to 0.0.
The default setting does not need any

Slip compensation
during
regeneration
Selects the slip compensation function in

regenerative operation.
Not used
---
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note This parameter is valid only in vector control mode.
10-21
List of Parameters
Chapter 10
Para
meter
No.
Register
No.
(Hex)
Name
Description
n115
0173
Stall prevention
level automatic suppression
selection
Selects whether or not to automatically decrease the level for stall prevention during operation if the frequency lies in a constant output range exceeding the frequency set in n013
for max. voltage frequency (a range greater
than the rated motor frequency).
Setting
range
Unit
of
setting
Defa
ult
setting

ence
opera- page
tion
0, 1
No
6-29
0, 1
No
6-30
0 to 4
No
6-33
0: Automatic suppression function disabled

(the value of n094 is valid for any frequency)
1: Automatic suppression function enabled.
Note The operation level is decreased by n094
(max. voltage frequency/output frequency).
Note The stall prevention function during operation operates according to the acceleration/deceleration time set in n116.
n116
n117
0174
0175
Stall prevention acceleration/

deceleration time
setting
Sets the acceleration/deceleration time for the

stall prevention function during operation.
Undertorque detection select
Select the item to detect undertorque (similar

to n096).
0: Accelerates or decelerates according to acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2, whichever is selected.

1: Accelerates or decelerates according to acceleration/deceleration time 2. (n021/n022).
Note When a faster (or slower) acceleration/
deceleration time is desired, set this parameter to 1 and set the desired acceleration/deceleration time for stall prevention operation in acceleration/deceleration time 2.
0: Undertorque detection disabled

1: Detected during constant speed running.
Operation continues after detection.
2: Detected during constant speed running
operation stops during detection.
3: Detected during all frequency conditions.
Operation continues
4: Detected during all frequency conditions.
coast to stop.
n118
0176
Undertorque detection level
Used to set undertorque detection level.

Inverter rated current = 100%; if n097 = 0
(detection by torque): motor rated torque becomes 100%
0 to
200%
1(%)
No
6-34
n119
0177
Undertorque detection time
Used to set the detection time of undertorque.
0.1 to
10.0
0.1
(sec)
0.1
No
6-34
10-22
List of Parameters
Chapter 10

Param- Regiseter
ter No.
No.
(Hex)
n120
0178
n121
0179
n122
017A
n123
017B
n124
017C
n125
017D
n126
017E
n127
017F
n128
0180
Name
Description
Setting
range
Frequency
reference 9
Frequency
reference 10
Frequency
reference 11
Frequency
reference 12
Frequency
reference 13
Frequency
reference 14
Frequency
reference 15
Frequency
reference 16
Sets the internal frequency refer0.00

ences.
Hz to
Note These frequency references max.
multi step
are selected with multi-step
speed references (multi-function inputs).
p ) See the reference
pages for the relationship
p frequency
q
y
between multi-step
references and frequency references.
PID control
selection
0: PID control disabled
0 to 8
Unit of
setting
Default Changes Refsetting

during
eroperaence
tion
page
0.01 Hz
(Chang
eable
with
n035
settings)
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
0.00
Yes
5-19
No
6-16
1: D = Feed Forward
2: D = Feedback
3: Reference + PID (D = Feed Forward)
4: Reference + PID (D = Feedback)
5: Inverse PID - D = Feed Forward
6: Inverse PID - D = Feedback
7: Inverse PID - Reference + PID
(D = Feed Forward)
8: Inverse PID - Reference + PID
(D = Feedback)
n129
0181
Feedback
value adjustment gain
Sets the value by which the feed0.00 to 0.01

back value is multiplied.
10.00
Note This parameter is used for
adjusting the target and
detected values so that they
will have the same input level.
1.00
Yes
6-16
n130
0182
Proportional
(P) gain
Sets the proportional (P) gain for PID 0.0 to

control.
25.0
Note PID control is disabled with this
parameter set to 0.0.
0.1
1.0
Yes
6-16
n131
0183
Integral (I)
time
Sets the integral (I) time for PID con- 0.0 to

trol.
360.0
Note Integral control is disabled with
this parameter set to 0.0.
0.1 s
1.0
Yes
6-16
n132
0184
Derivative
(D) time
Sets the derivative (D) time for PID

0.00 to 0.01 s
control.
2.50
Note Derivative control is disabled
with this parameter set to 0.0.
0.00
Yes
6-17
10-23
List of Parameters
Param- Register No.
eter
(Hex)
No.
n133
0185
Chapter 10
Name
PID offset
adjustment
Description
This parameter is for the offset

adjustment of all PID control.
Setting
range
Unit of
setting

during
eroperaence
tion
page
--100
to 100
1%
Yes
6-17
-100
to 100
1%
100
Yes
6-17
Sets the parameter as a percentage

100%.
n134
0186
Integral (I)
upper limit
Sets the upper limit value of integral

control output.
100%.
n135
0187
PID primary
delay time
Set this parameter to the primary

0.0 to
delay time constant for the frequency 10.0
reference after PID control.
Note Normally, the default setting
does not need to be changed.
0.1 s
0.0
Yes
6-17
n136
0188
Feedback
loss detection selection
Sets the detection method of feedback loss in PID control.
0 to 2
No
6-17
0 to
100
1%
No
6-18
0: Feedback loss detection disabled.

1: Feedback loss detection enabled
(Nonfatal error: FbL warning)
2: Feedback loss detection enabled
(Fatal error: FbL fault)
n137
0189
Feedback
loss detection level
Sets the detection level of feedback

loss.
based on the feedback value equivalent to the maximum frequency as
100%.
n138
018A
Feedback
loss detection time
Sets the detection time of feedback

0.0 to
loss.
25.5
Note If the detection level set in
n137 or lower is detected for
the set time in n138, the result
will be determined as feedback
loss.
0.1 s
1.0
No
6-18
n139
018B
selection
Select the energy-saving control

function.
No
6-6
0.1
Varies
with the
capacity
No
6-7
0, 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note This parameter is enabled in
V/f control mode only.
n140
10-24
018C
coefficient
K2
Sets the coefficient for the primary

0.0 to
level of energy-saving control.
6,550
Note The constant automatically
changes according to the
motor code in n158. Make fine
adjustments of the contact if
necessary after setting the
motor code in n158.
List of Parameters
Param- Register No.
eter
(Hex)
No.
Chapter 10
Name
Description
Setting
range
Unit of
setting

during
eroperaence
tion
page
0 to
120
n141
018D
Energy-saving voltage
lower limit at
60-Hz output
These parameters prevent the output voltage of the Inverter from dropping excessively so that the motor
will not stall or come to a stop at the
primary level of energy-saving control.
1%
50
No
6-8
n142
018E
lower limit at
6-Hz output
Sets the lower limit of output voltage 0 to 25 1%

as a percentage at each frequency
based on the rated motor voltage as
100%.
Note Normally, the default settings
do not need to be changed.
12
No
6-8
n143
018F
Power averaging time
Sets the time required to calculate

the average of power used in energy-saving control.
1 to
200
1 (24
ms)
No
6-7
0 to
100
1%
No
6-9
Power averaging time (ms) = Set

value x 24 (ms)
n144
0190
Probe operation voltage

limit
Sets the range of voltage control for

the secondary level of energy-saving
control.
100%.
Note No probe operation is available with the parameter set to
0.
n145
0191
n146
0192
n147
---
Probe operation control

voltage step
at 100%
Probe operation control
voltage step
at 5%
Not used
Sets the range of probe operation

0.1 to
voltage as a percentage based on
10.0
the rated motor voltage as 100%.
does not need to be changed. 0.1 to
10.0
0.1%
0.5
No
6-9
0.1%
0.2
No
6-9
---
---
---
---
---
---
Pulse train
input scale
Set this parameter to the pulse train

input scale so that frequency references can be executed by pulse
train input.
100 to
3,300
1 (10
Hz)
2,500
No
5-23
n148
n149
0195
Set the maximum pulse train frequency in 10-Hz increments based

on 10 Hz as 1.
Note This parameter is enabled with
n004 for frequency reference
selection set to 5.
10-25
List of Parameters
Param- Register No.
eter
(Hex)
No.
n150
0196
Chapter 10
Name
Pulse monitor output

frequency
selection
Description
Select the relationship between the

pulse train output frequency and output frequency.
0: 1,440 Hz at max. frequency (A
proportional relationship is applied
to frequencies less than the maximum frequency)
Setting
range
Unit of
setting
0, 1, 6, 1
12, 24,
36, 40,
45

during
eroperaence
tion
page
0
No
5-38
No
7-2
No
7-3
1: 1x output frequency
40: 1440Hz / Max. output frequency
Frequency Reference Monitor:
41: Frequency reference * 1
Note This parameter is enabled with
n065 set to 1.
n151
0197
RS-422/485
communications timeover detection selection
The set value in the parameter deter- 0 to 4

mines whether communications
time-over detection will be performed
with CE displayed if there is an
interval of more than 2 s between
normal communications and how the
detected communications time-over
will be processed.
0: Detects time-over, fatal error, and
the Inverter coasts to a stop.
1: Detects time-over, detects fatal
error, and the Inverter decelerates
to a stop in deceleration time 1.
2: Detects time-over, detects fatal
error, and the Inverter decelerates
to a stop in deceleration time 2.
3: Detects time-over, detects nonfatal error warning, and the Inverter
continues operating.
4: No time-over is detected.
n152
0198
RS-422/485
communications frequency reference/display
unit selection
Sets the unit of frequency reference

and frequency-related values to be
set or monitored through communications.
0: 0.1 Hz
1: 0.01 Hz
2: Converted value based on 30,000
as max. frequency
3: 0.1% (Max. frequency: 100%)
10-26
0 to 3
List of Parameters
Param- Register No.
eter
(Hex)
No.
n153
0199
Chapter 10
Name
RS-422/485
communications Slave
address
Description
Set this parameter to the Slave

address (Slave unit number) for
communications.
Setting
range
Unit of
setting

during
eroperaence
tion
page
00 to
32
00
No
7-3
0 to 3
No
7-3
0 to 2
No
7-3
00: Broadcast message (with the

communications function disabled)
01 to 32: Slave address
n154
019A
RS-422/485
baud rate
selection
Select the communications baud

rate.
0: 2,400 bps
1: 4,800 bps
2: 9,600 bps
3: 19,200 bps
n155
019B
RS-422/485
parity selection
Select the parity check function for

communications data.
0: Even
1: Odd
2: No parity
n156
019C
RS-422/485
send wait
time
Sets the time to wait for a response

after the DSR (data-send-request)
message is received from the Master.
10 to
65
1 ms
10
No
7-4
n157
019D
RS-422/485
RTS control
selection
Select whether or not to enable the

RTS (request-to-send) communications control function.
0, 1
No
7-4
0 to 70 1
Varies
with the
capacity.
No
6-6
0 to
120
120
No
6-8
16
No
6-8
0: RTS control enabled

1: RTS control disabled (available to
1-to-1 RS-422 communications
only)
n158
019E
Motor code
Sets the code to automatically set

the constants for energy-saving control.
0 to 10: 200-V AC, 0.1- to 4.0-kW
motor
20 to 30: 400-V AC, 0.1- to 4.0-kW
motor
n159
019F
upper limit at
60-Hz output
These parameters prevent the motor

from over excitation due to voltage
changes during energy-saving control.
n160
01A0
Energy-saving upper
limit voltage
at 6-Hz output
Sets the upper limit of output voltage

0 to 25 1%
as a percentage at each frequency
100%.
Note Normally, the default settings
do not need to be changed.
1%
10-27
List of Parameters
Param- Register No.
eter
(Hex)
No.
n161
01A1
Chapter 10
Name
Power detection width for

probe operation switching
Description
Setting
range
Unit of
setting

during
eroperaence
tion
page
0 to
100
1%
10
No
6-10
Sets the filter time constant of the

0 to
power detection block of the Inverter 255
operating in probe operation.
Filter time constant (ms) = Set value
in n162 x 4 (ms)
1 (4
ms)
No
6-10
Sets the detection width of power

that sets the Inverter into probe
operation.
Sets the width as a percentage
based on the power to be detected
as 100%.
Note
n162
01A2
Power detection filter

constant
Note
The Inverter will operate with a

power detection width of 10% if
the value is set to 0.
The Inverter will operate with a

time constant of 20 ms if the
value is set to 0.
n163
01A3
PID output
gain
Sets the rate by which PID control

0.0 to
value is multiplied for PID control.
25.0
0.1
1.0
No
6-18
n164
01A4
PID feedback input

block selection
Sets the feedback input block for

PID control detection.
0 to 5
No
6-18
---
---
---
---
---
0: Frequency reference control terminal for voltage input (0 to 10 V)

is enabled.
1: Frequency reference control terminal for current input (4 to
20 mA) is enabled.
2: Frequency reference control terminal for current input (0 to
20 mA) is enabled.
3: Multi-function analog voltage input
(0 to 10 V) is enabled.
4: Multi-function analog current input
(4 to 20 mA) is enabled.
5: Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.
Note Make sure that the target value
input and feedback value input
do not overlap with each other.
n165
10-28
01A5
Not used
---
List of Parameters
Param- Register No.
eter
(Hex)
No.
n166
01A6
Chapter 10
Name
Description
Input openphase detection level

(See note 1.)
Sets the main circuit DC voltage fluctuation level, as a percentage, for

detecting an input open phase.
Setting
range
Unit of
setting

during
eroperaence
tion
page
0 to
100
1%
No
6-47
0 to
255
(Sec)
1 sec
No
6-47
0 to
100
(%).
1%
No
6-47
0 to
2.0
(Sec)
0.1 sec
0.0
No
6-47
200-V-class Inverters: Set 400 V as

100%.
400-V-class Inverters: Set 800 V as
100%.
If 0 is set, the input open-phase
detection function will be disabled.
Recommended setting: 7 (%)
n167
01A7
Input phase
loss detection time
Sets the input open-phase detection

time in units of seconds.
If 0 is set, the input open-phase
Recommended setting: 10 (s)
n168
01A8
Output openphase detection level

(See note 1.)
Sets as a percentage the current for

detecting an output open phase, taking the Inverters rated output current
as 100%.
If 0 is set, the output open-phase
Recommended setting: 5 (%)
n169
01A9
Output openphase phase

detection
time (See
note 1.)
Sets the output open-phase detection time in units of seconds.

If 0 is set, the output open-phase
Recommended setting: 0.2 (s)
n173
01AD
DC injection
P gain
Sets gain level for DC in section

braking
1 to
999
83
No
---
n174
------
Not used
------
---
---
---
---
---
n175
01AF
Low-speed
carrier frequency reduction
selection
This function automatically reduces

0, 1
the carrier frequency to 2.5 kHz if the
output frequency is 5 kHz or less,
and the output current is 110% or
greater than the rated Inverter current. Normally this setting is not necessary. This function improves the
overload capacity at low frequencies.
0 (See
note 2.)
No
6-24
0: Disables low-speed carrier frequency reduction.

1: Enables low-speed carrier frequency reduction.
Note Normally, it is not necessary to
change the default setting.
Note
This function is enabled if n080

(carrier frequency) is set to 2,
3, or 4.
Note 1. Available for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Note 2. The default setting for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters is 1.
10-29
List of Parameters
Parameter
No.
Register No.
(Hex)
n176
01B0
Chapter 10
Name
Description
Setting
range
Parameter
copy and
verify function
selection
Selects the function to read, copy,

and verify the parameter between the
memory of the Inverter and that of the
Digital Operator.
Unit
of
setting
Default Changes
setting
during
operation
Reference
page
rdy to
Sno
---
rdy
No
3-10
0, 1
No
3-17
---
---
---
---
6-48
Used to display the software number

--of the Inverter for OMRONs control
reference use.
Note This parameter is monitored
only.
---
---
---
---
rdy: Ready to accept the next command.

rEd: Reads the Inverter parameter.
Cpy: Copies the parameter to the
Inverter.
vFy: Verifies the Inverter parameter.
vA: Checks the Inverter capacity
display.
Sno: Checks the software number.
n177
01B1
Parameter
read prohibit
selection
Select the copy-prohibit function.

Set this parameter to store the data in
the EEPROM of the Digital Operator.
0: Read prohibited for Inverter parameters (data cannot be stored in
EEPROM).
1: Read possible for Inverter parameters (data can be stored in
EEPROM).
n178
01B2
Fault log
Used to display the four most recent

fault recorded.
Fault
generation
item
n179
10-30
01B3
Software
number
Display
Note
The most recent fault is indicated by 1.
Note
This parameter is monitored

only.
11
Chapter 11
Using the Inverter for
a Motor
Using the Inverter for a Motor
Chapter 11
H Using Inverter for Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, a power loss is lightly higher than when operated
with a commercial power supply.
In addition, cooling effects also decline the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range.
The following figure shows allowable load characteristics of a standard motor.
If 100% torque is continuously required in the low-speed range, use a special motor for use with Inverters.
Allowable Load Characteristics of Standard Motor
25% ED (or 15 min)
40% ED (or 20 min)
60% ED (or 40 min)
Torque (%)
Continuous
Frequency (Hz)
D High-speed Operation
When using the motor at high-speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability.
D Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than
when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to
be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
D Vibration
The 3G3MV Series employs high carrier PWM control to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is
operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial
power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in
variable speed mode.
If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base.
Imbalance rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a high speed (60 Hz or more).
11-2
Chapter 11
D Noise
Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise,
however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
H Using Inverter for Special Motors

D Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore,
an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.
Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped.
Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanismwill be actuated, resulting in
an error.
D Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always
select an Inverter by checking its rated output current.
When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the
motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
D Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an
explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosionproof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
D Gear Motor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor
manufacturer. In particular, the continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range
may result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the
manufacturer.
D Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned on and off, synchronism may be lost.
D Single-phase Motor
Do not use the Inverter for a single-phase motor.
The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
H Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gear box or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission
mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.
11-3
Chapter 11
H Motor Burnout Caused by Insufficient Dielectric Strength of Each

Phase of Motor
Surge occurs among the phases of the motor when the output voltage is switched.
If the dielectric strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient, the motor may burn out.
The dielectric strength of each phase of the motor must be higher than the maximum surge voltage.
Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the power voltage imposed on the
Inverter.
Be sure to connect Inverter-dedicated motors if the Inverter is a 400-V-class model. Standard motors do
not have sufficient dielectric strength and may burn out.
11-4
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. I527-E3-2

Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision.
Revision
code
Date
Revised content
I527-E1-1
May 1999
Original production
I527-E1-2
December 1999
(Page numbers refer to the previous version.) New Inverters with different capacities added:
3G3MV-A2055/A2075/A4055/A4075. New functions added for with 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters, new
3G3IV--PFNj Input-side Noise Filter added, and general revisions and corrections made. Specific
changes are as follows:
Preliminary: Information added on installation types.
Page 1-2: Information added on enclosure ratings and motor capacity.
Page 1-7, 3-3: Information added on Reset Key. Note added after table.
Pages 1-8: Summary of new features added.
Page 2-4: Information added on dimensions and weight of new models.
Page 2-5: Caution notices changed to Warning notices.
Page 2-6: Information added on ambient operating temperatures, Inverter weights, and installing
Inverters in control panels.
Page 2-8: Description changed.
Page 2-9: Information added on removing the terminal cover and bottom cover.
Page 2-12, 2-19, 2-20: Information added for new models.
Page 2-14, 2-34, 3-7, 5-4, 5-8, 5-30, 5-35, 5-32, 7-25, 9-2, 9-4, 10-4, 6-27 to 6-28, 10-12,
10-14, 10-16, 10-17, 10-19, 10-26: Information added to tables. Notes added after tables.
Page 2-22: Information added on circuit breaker installation.
Page 2-23: Information added on magnetic contactors.
Page 2-24: Information added on noise filters.
Page 2-27: Information added on cable length.
Page 2-32: Information added on Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit.
Page 2-33: Information added to wiring diagram and table. Note added after table.
Page 2-39, 2-41, 6-8, 8-5, 8-8, 7-28, 8-9 to 8-13, 8-26, 9-10, 9-12, 9-14, 9-18, 9-19, 9-28:
Information added to table.
Page 3-8, 3-9, 5-29: Notes added after table.
Page 3-11: Information added on motor capacities.
Page 3-12, 3-16, 7-12, 7-15: Notes added.
Page 5-10: Information added on remote/local selection methods.
Page 5-14: Information added on frequency referencing by analog inputs.
Page 5-15: Information added on multi-function analog inputs.
Page 5-16: Information added on multi-function analog inputs and frequency reference
loss detection.
Page 5-24: Information added on pulse train frequency reference input filter time constant.
Page 5-34: Information added on external base block command and speed search.
Information added to table. Note added after table.
Page 6-4, 6-5, 6-20, 7-27: Changes made in table.
Page 6-6: Information added on energy-saving control.
Page 6-45: Information added on accumulated operating time.
Page 6-49: Information added on input and output open-phase detection.
Page 7-5: Correction made to section heading. Information added on baud rate, parity, and RTS
control selection.
Page 7-9: Information added on message intervals.
Page 7-10: Information added on message data configuration.
Page 7-11: Information added on error checks.
Page 7-22: Bit status changed.
Page 7-26, 7-27, 9-27, 8-26: Correction made to heading.
Page 8-16: Information added on multi-function inputs.
Page 8-23: Information added on sequence errors and unwanted current paths. Diagram added.
Page 9-7, 9-15: Model number changed.
Page 9-21, 9-24: Diagram added
Page 9-25: Information added to table. Diagram added.
Page 9-26: Information on input noise filters deleted.
R-1
Revision History
Revision
code
Date
Revised content
I527-E3-1
I527-E3-2
July 2002
Some of the extensive changes are listed here:

Chapter 2: major changes within tables, including a voltage correction on page 2-24.
Sec. 2-1-1 has new dimension drawings with corrected conversions now indicated.
Sec 2-1-3 now includes MV-4X NEMA 4X12 models.
Chapter 5: includes updated settings under Multi-function Analog Input Selection.
Throughout Sec. 5-7, there are major corrections. Set values and setting ranges were added to
Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration. Sec. 5-10, Multi-function I/O, now includes updates and clarifications in the set value and setting ranges.
Chapter 6: corrections and updates in set values and settings within Sec. 6-6 through 6-10.
Chapter 9: model numbers have been corrected within tables in the first 6 pages.
Specifications for Inverter Model V7CU- have been added to the tables which originally featured only
Model 3G3MV. Extensive updates were indicated in Sec. 9-2, Braking Resistor, to include
Applicable Models with DBT Resistor. Tables were omitted within Sec. 9-21.
A previous section on Scaling Meter was removed, and additional tables were omitted.
Corrections made within the table of applicable models. Copy relating to noise filter was removed
(from orig. page 9-27 to 9-31).
Chapter 10: The Parameters List has been extensively updated, including both additions and
corrections.
R-2

Omron 3g3mv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Omron 3g3mv

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Omron 3g3mv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-series product.

Items to Check Before Unpacking

Multi-function Compact Inverter

OMRON Product References

Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in

Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage

Operation and Adjustment Precautions

Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation

Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized

Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless

Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or

Checking Before Unpacking

D Checking the Nameplate

D Checking the Model

Maximum applicable motor capacity

Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity

Three-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)

Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models

D Checking for Damage

About this Manual

Describes features and nomenclature.

Chapter 2. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4. Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6. Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 8. Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 10. List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

H SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter Models

H Powerful Torque Ideal for a Variety of Applications

H Convenient Easy-to-use Functions

H International Standards (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)

H Compatible with CompoBus/D and RS-422/485

H Handles a Variety of I/O Signals

0.1 to 33.0 kHz set with parameter

Multi-function analog output or pulse train output is selectable as monitor output

Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz

The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this

Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored

Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter

Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation

Stops the Inverter unless parameter n007 is set to disable

H New Features for All 3G3MV Models

D Motor Rotation Selection (Parameter n040)

D Multi-Function Analog Output Setting (Parameter n066)

D Multi-Function Analog Output, Pulse Train Frequency Selection (Parameter n150)

D Undertorque Detection (Parameter n117, n118, n119)

H 230 VAC 3-Phase

H 230 VAC Single-Phase

H 460 VAC 3-Phase

H Enclosed Wall Mounted Type (NEMA 4)

Dimensions in inches (mm)

(NEMA 4X) V7CU

Rated output current (A)